L-PRO 4500: Transmission Line Protection Relay

Digitally signed by Norbert Wegner
DN: cn=Norbert Wegner, o=ERLPhase Power Technologies

Ltd., ou, email=nwegner@erlphase.com, c=CA
Date: 2021.09.20 10:13:52 -05'00'
L-PRO 4500
Transmission Line Protection Relay
User Manual
Version 2.2 Revision 0
Preface
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2021 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd. is strictly forbidden.
This manual is part of a complete set of product documentation that includes
detailed drawings and operation. Users should evaluate the information in the
context of the complete set of product documentation and their particular
applications. ERLPhase assumes no liability for any incidental, indirect or
consequential damages arising from the use of this documentation.
While all information presented is believed to be reliable and in accordance
with accepted engineering practices, ERLPhase makes no warranties as to the
completeness of the information.
All trademarks used in association with B-PRO, B-PRO Multi Busbar, Multi
Busbar Protection, F-PRO, iTMU, L-PRO, ProLogic, S-PRO, T-PRO,
TESLA, I/O Expansion Module, TESLA Control Panel, Relay Control Panel,
RecordGraph and RecordBase are trademarks of ERLPhase Power
Technologies Ltd.
Windows® is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
HyperTerminal® is a registered trademark of Hilgraeve.
Modbus® is a registered trademark of Modicon.
Contact Information
ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd.
Website: www.erlphase.com
Email: info@erlphase.com
Technical Support
Email: support@erlphase.com
Tel: 1-204-477-0591
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual i

Using This Guide
This User Manual describes the installation and operation of the L-PRO line
protection relay. It is intended to support the first time user and clarify the de-
tails of the equipment.
The manual uses a number of conventions to denote special information:
Example Describes
Start>Settings>Control Panel Choose the Control Panel submenu in the Set-

tings submenu on the Start menu.
Right-click Click the right mouse button.
Recordings Menu items and tabs are shown in italics.
Service User input or keystrokes are shown in bold.
Text boxes similar to this one Relate important notes and information.
.. Indicates more screens.
Indicates further drop-down menu, click to dis-

play list.
Indicates a warning.
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual iii

Table of Contents
Preface ......................................................................................i
Contact Information ...................................................................i
Using This Guide ..................................................................... iii
Table of Contents .....................................................................v
Acronyms.................................................................................ix
Version Compatibility ...............................................................xi
PC System Requirements and Software Installation ...............vi
1 Overview ................................................................. 1-1
Introduction ...................................................................... 1-1
Front View........................................................................ 1-3
Rear View ........................................................................ 1-4
Model Options/Ordering................................................... 1-6
2 Installation .............................................................. 2-1
Physical Mounting............................................................ 2-1
Case Grounding............................................................... 2-2
Power Supply................................................................... 2-3
AC and DC Wiring............................................................ 2-4
Communication Wiring ..................................................... 2-5
3 Setup and Communications.................................. 3-1
Introduction ...................................................................... 3-1
Power Supply................................................................... 3-2
Time Sources................................................................... 3-3
Communicating with the Relay Intelligent Electronic
Device (IED) .................................................................... 3-4
USB Link .......................................................................... 3-5
Network Link .................................................................... 3-6
Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s
Maintenance Menu .......................................................... 3-7
Firmware Update ........................................................... 3-11
Accessing the Relay’s SCADA Services........................ 3-12
Communication Port Details .......................................... 3-13
4 Using the IED (Getting Started) ............................ 4-1
Start-up Sequence ........................................................... 4-1
Front Panel Display.......................................................... 4-2
Terminal Mode ............................................................... 4-15
Relay Control Panel ....................................................... 4-16
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual v

Table of Contents
5 Protection Functions and Specifications ............ 5-1

Protection and Recording Functions................................ 5-1
Communication-Aided Scheme ..................................... 5-53
Recording Functions ...................................................... 5-59
Event Log....................................................................... 5-62
Fault Log ........................................................................ 5-63
Output Matrix ................................................................. 5-64
6 Data Communications ........................................... 6-1
SCADA Protocol .............................................................. 6-1
IEC 61850 Communication .............................................. 6-6
7 Settings and Analysis Software............................ 7-1
L-PRO Offliner Setting Software ...................................... 7-2
RecordGraph Software .................................................. 7-33
ERL 61850 IED Configurator ......................................... 7-34
8 IEC 61850 Implementation Overview.................... 8-1
Introduction ...................................................................... 8-1
The Substation Configuration Language (SCL) ............... 8-2
The Engineering Process................................................. 8-3
Control Commands .......................................................... 8-4
IEC 61850 Edition 2.0 Implementation ............................ 8-5
9 Acceptance/Protection Function Test Guide ...... 9-1
Introduction ...................................................................... 9-1
Acceptance Testing ......................................................... 9-1
L-PRO Acceptance Test Procedure Outline .................... 9-4
Appendix A IED Specifications..................................... A-1
Distance Element Operating Time Curves at Nominal
Frequency.........................................................................A-9
Frequency Element Operating Time Curves..................A-11
External Input Pickup Filter ............................................A-13
Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges ......................... B-1
Settings and Ranges........................................................B-1
Appendix C Hardware Description ...............................C-1
Appendix D Event Messages .......................................D-1
Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol .... E-1
Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile ................................. F-1
Appendix G Mechanical Drawings ...............................G-1
Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings................................H-1
vi L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

Table of Contents
Appendix I Connection Diagram ................................... I-1

Terminal Numbering and Hardware Configurations.......... I-3
Appendix J AC Schematic Drawings.............................J-1
Appendix K DC Schematic Drawings........................... K-1
Appendix L Recloser Operation Example .................... L-1
Appendix M Failure Modes ......................................... M-1
Actions ............................................................................ M-1
Appendix N IEC 61850 Conformance Statements and
Data Mapping Specification .........................................N-1
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
(PICS) ..............................................................................N-1
Model Implementation Conformance Statement
(MICS) .............................................................................N-9
TISSUES Implementation Conformance Statement
(TICS) ............................................................................N-11
Protocol Implementation eXtra Information for Testing
(PIXIT) ...........................................................................N-20
Data Mapping Specifications .........................................N-34
Index ......................................................................................... I
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual vii

Acronyms
ASG - Active Setting Group
CCVT - Capacitance Coupled Voltage Transformer

CID - file extension (.CID) for Configured IED Description
CS - Control Switch
CT - Current Transformer
DCB - Directional Comparison Blocking

DCE - Data Communication Equipment
DIB - Digital Input Board
DIGIO - Digital Input/Output Board
DMDA - Dead Main Dead Aux
DMLA - Dead Main Live Aux
DSP - Digital signal processor
DTE - Data Terminal Equipment
GPS - Global Positioning System
HMI - Human Machine Interface
ICD - file extension (.ICD) for IED Capability Description

IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
IED - Intelligent Electronic Device
IP - Internet Protocol (IP) address
IRIG-B - Inter-range instrumentation group time codes
LE- Load Encroachment

LED - Light-emitting Diode
LHS - Left Hand Side
LMDA - Live Main Dead Aux
LOP - Loss of Potential
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual ix

Acronyms
PLC - Programmable Logic Controller

POTT - Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip
PUTT - Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip
PT - Permissive Trip
RHS - Right Hand Side

RTOS - Real Time Operating System
RTU - Remote Terminal Unit
SCADA - Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition

SG - Setting Group
SIR ratio - Source Impedance Ratio
SOTF - Switch-On-To-Fault
TT - Transfer Trip
TUI - Terminal User Interface
UI - User Interface
VI - Virtual Input
WI - Weak Infeed
x L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

Version Compatibility
For version compatibility check D04234 - L-PRO 4500 Firmware User Re-
lease Description which is available on the ERLPhase website:
www.erlphase.com.
This manual was created using the following software and firmware versions:
Relay Control Panel v3.3
L-PRO Offliner v3.1
This manual is compatible with higher versions of firmware or software

unless a higher version of this manual states otherwise.
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual xi

PC System Requirements and Software
Installation
Hardware
The minimum hardware requirements are:
• 1 GHz processor
• 2 GB RAM
• 20 GB available hard disk space
• USB port
• Serial communication port
Operating System
One of the following operating systems must be installed and functional prior
to installing the applications:
• Microsoft Windows 7
• Microsoft Windows 10
Software Installation
All required software for user interface, settings and record analysis is avail-
able directly from the ERLPhase website. The following relevant software and
documentation is available:
• L-PRO Offliner
• Relay Control Panel
• ERL 61850 Configurator Tool
• RecordGraph
• USB Driver
• L-PRO 4500 User Manual
• L-PRO 4500 Function Logic Diagram
Anti-virus/Anti-spyware Software
If an anti-virus/anti-spyware software on your local system identifies any of
the ERLPhase applications as a “potential threat”, it will be necessary to con-
figure your anti-virus/anti-software to classify it as “safe” for its proper oper-
ation. Please consult the appropriate anti-virus/anti-spyware software
documentation to determine the relevant procedure.
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual vi

1 Overview
1.1 Introduction
The L-PRO 4500 provides easy-to-use, state-of-the-art comprehensive dis-
tance and directional line protection for medium to extra high voltage transmis-
sion lines using communication-based schemes. It provides control,
automation, metering, monitoring, fault oscillography, dynamic swing record-
ing, event logging with advanced communications in a flexible cost effective
package.
The primary protection is line protection with 5 zones of phase and ground dis-
tance functions – user-defined Mho or Quadrilateral shapes and communica-
tions based schemes (i.e. teleprotection or pilot schemes).
To provide a complete package of protection and control the relay supplies oth-
er functions such as:
• 1.0 to 1.3 cycle operation at 80% reach, ideal for EHV transmission line
applications
• Ring bus capability – breaker failure and individual breaker monitoring
• 4-shot recloser with dead line/dead bus control and sync check
• Single pole and three pole trip and reclose
• 24 statements of ProLogic addresses special protection needs
• Power Swing Blocking / Tripping
• Load Encroachment
• Switch-On-To-Fault function
• VT Supervision function
• CT Supervision function
• Over / Under Voltage functions
• 8 Setting Groups (SG) with setting group logic
• Back up Directional overcurrent and earth fault protection
• Broken Conductor protection
• Over / Under / Rate of change of frequency devices
Relay Control Panel (RCP) is the Windows graphical user interface software
tool provided with all 4000 series and higher (new generation) ERL relays to
communicate, retrieve and manage records, event logs, fault logs, manage set-
tings (identification, protection, SCADA etc.,), display real time metering val-
ues, view, analyze, and export records in COMTRADE format.
In addition to the protection functions the relay provides fault recording (128
samples/cycle) to analyze faults and to review the operation of the overall pro-
tection scheme. The relay also has low speed swing recording which can be
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual 1-1

1 Overview
used to analyze system stability. The triggers for fault recording are established
by programming the output matrix and allowing any internal relay function,
external input or GOOSE messaging input to initiate recording.
Figure 1.1: L-PRO 4500 Relay Function Line Diagram
1-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

1 Overview
1.2 Front View
1 2 3
4 5
1. LEDs for displaying the status of the IED
2. Front Panel LCD display for events, targets, settings etc.
3. 18 Programmable Target LEDs
4. Push buttons used for navigation of LCD menus
5. USB Port for maintenance and user interface
Figure 1.2: L-PRO 4500 Relay Front View

1 Overview
1.3 Rear View
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
1. SLOT 1 to 3 / CON 3: Progammable External Inputs

2. SLOT 1 to 4 / CON 1: Progammable Outputs
3. SLOT 5 / CON 1 (A & B): 100BASE-T or 100BASE-FX
4. SLOT 6 / 01-04: AC Voltage Inputs
SLOT 6 / 09-28: AC Current Inputs
6. SLOT 1 / CON 4: Power Supply
7. SLOT 1 to 4 / CON 2 (1-6): Programmable External Inputs
SLOT 1 to 4 / CON 2 (8-A): Programmable Outputs
8. SLOT 5 / CON 2: RS485
9. SLOT 5 / CON 4: External Clock, IRIG-B Un-Modulated Input
10. SLOT 5 / CON 3: External Clock, IRIG-B Modulated Input
Figure 1.3: L-PRO 4500 Relay Rear View
The rear view shown is for the 10CT, 6PT with 24DI, 32 DO configu-
ration. Other hardware configurations have a reduced number of an-
alogs and digitals available on the rear panel.

1 Overview
AC Current and The relay is provided with screw type terminal blocks for the analog inputs.
Voltage Inputs There are two order-configurable analog input configurations available:
• 10 current inputs, 6 voltage inputs (Option A). Includes two three-phase
current inputs, two single-phase neutral current inputs, two single-phase
zero sequence current inputs and two three-phase voltage inputs.
• 5 current inputs, 4 voltage inputs (Option B). Includes one three-phase cur-
rent input, one single-phase neutral current input, one single-phase zero se-
quence current input, one three-phase voltage input and one single-phase
voltage input.
The relay supports 1A and 5A CT secondary input levels. Both levels are avail-
able on the rear panel, but you must use either 1A or 5A for all inputs.
Each of the current input circuits has polarity (•) marks.
A complete schematic of current and voltage circuits is shown in Appendix J
“AC Schematic Drawings”.
External Inputs The relay contains an order-configurable amount of external inputs and output
and Relay contacts. The ordering options for external inputs and output contacts are:
Output • 8 External Inputs, 8 Output Contacts (Option A)
Contacts • 16 External Inputs, 16 Output Contacts (Option B)
• 16 External Inputs, 24 Output Contacts (Option C)
• 24 External Inputs, 32 Output Contacts (Option D)
External dc voltage of either 24, 48, 110/125 V or 220/250 V nominal are avail-
able. Selection of specific voltage is factory selectable.
To guarantee security from spurious voltage pulses, the L-PRO has an external
input pickup filter setting. This setting is made in Relay Control Panel under
Utilities > External Inputs. The setting is an integer number representing the
number of samples in a packet of 16 that must be recognized by the DSP as
high before an External Input status is changed from low to high. See specifi-
cations for External Input Pickup Filter in “External Input Pickup Filter”
in Appendix A.
Relay If the relay becomes inoperative, then the Relay Inoperative Alarm output con-
Inoperative tact (Output Contact 1 - NC) closes and all tripping functions are blocked.
Alarm Output

1 Overview
1.4 Model Options/Ordering

The relay is available as a horizontal mount, for details see “Mechanical Draw-
ings” in Appendix G.
The following options must be specified at the time of ordering:
1. The system base frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
2. Power supply rating of 110/220 Vdc or 24/48 Vdc.
3. Number of External Inputs and Relay Output Contacts. See“External Inputs
and Relay Output Contacts” on page 1-5 for options.
4. Analog Input configuration. See “AC Current and Voltage Inputs” on
page 1-5 for configuration options.
5. External Input rating of 24, 48, 110/125 or 220/250 Vdc.
6. Number of rear Ethernet ports. If PRP is needed, two ports shall be selected.
The two rear Ethernet ports can be ordered as one copper-one optical port
or both optical ports or both copper ports. These ports are available as ei-
ther 100BASE-T (RJ-45) or 100BASE-FX (optical ST).

2 Installation
This section deals with the installation of the L-PRO relay when first delivered.
The section covers the physical mounting, AC and DC wiring and the Commu-
nication wiring.
2.1 Physical Mounting

Standard E12 The relay is 340mm (W) x 177mm(H) x 285mm(D). A complete mechanical
drawing is shown, for details see “Mechanical Drawings” in Appendix G
To install the relay the following is needed:
• Cut-out (159mm(H) x 320mm(W))
• M4 screws and nuts

2 Installation
2.2 Case Grounding
WARNING!
The ground terminal (also known as the protective earth) on the rear
of the unit and the modules must be connected. Refer to the diagram
of the rear of the unit, “L-PRO 4500 Relay Rear View” on page 1-4
for the location of the ground terminal. The protective earth connec-
tion shall be checked before carrying out any other actions and shall
not be removed when the unit is energized.
The terminal used must be made of a material that is galvanically compatible

with the zinc plated washers, nut and stud provided with the unit. Tinned ter-
minals are acceptable. The recommended minimum protective earth conductor
wire size is 3.3 mm² unless otherwise required by local or country wiring reg-
ulations. Copper wire is recommended and must be must be low-inductance
and as short as possible.

2 Installation
2.3 Power Supply

A wide range power supply is standard. The nominal operating range is 20-60
Vdc or 110 – 250 Vdc +/- 20% or 100 – 240 Vac +5%/-20%, 50/60 Hz. To pro-
tect against a possible short circuit in the supply use an inline fuse or circuit
breaker with a 5 A rating. Ensure that the chassis is grounded for proper oper-
ation and safety.
There are no power switches on the relay. When the power supply is connect-
ed, the relay starts its initialization process. See “Using the IED (Getting Start-
ed)” on page 4-1 for the start up process details.
WARNING!
Ground the relay to station ground using the case-grounding terminal

at the back of the relay, for details see Figure 1.3: L-PRO 4500 Relay
Rear View on page 1-4.

2 Installation
2.4 AC and DC Wiring

For details see “AC Schematic Drawings” in Appendix J and “DC Schematic
Drawings” in Appendix K.
Ensure the power supply input and the AC and DC wires are de-en-
ergized before working on the wiring. Failure to do so could result in
electric shock.
CT circuits shall be short-circuited before working on the current in-

put wires.

2 Installation
2.5 Communication Wiring

EIA-RS485 The relay’s serial port (Port 52) is a EIA RS485 Data Communications Equip-
ment (DCE) device with a 3 pin connector. This allows them to be connected
directly to other relays in parallel and communication to a PC serial port with
a standard straight-through male-to-female serial cable with RS485 to RS232
serial converter.
RS485 communication can work for maximum 1.2Kms with single IED.
Shielded cable is recommended for pin-out, see “Communication Port Details”
on page 3-13.
RJ-45 The rear two Ethernet Ports 51A and 51B may also be configured as
100BASE-T Ethernet Ports.
Optical ST 51A and 51B in the rear panel may be configured with ST style optical connec-
tors if desired. These are 1300 nm 100BASE-FX optical Ethernet ports. The
transmit and receive connections are indicated on the rear panel. Use standard
multi-mode cables with ST connectors for this interface.
USB There is a standard USB-B connector on the front panel. This is a USB 2.0 Full
Speed interface and can be connected to a PC with a standard USB peripheral
cable (A style to B style).
IRIG-B Wiring The relay accepts both modulated and unmodulated IRIG-B standard time sig-
nals with or without the IEEE 1344 extensions. The IRIG-B connector on the
back of the relay is BNC type (Port 531 & 541).
Shielded wire shall be used for all connections that run outside of the
panel in which the L-PRO is installed. The shield must be grounded
only at one end at the point where the cable enters the panel. The
IRIG input is the ONLY exception which uses unbalanced co-axial
cable.

3 Setup and Communications
3.1 Introduction
This chapter discusses setting up and communicating with the relay including
the following:
• Power supply
• Time Sources
• Communicating with the relay using a network link and a direct serial link
• Using Relay Control Panel to access the relay’s user interface
• Using HyperTerminal to access the relay’s maintenance menu
• Setting the Baud rate
• Accessing the relay’s Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition (SCADA)
services

3.2 Power Supply

See “Power Supply” on page 2-3 and “Case Grounding” on page 2-2 for details
regarding the power supply.

3.3 Time Sources

The L-PRO 4500 relay supports the use of modulated or un-modulated IRIG-
B time signals (external), primary/secondary SNTP network based time syn-
chronization (external), a proprietary System Sync signal, and manually con-
figurable system time based on a free-running, internal oscillator. The internal
free-running oscillator is always present on the IED and, in the absence of any
external time source, will become the default mode of time synchronization.
An externally applied IRIG-B time source will have the highest order of pre-
cedence, and will typically offer the highest available time accuracy, exceed-
ing 1 μs after calibration, when derived from an external GPS satellite source.
The L-PRO 4500 relay will also process derived IRIG-B style signals generat-
ed from alternate time sources, using time quality information to differentiate.
The L-PRO 4500 supports synchronization with the proprietary ERLPhase
System Sync time source, available via the ERLPhase I/O Expansion IED. The
I/O Expansion IED may be used as time source (called System Sync). System
Sync is an IRIG-type generated signal which is available for use via the BNC
input on the rear of the relay. For more information on the ERLPhase I/O Ex-
pansion IED, visit erlphase.com for more information.
An SNTP time source has a lower order of precedence from a valid IRIG-B
source. SNTP operation (primary and secondary) requires network access and
the selection and configuration of suitable SNTP network sources. The SNTP
time may be configured for re-synchronization cycles ranging from 15 minutes
to 36 hours, adjusting the IED system time to an accuracy of +/- 5 milliseconds
in ideal network conditions.
The IED is equipped with an internal free-running oscillator used to generate
a 1 PPS time signal (real-time clock or RTC) in the absence of any alternate
available time source. Use of the RTC as the primary IED time source requires
manual time configuration, with the general accuracy subject to user input pa-
rameters, and is recommended primarily for stand-alone, unsynchronized ap-
plications. The internal oscillator carries a lifetime accuracy (including
temperature effects and aging) of +/-20 ppm.
The order of precedence for time sources is as follows:
1. IRIG-B or System Sync
2. SNTP
3. Internal clock (RTC)
For example, if a valid IRIG-B and SNTP source are both connected to the
IED, IRIG-B will automatically be used. The ongoing presence of a valid
IRIG-B or SNTP time source is indicated by an LED on the front panel of the
IED and is evident in data records.
The Output Matrix also provides an option to assign Output Contacts to the
Time Sync Alarm. When a valid external time source is not present then the
Time Sync Alarm will go High and the associated Output Contacts will close.

3.4 Communicating with the Relay Intelligent

Electronic Device (IED)
Connect to the relay to access its user interface and supervisory control and
data acquisition (SCADA) services by:
• Front panel USB 2.0 interface (user interface and maintenance)
• Rear panel Ethernet network link (user interface and SCADA)
• Rear panel serial link (SCADA only)
The relay has a front panel USB port (Port 010), two rear panel Ethernet net-
work ports (Port 51A and 51B, redundant ports) and one rear serial RS-485
port (Port 52) to provide access to SCADA services.
The relay’s user interface is accessed through the Relay Control Panel.

3.5 USB Link
The PC must be appropriately configured for USB communication.
Figure 3.1: USB Link
USB Driver Installation

To create a USB link between the relay and the computer, simply connect the
PC to the front USB port of the LPRO. The USB driver is automatically in-
stalled from the Windows operating system.
To verify that the USB connection was successfully recognized, and to verify
which port the USB Serial Port is using, do the following:
Go to
Windows Explorer > Right click on Computer > Manage >Device Manag-
er > Ports
Look for the port number associated to this device.
“USB Serial Port”
Look for a COM#, where “#” can be 1, 2, 3, etc. Leave the default settings
for this port.
The baud rate for the relay USB Port is fixed at 115200. The baud rate can be
viewed on the front LCD display of the relay by navigating to:
Main Menu > System & Utilities >Communication

3.6 Network Link
Figure 3.2: Network Link
Access both the relay’s user interface and DNP3 SCADA services simultane-
ously with the Ethernet TCP/IP LAN link through the rear network port. The
LPRO-4500 has two physical network ports for redundancy support that share
a common IP and MAC address. Each physical port is either a 100BASE-T
copper interface with an RJ-45 connector or 100BASE-FX optical interface
with an ST style connector. Both ports are factory configurable as a copper or
optical interface.
DNP3 SCADA services can also be accessed over the LAN, for details see
“Communication Port Details” on page 3-13.
Connect to the Ethernet LAN using a Cat 5 cable with an RJ-45 connector or
100BASE-FX 1300 nm, multi-mode optical fiber with an ST style connector.
By default, the network port is assigned with an IP address of 192.168.100.80.
If this address is not suitable, it may be modified using the relay’s Maintenance
Menu. For details see “Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s Mainte-
nance Menu” on page 3-7.

3.7 Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s

Maintenance Menu
This section describes how to configure a standard Windows VT-100 terminal
program on the PC for use with the relay.
The computer must be connected to the relay via the front USB Port 010 for
access to all of the Maintenance functions. A network connection can be used
for limited access to the Maintenance Menu.
The relay is accessed using a standard VT-100 terminal style program on the
computer, eliminating the need for specialized software. Any terminal program
that fully supports VT-100 emulation and provides z-modem file transfer ser-
vices can be used. HyperTerminal PE, is used here as an example.
Configure the terminal program as described in Table 3.1:Terminal Program
Setup and link it to the appropriate serial port, modem or TCP/IP socket on the
computer.
Table 3.1: Terminal Program Setup
Baud rate Default fixed baud rate 115,200 N81 (no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit).
Data bits 8
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Flow control Hardware or Software.

Hardware flow control is recommended. The relay automatically sup-
ports both on all its serial ports.
Function, arrow Terminal keys

and control keys
Emulation VT100
Font Use a font that supports line drawing (e.g. Terminal or MS Line Draw).
If the menu appears outlined in odd characters, the font selected is not
supporting line drawing characters.
To configure HyperTerminal follow these instructions:

In Windows 7 or Windows 10,open HyperTerminal PE;
If “Default Telnet Program?” windows pops up,
Check “Don’t ask me this question again”
Hit No.
First time use of HyperTerminal will ask for “Location Information”.
Fill with appropriate information, e.g.:
“What country/region are you in now”
Choose “Canada”

“What area code (or city code) are you are in now?”
Enter “306”
“If you need to specify a carrier code, what is it?”
Enter “”, i.e. leave blank
“If you dial a number to access an outside line, what is it?”
Enter “”.
“The phone system at this location uses:”
Choose “Tone dialing”.
Hit OK.
First time use of HyperTerminal will show “Phone and Modem Options”.
Hit Cancel.
HyperTerminal will show initially “Connection Description”.

Enter a name for the relay, e.g: “LPRO4500”.
Hit OK.
In the window “Connect To”

“Connect using”
Choose “COM#”, where “#” was obtained previously in Section 2.5 USB
Link, after installing the USB driver.
Let’s assume in this case it is COM3.
In the window “COM3 Properties” choose:

“115200”
“8”
“None”
“1”
“Hardware”
Hit Apply then hit OK
At this time the connection should already be established.
Hit Enter in the terminal window.

Login as maintenance in lower case.
Figure 3.3: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance
Menu Commands 1, 4, 5, 6 and 7 are Port 010 access only.
Commands
Table 3.2: Maintenance Menu Commands
Modify IP address Modifies the LAN IP addresses, network mask, default gateway
and IEC61850 network port assignment.
View system diagnostic Displays the internal status log.
Retrieve system diagnos- Automatically packages up the internal status log plus setting
tics and setup information and downloads it in compressed form to
the computer. This file can then be sent to our customer support
to help diagnose a problem.
Restore settings (com- Use these commands to force the system back to default
mands 4, 5 and 6) values, if a problem is suspected due to the unit's settings,
calibration and/or setup parameters.
NOTE: If Command 4 is performed, the unit must be re-

calibrated before being put back into service. See “Calibration”
on page 9-2 for calibration instructions.
Force hardware reset Manually initiates a hardware reset. Note that the
communication link is immediately lost and cannot be
reestablished until the unit completes its start-up.
Network utilities Enters network utilities sub-menu.
Monitor SCADA Shows real time display of SCADA data.

Table 3.3: Network Utilities Menu Commands
View protocol statistics View IP, TCP and UDP statistics
View active socket states View current states of active sockets
View routing tables View routing tables
Ping Check network connection to given point
Exit network utilities Exit network utilities menu and return to Maintenance Menu
Commands

3.8 Firmware Update

The relay has an update login that can be accessed by a connection through a
VT100 terminal emulator (such as HyperTerminal). This login is available
only from the front USB port.
1. Use the terminal program to connect to Port 010.
2. Select Enter, the terminal responds with a login prompt.
3. Login as update in lower case.
The firmware update is used to update the relay’s software with maintenance
or enhancement releases. Please see the L-PRO Firmware Update Procedure
documentation that comes with the firmware update for instructions on how to
update the firmware on the relay.

3.9 Accessing the Relay’s SCADA Services

The relay supports DNP3 (Level 2) and Modbus SCADA protocols as a stan-
dard feature on all ERLPhase relays. DNP3 is available through a direct serial
link or the Ethernet LAN on top of either TCP or UDP protocols. The Modbus
implementation supports both Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) binary or ASCII
modes and is available through a serial link.
The relay’s serial port (Port 52) is dedicated for use with Modbus or DNP3 se-
rial protocols. The serial port uses standard RS-485 signaling. An external RS-
485 ↔ RS-232 converter can be used to connect to an RS-232 network.
For details on connecting to the serial port see “Communicating with the Relay
Intelligent Electronic Device (IED)” on page 3-4 and “Communication Port
Details” on page 3-13.
The DNP3 protocol can also be run across the Ethernet LAN. Both DNP over
TCP and DNP over UDP are supported. For details on connecting to the Ether-
net LAN see “Network Link” on page 3-6.
Complete details on the Modbus and DNP3 protocol services can be found in
the Appendices, for details see “Modbus RTU Communication Protocol”
in Appendix E and “DNP3 Device Profile” in Appendix F.
Protocol To select the desired SCADA protocol go to L-PRO 4500 Offliner SCADA
Selection communications section. Select the protocol and set the corresponding param-
eters.
Communication The serial port’s communication parameters are set in the L-PRO 4500 Of-
Parameters fliner SCADA communications section. Both the baud rate and the parity bit
can be configured. The number of data bits and stop bits are determined auto-
matically by the selected SCADA protocol. Modbus ASCII uses 7 data bits.
Modbus RTU and DNP Serial use 8 data bits. All protocols use 1 stop bit ex-
cept in the case where either Modbus protocol is used with no parity; this uses
2 stop bits, as defined in the Modbus standard.
Diagnostics Protocol monitor utilities are available to assist in resolving SCADA commu-
nication difficulties such as incompatible baud rate or addressing. The utilities
can be accessed through the Maintenance Menu Commands, see “Maintenance
Menu Commands” on page 3-9.

3.10 Communication Port Details
Table 3.4: Communication Port Details
Location Port a Function
Front Panel 010 USB-B receptacle, High speed USB 2.0 interface.
Used for user interface access.
Default fixed baud rate 115,200 N81 (no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop
bit).
Rear Panel 51A RJ-45 receptacle or ST type optical receptacle (factory config-
ured). 100BASE-T or 100BASE-FX (1300nm, multi-mode) Ether-
net interface. Same MAC and IP address as Port 51B (for
redundancy support).
Used for user interface access or IEC61850/DNP SCADA access
through Ethernet LAN.
51B RJ-45 receptacle or ST type optical receptacle (factory config-

ured). 100BASE-T or 100BASE-FX (1300 nm, multi-mode) Ether-
net interface. Same MAC and IP address as Port 51A (for
redundancy support).
Used for user interface access or IEC61850/DNP SCADA access
through Ethernet LAN.
Rear Panel 52 RS-485 terminal block connector.

Used only for SCADA communication.
Default Setting: 19,200 baud O71 (odd parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop)
Rear Panel 531 BNC receptacle, IRIG-B Interface. Modulated.
Rear Panel 541 BNC receptacle, IRIG-B Interface. Un-modulated.
a. See Appendix I for the connection diagram and the terminal numbering
description.

4 Using the IED (Getting Started)
This section provides information on the start-up sequence and ways to inter-
face with the relay. Descriptions of the Front Panel Display, Terminal Mode
and Metering Data are provided.
4.1 Start-up Sequence

When the power supply is connected, the following initialization initializing
sequence takes place:
Table 4.1: Initialization Sequence
TEST MODE — red LED on when power applied
RELAY FUNCTIONAL — green LED on within 7 seconds after power applied
TEST MODE — red LED off then on within 20 seconds
Front Display — on on within 20 seconds after power applied
TEST MODE — red LED off within 30 seconds after power applied
When the Relay Functional LED comes on, it indicates that the DSP is actively
protecting the system.
When the test mode LED goes off, the relay is capable of recording and com-
municating with the user.

4.2 Front Panel Display

The front panel display of the IED allows the user to interact with the unit to
obtain immediate system information. User interface is provided through a
graphical LCD screen, LEDs and a push button keypad. The level of interac-
tion and system access is controlled through a series of access level; VIEW,
CHANGE and SERVICE, with each requiring a unique password allowing dif-
fering levels of accessibility. Additionally, the IED front panel provides a USB
Type B port, used in general unit communications and controlled service ac-
cess.
1 2 3
4 5
1. LEDs for displaying the status of the IED
2. Front Panel LCD display for events, targets, settings etc.
3. 18 Programmable Target LEDs
4. Push buttons used for navigation of LCD menus
5. USB Port for maintenance and user interface
Figure 4.1: Front Panel Display

LED Lights
Table 4.2: Description of LED Lights
Relay Functional Indicates when the relay is functional. When the Relay Functional
green LED goes on, the rear Relay Inoperative contact changes to
an open and the protective functions become functional.
Time Sync Indicates the presence of a valid IRIG-B or SNTP time signal.
Service Required Indicates the relay needs service. This LED can be the same state
as the Relay Functional LED or can be of the opposite state
depending on the nature of the problem.
The following items bring up this LED:
• DSP failure - protection difficulties within the relay.
• Communication failure within the relay.
• Internal relay problems.
Test Mode Occurs when the relay output contacts are intentionally blocked.
Possible reasons are:
• Relay initialization on startup
• User interface processor has reset and is being tested.
The user cannot communicate with the relay through the ports until
the front display becomes active and the TEST MODE LED goes
out. Normally, the red Target LED remains off after this start-up
unless the relay had unviewed target messages.
Alarm (Target LED Occurs when an enabled relay function picks up.
18) The red Alarm LED should be off if there are no inputs to the relay.
If the Alarm LED is on, check the event log messages which are
available through the menu system.
Target LED Number
1-17 User Configurable via Output Matrix
For more information on configuring the Target LEDs, see “Target LED” on
page 5-66 and “Phase Indication Tripping” on page 5-70.
Target LED assignments shown in the table above are the default
values. The Target LEDs are configurable by the user through the Of-
fliner settings (output matrix).
Push Buttons
Table 4.3: Identification of Push Buttons
Up, Down, Right, Left, Enter, Escape Used to navigate the front panel screens.

Display The LCD screen of the L-PRO 4500 relay provides information to the user in
the form of data, messages and visual feedback for user interaction. It also al-
lows for the user to modify protection function settings directly. A series of ac-
cess controlled menu options are available through the front panel LCD and
Push Button keypad provided on the unit, allowing unit level access to many
of the same features available through the supporting ERLPhase relay software
tools. In all cases, a password is required to obtain more than the basic IED in-
formation.
The basic menu structure for navigation of the LCD screen is given below:
The LCD screen displays the following metering parameters.
• Phase-wise voltage magnitude & angle
• Phase-to-phase voltage magnitude & angle
• Phase-wise current magnitude & angle
• 3-phase real power
• 3-phase reactive power
• Frequency
• 3-phase apparent power
• Power factor
• All sequence voltages
• All sequence currents
• Single-phase real power
• Single-phase reactive power
• Single-phase Apparent power
• Single-phase power factor
The metering display in LCD screen has a resolution of three decimals for both
measured and calculated analog values.
Table 4.4: Navigation of the LCD Screen
Menu Rights Required*
Main Menu
Relay Info.
Metering
Analog
Analog Inputs
Line Quantities
External Inputs
Output contacts

Logic
Logic Protection 1
Logic Protection 2
Logic Protection 3
Logic Protection 4
ProLogic
Group Logic
Virtual Inputs
MMS Commands
Events
Faults
Utilities
View / Change / Service: Choice login
Enter Password (C,S)
Setup
Timeouts
Login timeout (C, S)
Screen timeout (C, S)
Time Settings
Current Date & Time
Set Time Display as (C,S)
Set Manual Time (C,S)
Set DST Time (C,S)
Set Time Zone (C,S)
IRIG & SNTP
IRIG (C,S)
SNTP (C,S)
External Inputs (C,S)
Maintenance
Output Contacts Ctrl (S)
Virtual Inputs Control (C, S)
Setting Groups Control (C, S)
Erase (C, S)

Erase Records (C,S)
Erase Event Logs (C,S)
Erase Fault Logs (C,S)
Communication
IP Address and Mask (S)
IEC61850 Port (S)
Front USB Baud rate
Records
View Record List
Record List
Trigger Fault (C,S)
Trigger Event (C,S)
Trigger Swing (C,S)
Calibration (S)
Settings
View / Change / Service: Choice login
Enter Password
System Parameters
General (C,S)
Line (C,S)
CT Turns Ratio
Ring Bus (C,S)
CT Secondary (C,S)
Main Phase CT (C,S)
Aux Phase CT (C,S)
Main Neutral CT (C,S)
Aux Neutral CT (C,S)
3I0 Input #1 CT (C,S)
3I0 Input #2 CT (C,S)
PT Turns Ratio
CCVT Compensation (C,S)
Main PT (C,S)
Auxiliary PT (C,S)

Record Length (C,S)
Setting Group N
Line Parameters (C,S)
Scheme Selector (C,S)
Protection Functions
21P - Phase Distance
Zone 1 (C,S)
Zone 2 (C,S)
Zone 3 (C,S)
Zone 4 (C,S)
Zone 5 (C,S)
Load Encroachment (C,S)
Top Tilt Angle (C,S)
21N - Ground Distance
Zone 1 (C,S)
Zone 2 (C,S)
Zone 3 (C,S)
Zone 4 (C,S)
Zone 5 (C,S)
Top Tilt Angle (C,S)
68 Power Swing (C,S)
SOTF (C,S)
Weak Infeed (C,S)
25/27/59 Sync Check (C,S)
79-3Ph Recloser
Scheme Timer (C,S)
79-3Ph Recloser (C,S)
79-1Ph Recloser (C,S)
59 - Overvoltage
59-1 Main (C,S)
59-2 Main (C,S)
59-1 Aux (C,S)
59-2 Aux (C,S)

59N - Zero Seq. Overvoltage
59N Inv. Time (C,S)
59N Def. Time (C,S)
27 - Undervoltage
27 Main (C,S)
27 Auxiliary (C,S)
60 - LOP Alarm (C,S)
60 - CT Supervision
60CTS Main (C,S)
60CTS Aux. (C,S)
81 - Over/Under Freq.
81-1 (C,S)
81-2 (C,S)
81-3 (C,S)
81-4 (C,S)
50LS- Low Set Overcurrent
Main (C,S)
Aux. (C,S)
50BF - Breaker Failure
50BF Main (C,S)
Main External Initiate (C,S)
50BF Aux. (C,S)
Aux. External Initiate (C,S)
50/51/67 - Phase OC
50 (C,S)
51 (C,S)
Dir. Angle Setting (C,S)
Phase Setting Multiplier (C,S)
50N/51N/67 - Neut. OC
50N (C,S)
51N (C,S)

50G/51G/67 - Neut. OC
50G (C,S)
51G (C,S)
46-50/46-51/67
46-50 (C,S)
46-51 (C,S)
46BC (C,S)
Z Circle Trigger (C,S)
Login/Logout (C,S)
Clear Target
Clear Output (C,S)
Test LEDs
* All front panel menus may be viewed with View rights. Items marked as C or S require Change
or Service rights in order to make and save changes.
To login into the LCD menu structure, follow these steps:
Figure 4.2: Main Screen

Main Menu (1/2)
Relay Info.
Metering
Events
Faults
Utilities
Settings
Main Menu (2/2)

Login
Clear Targets
Clear Output
Test LEDs
Figure 4.3: Main Menu
Login
View
Change
Service
Figure 4.4: Login Window (View / Change / Service)
Service
Enter Password
Figure 4.5: Enter Password
In the Main Screen, Select Login and hit Enter. Alternatively, selecting
Utilities or Settings will also prompt the Login screen.
In the Login screen, choose desired access level, hit Enter.

In the Enter Password screen, enter the password by clicking the up or down
arrows to select characters and the side arrows to move the cursor forward
or backward and press Enter button to complete the password entry.
Note: The default passwords are (remove quotation marks)

View Access - no password required
Change Access “change”
Service Access “service”
Password can contain ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + = { } [ ] : ; " ’ , < > ? / \ ( )

0-9 a-z and A-Z
Target LED The front panel of the L-PRO 4500 displays the fault/event and phase informa-
Reset Type tion via the target LEDs and target event messages on the LCD.
Each Target LED is configurable in the Setting File as either “Self Reset” or
“Latched” as shown in below.
Figure 4.6: Target Reset Type
In Self Reset mode, the LED will only remain on while the associated function
is high. When the associated function goes low, the LED will turn Off automat-
ically.
In Latched Mode, the LED will turn on when the associated function goes high,
and will remain on until the user manually resets the target.

Target Test and There are multiple ways to reset latched LEDs and target messages and to test
Reset the LEDs, as shown below.
Front Panel LCD

To reset the targets from the front panel LCD, select the Clear Targets item
from the Main Menu. Selecting this item will clear all latched LED indicators,
and will clear the event target from the LCD. The Clear Target function does
not delete any fault or event information; this information is still available in
the fault and event logs.
To test the target LED functionality, select the Test LEDs item from the Main
Menu. The Test LEDs feature illuminates all of the front panel LED indicators
momentarily to verify their functionality. This function does not clear the tar-
get LEDs or events.
Relay Control Panel

Relay Control Panel offers a Target Test and Target Clear feature.
The Target Test feature works in the same manner as the front panel LCD tar-
get reset feature. To access this feature in RCP, login as Change or Service and
navigate to Utilities > Control Targets.
The Target Clear feature works in the same manner as the front panel LCD tar-
get reset feature. To access this feature in RCP, login as Change or Service and
navigate to Utilities > Control Targets.
Figure 4.7: Relay Control Panel Control Targets screen

External Reset
L-PRO Offliner provides an option to configure the external reseting of targets.
This setting uses one of the External Inputs, ProLogics, SPC Control Com-
mand or Virtual Inputs to remotely reset the front panel targets. When this ex-
ternal target reset input goes high, the latched front panel targets are
immediately cleared. One Target Reset setting is available which applies glob-
ally to all of the LEDs. To configure this setting, go to the Identification > Tar-
get Reset screen in L-PRO Offliner. See “Target Reset Settings” on page 7-15
for more details.
Figure 4.8: L-PRO Offliner Target Reset setting
SCADA
The front panel targets may be reset using either the DNP3 or IEC61850 pro-
tocols.
To reset the front panel targets via DNP3, a combination of the L-PRO Offliner
external target reset setting and DNP3 control operations are used. To use this
feature, assign any Virtual Input as the External Target reset input in L-PRO
Offliner. Then use the DNP3 Control Operations for the assigned Virtual Input.
For more information on DNP3 Control Operations, see “Binary Output Status
And Control Relay Output Block” in Appendix F.
The front panel targets may also be reset via the IEC61850 protocol via SPC
Control Commands. Assign any SPC to the Target Reset setting (see “External
Reset” above). Then using a 61850 Client the targets may be reset by operating
the associated SPC Control Command. See “Control Commands” on page 8-4
for more details.
Output Contact The front panel provides an option to manually reset latched Output Contacts
Reset (see “Output Contacts” on page 7-11 for more details). To reset the latched
Output Contacts, select the Clear Outputs item from the Main Menu. Change
or Service login credentials are required to reset the Output Contacts.
LCD Contrast The LCD contrast of the front panel display is adjustable using the push but-
Adjustment tons. To adjust the screen contrast, hold the escape (X) button for five seconds.
While continuing to hold the escape (X) button, press the up or down buttons
to increase or decrease the contrast.

4.3 Terminal Mode

The terminal mode is used to access the relay for maintenance functions see
“Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s Maintenance Menu” on page 3-
7 and “Firmware Update” on page 3-11.

4.4 Relay Control Panel

RCP is used for all user interface. A short description of the RCP configuration
to connect to a relay is given here. Please refer to the Relay Control Panel User
Manual for details.
Configure USB Follow this sequence to configure RCP for USB link to the relay.
Link 1. Execute.
Relay Control Panel.exe
2. Execute.
L-PRO 4500 Offliner.exe
3. Install Null Modem Driver.
Please refer to the Relay Control Panel User Manual for details.
4. Run Relay Control Panel.
Go to:
Start > All Programs > ERLPhase > Relay Control Panel > Relay Control
Panel
First time RCP is run.
Hit Add New.
“Add New Relay”
Choose Communication > Direct Serial Link.
Select correct serial link and baud rate.
Hit Get Information From Relay.
Then RCP will communicate with the LPRO-4500 and retrieve in-
formation to fill required fields.
When this is done, hit Save Relay.
If the window “Relay already exists...” pops up, you may need to re-
name the relay changing the “Relay Name” in the “Relay Definition”
category, before saving.
After the first time, in “Select Relay”, choose relay and hit Connect.
In “Relay Password Prompt”
Choose desired access level, enter appropriate password
Note: Default passwords are listed below (remove the quotation
marks)
View Access “view”
Change Access “change”
Service Access “service”
Relay Control The basic structure of the Relay Control Panel information, including basic
Panel Structure actions available, is given below:

Table 4.5: Relay Control Panel Structure
View Change Service
Relay Control Panel
Records Trigger Fault Trigger Fault
Trigger Swing Trigger Swing
Trigger Event Trigger Event
Faults Erase Erase
Events Erase Erase
Metering
Analog
Line
External
Logic 1
Logic 2
Logic 3
Logic 4
External
ProLogic
Outputs
Group Logic
Virtual
MMS Cmds
Utilities
Unit Identification
Communication
Time N/A Save Save
Analog Input Calibration N/A N/A Calibrate off-

set and gain
External Input N/A Save Save
Virtual Inputs N/A Latch/Pulse Latch/Pulse

Table 4.5: Relay Control Panel Structure
Outputs N/A N/A Close/Open
Settings Group N/A Save Save
Passwords N/A N/A Save
Control Targets N/A Test/Reset Test/Reset
Configuration
Present Settings (Get From (Get From (Get From

Relay) Relay) Relay)
Saved Settings N/A (Load to (Load to

Relay) Relay)
Notice that some options are not available (N/A) depending on the access level.
RCP Metering The RCP displays the following metering parameters

• Phase-wise voltage magnitude & angle
• Phase wise current magnitude & angle
• 3-phase real power
• 3-phase reactive power
• Frequency
• 3-phase apparent power
• Power factor
• All sequence voltages
• All sequence currents
• All protection function statuses
• All Virtual Input, External Input, ProLogic, Group Logic, MMS commands
and Output Contact Statuses
The metering display in RCP has a resolution of three decimals for both mea-
sured and calculated analog values.

5 Protection Functions and
Specifications
5.1 Protection and Recording Functions
Introduction This section describes the equations and algorithms of the relay protection
functions. All functions with time delay provide an alarm output when their
pickup level is exceeded.
The following functions are exceptions: 27 Auxiliary, 27 Main, 59 Auxiliary,
59 Main, 25/27/59 Sync Check, 50LS Main, 50LS Auxiliary, 50BF Main,
50BF Auxiliary, 81 Frequency, 46 Broken Conductor and ProLogic elements.
A complete list of the settings and their range values can be found in “IED Set-
tings and Ranges” in Appendix B.
21P Phase/21N The relay 21P contains 5 zones of phase distance elements; all 5 zones of 21P
Ground can be set to either Mho or Quadrilateral type. Note that only one type can be
Distance used at a time. The 21P can contain a mixture of Mho and Quadrilateral shapes,
for example the 21P1 and 21P2 can be set to a Mho characteristic and the 21P3,
21P4 and 21P5 could be set to a Quadrilateral characteristic.
The relay 21N contains 5 zones of ground distance elements; all 5 zones of 21N
can be set to either Mho or Quadrilateral type. Note that only one type can be
used at a time. The 21N can contain a mixture of Mho and Quadrilateral
shapes, for example the 21N1 and 21N2 can be set to a Mho characteristic and
the 21N3, 21N4 and 21N5 could be set to a Quadrilateral characteristic.
The Quadrilateral shape is parallel to the positive sequence line angle setting.
The user-defined Mho Characteristic Angle is not selectable when a Quadrilat-
eral characteristic for that particular zone is defined. All other settings are se-
lectable and user-definable. Top blinder of quadrilateral shape can be adjusted
using Tilt Angle setting as shown in Figure 5.1: Tilt Angle on page 5-2.
Zones 3, 4 and 5 reach can be set in either forward direction or reverse direction
or offset as required. All the distance functions are set in secondary ohms. The
available range of impedance settings is based on the nominal current specified
under Utilities menu. The impedance reach ranges are given in Table 5.1: 21P
Phase Distance Element Settings and Table 5.2: 21N Ground Distance Element
Settings.

5 Protection Functions and Specifications
Figure 5.1: Tilt Angle
Zone 5
Zone 3
Zone 2
Line Z1
Characteristic Angle
Zone 1
Line Angle
R
Zone 4
Figure 5.2: Phase and Ground distance protection Mho relay characteristic
The shape of the phase and ground distance relays is adjustable. For the circu-
lar Mho characteristic shape, the characteristic angle is 90 degrees. Determine
this angle by drawing 2 lines from any point on the impedance locus to the di-
ameter of the characteristic. Produce a tomato-shaped characteristic by select-
ing an angle less than 90 degrees or a lens-shaped characteristic with angles
greater than 90 degrees.

Zone 5
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 1
Line Z1
Forward
Line Angle
R
Directional Element
Zone 4
Reverse
Figure 5.3: Phase and Ground distance protection Quadrilateral Characteristics
The shape of the Mho characteristic means that significant extensions are made
to the relay characteristics in the R region of the R-X plane for ground faults.
Restrict the reach in the R region for the phase distance relays where load en-
croachment is an issue. The shaped Mho characteristic provides the best fit for
the application keeping the number of relay settings at a minimum and pro-
vides the benefits associated with the Mho characteristic.
The Mho characteristic used by the relay is developed by the classical ap-
proach using the measurement of the angle between 2 vectors.
These vectors are defined as:
A = I  Z set – V (1)
B = V ref (2)
I phase + K o  3I 0 (3)
where
V is the actual line voltage for ground distance relays or the actual line to
line voltage for the phase distance relay.
I is defined as above for ground distance relays or the line to line current for
phase distance relays.
Zset is the setting reach and Vref is a positive sequence memory voltage
stored within the relay.
Vref is the polarizing quantity for the Mho elements, and is more completely
described in “Relay Method of Memory Polarization” on page 5-8.

To make the reach of the ground distance relay relate to the line positive se-
quence impedance the classical Ko factor is used.
This factor is defined as
Z0 – Z1 (4)
K 0 = -----------------
-
3Z 1
The relay includes a directional element to supervise the phase (21P) and
ground (21N) Mho elements, for all five Zones (21P1 to 21P5 and 21N1 to
21N5). The directional element improves security of the Mho elements for re-
verse faults such as: bus faults, phase-phase faults during high load conditions.
The directional element does not supervise Zone 3, Zone 4 and Zone 5 ele-
ments if these zones are set as offset characteristic. The directional element is
described in “Directional Element” on page 5-10.
Line angle Line angle Line angle
Circle (90°) Tomato (<90°) Lens (>90°)
Figure 5.4: Mho Characteristic Shapes
Current Supervision
The 21P and 21N include current supervision which helps to ensure that the 21
elements are not set into the load condition.
The 21P elements will only trip if the minimum phasor difference between any
two phases is greater than the Id supervision setting.
The 21N elements will only trip if the minimum phase to neutral current of any
of the phases is greater than the Ip supervision setting and if the 3I0 current is
greater than the 3I0 supervision setting.
Load The load impedance may enter into the protection zones permanently or tem-
Encroachment porarily due to system condition. This is observed in very long lines or heavily
(LE) loaded medium lines. This is a normal load conditions and it is not an abnor-
mal/fault conditions. Therefore, the relay should not initiate any trip command
during this condition. The relay should identify properly whether the imped-
ance entered into the protection zone is normal load condition or fault condi-
tion.
This is distinguished by monitoring all phase-to-phase impedance values (i.e.
Zab, Zbc & Zca).If all the three phase impedances enter into the protection
zones with the limited load angle area, it is declared as a loading condition and

21P function is blocked. If only one of the phase-to-phase impedance enters

into the protection zones with the limited load angle area then this can be de-
clared as fault condition.
Generally, the three phase fault will not have any additional resistance compo-
nent other than the conductor resistance. Therefore, three phase fault will al-
ways have the fault angle as close to line angle only and it will not enter into
the loading area.
Figure 5.5: Load Encroachment (LE) Logic on page 5-5 shows how the LE
function works. Phase-to-phase current monitoring has been added to the logic
to ensure stable operation.
Figure 5.5: Load Encroachment (LE) Logic
Table 5.1: 21P Phase Distance Element Settings
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5
Enable/ Disa- Enable/ Disa- Enable/ Disa- Enable/ Disa- Enable/ Disa-
ble ble ble ble ble
Characteristic Type Mho / Quadri- Mho / Quadri- Mho / Quadri- Mho / Quadri- Mho / Quadri-
lateral lateral lateral lateral lateral
Forward Impedance 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 Both
Reach (Ohms secondary) (5A) (5A) (5A) (5A) (5A)
0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)
Forward Reactance 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 Quadrilateral
0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)
Reverse Impedance 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 Both

Reach (Ohms secondary) (5A) (5A) (5A)
0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)
Reverse Reactance 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 Quadrilateral

0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)

Table 5.1: 21P Phase Distance Element Settings
Left Reach (R1) (Ohms 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 Quadrilateral
secondary) (5A) (5A) (5A) (5A) (5A)
0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)
Right Reach (R2) (Ohms 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 Quadrilateral
0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)
Mho Characteristic Angle 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 Mho
(degrees)
Pickup Delay (seconds) 0.00 to 99.00 0.00 to 99.00 0.00 to 99.00 0.00 to 99.00 0.00 to 99.00 Both
Id Supervision (A second- 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 Both
ary) (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to
10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A)
Line Angle (degrees) 5.0 to 89.0

Setting is made in Line Parameters (Positive Sequence Angle)
Load Impedance (Ohms)
R (Ohms secondary) -150.0 to 150.0 Both
X (Ohms secondary) -150.0 to 150.0 Both
Load Encroachment Enable/Disable Both
LHS
Impedance (Ohms sec- 0.01 to 66.0 (5 A) Both

ondary) 0.05 to 330.0 (1 A)
Upper angle (degrees) 90.1 to 179.9 Both
Lower angle (degrees) 180.1 to 269.9 Both
RHS
Impedance (Ohms sec- 0.01 to 66.0 (5 A) Both

ondary) 0.05 to 330.0 (1 A)
Upper angle (degrees) 0.1 to 89.9 Both
Lower angle (degrees) -0.1 to -89.9 Both

Table 5.2: 21N Ground Distance Element Settings
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5
Enable/ Disa- Enable/ Disa- Enable/ Disa- Enable/ Disa- Enable/ Disa-
ble ble ble ble ble
Characteristic Type Mho / Quadri- Mho / Quadri- Mho / Quadri- Mho / Quadri- Mho / Quadri-
lateral lateral lateral lateral lateral
Forward Impedance 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 Both
0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)
Forward Reactance 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 Quadrilateral
0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)
Reverse Impedance 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 Both

0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)
Reverse Reactance 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 0.00 to 66.00 Quadrilateral

0.00 to 0.00 to 0.00 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)
Left Reach (R1) (Ohms 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 Quadrilateral
0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)
Right Reach (R2) (Ohms 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 0.05 to 66.00 Quadrilateral
0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to 0.25 to
330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A) 330.00 (1A)
Mho Characteristic Angle 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 70.0 to 140.0 Mho
(degrees)
Pickup Delay (seconds) 0.00 to 99.00 0.00 to 99.00 0.00 to 99.00 0.00 to 99.00 0.00 to 99.00 Both
Id Supervision (A second- 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 Both
ary) (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to
10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A)
3I0 Supervision (A sec- 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 0.2 to 50.0 Both
ondary) (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to (5A) 0.04 to
10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A) 10.00 (1A)
Line Angle (degrees) 5.0 to 89.0

Setting is made in Line Parameters (Positive Sequence Angle)
Load Impedance (Ohms)
R (Ohms secondary) -150.0 to 150.0 Both
X (Ohms secondary) -150.0 to 150.0 Both

Relay Method of The 21P and 21N Mho/Quad elements use positive-sequence voltage, derived
Memory from a memory voltage, as the polarizing quantity. No user settings are re-
Polarization quired for the memory polarization functionality. Sufficient positive-sequence
voltage should be available during all fault events. However, during certain
fault events, especially 3-phase bolted faults near the line VT location, the pos-
itive-sequence voltage may be insufficient for correct operation. To ensure ad-
equate positive-sequence voltage exists for all fault conditions, the relay uses
a ring filter, implemented in software, to provide memory voltage as the source
for the positive-sequence voltage. This memory voltage lasts for approximate-
ly 150 cycles, even if all voltage inputs from the line VTs go to zero. A practi-
cal effect of using a memorized voltage is to expand the Mho characteristic by
the magnitude of the source impedance see “Effect of using Memorized Volt-
age on a 3-phase forward fault condition” on page 5-8. This expansion of the
characteristic ensures correct operation for zero voltage faults at the relay lo-
cation, and for forward capacitive faults.
.
X
No Memory
Voltage
Line Z
Full
Memory
Voltage
R
Z
rce
Sou
Figure 5.6: Effect of using Memorized Voltage on a 3-phase forward fault condition
Ring Filter The voltage memory in the relay uses a ring filter implemented in software.
The ring filter is a high-Q bandpass filter, with the frequency response centered
on the nominal system frequency. The effect of the ring filter is to retain some
voltage information for approximately 150 cycles, even if the measured system
voltage is severely depressed by a fault.
VA Ring Filter
Sequence
VB Ring Filter Component Vpos_mem
Filter
VC Ring Filter Vpos_mem
correct? Vpolarizing
Sequence
Component Vpos
Filter
Figure 5.7: Polarizing Voltage

Fault
Ring Filter
Memory Voltage
Figure 5.8: Effect of the Ring Filter
The ring filter is designed to adjust the center of the frequency response to ac-
count for small variations of the power system frequency. When the measured
voltage drops below 0.5 Vsec, the ring filter explicitly uses the nominal system
frequency as the center point of the bandpass filter. During this condition, or
when the system frequency varies widely or rapidly, as during out-of-step con-
ditions, the ring filter could provide an incorrect output. During these condi-
tions, the 21P and 21N Mho/Quad elements use the positive-sequence voltage
derived from the system voltage directly from the line VTs until the voltage
output of the ring filter is correct. If the measured positive sequence voltage is
below 1 Vsec, then the Mho/Quad elements use the positive sequence voltage
derived from the memory voltage.

Directional The relay includes a directional element that directly supervises the Zone 1 to
Element Zone 5 phase and ground distance elements. The directional element considers
negative-sequence impedance, zero-sequence impedance, or positive-se-
quence impedance, depending on relay settings and system conditions at the
time of the fault. The element declares a forward fault when the impedance de-
termined by the directional element is within 90° of the line impedance.
jX
Forward
Line Impedance
90.0
Line Z Angle
R
Reverse
Figure 5.9: Fault Direction
The directional element in the relay is always enabled. The directional element
actually consists of 3 separate internal elements: a negative-sequence element,
a zero-sequence element, and a positive-sequence element. The negative-se-
quence and zero-sequence elements use directly measured currents and voltag-
es. The positive-sequence element uses directly measured current, and a
memory voltage from the ring filter. The sensitivity for the negative- and zero-
sequence elements may be set by the user, to correctly account for load condi-
tions and system configuration. Both of these elements may be disabled as
well. The positive-sequence element is always active.

Directional Element
Y
3P Fault
Directional Valid -
Ground
N Minimum Sensitivity
Threshold
A
F
Directional
Y Y Y
Z2 V2 Directional F Element -
ON I2 Ground
Check R
N N R
Y Y Y Directional
Z0 3V0 Directional F F
Element
ON 3I0 Check Directional
Asserted
Element -
N N R Phase
R
A
Y YF
V1 (mem) Directional
I1 Check
N R
Y = Yes Directional Valid -

N = No Phase
F = Forward
R = Reverse d
Figure 5.10: Directional Element Logic
For 3-phase faults, the directional element will only consider the positive se-
quence calculation.
For other phase-phase faults, the directional element will consider, in order, the
negative-sequence calculation, the zero-sequence calculation, and the positive-
sequence calculation. The directional element will only move from one calcu-
lation to the next calculation if insufficient sequence voltages and currents ex-
ist to make a valid calculation.
For phase-ground faults, the directional element will first consider the nega-
tive-sequence calculation and then the zero-sequence calculation. The posi-
tive-sequence calculation is not used. The directional element will only move
from one calculation to the next calculation if insufficient sequence voltages
and currents exist to make a valid calculation.
The negative-sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured
negative-sequence impedance, and the positive-sequence line impedance angle

entered in settings. To perform this calculation, the default minimum amount

of negative-sequence voltage required is 0.5 V secondary, and the default min-
imum amount of negative-sequence current required is 0.2 A secondary.
The zero-sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured
zero-sequence impedance the zero-sequence line impedance angle entered in
settings. To perform this calculation, the default minimum amount of zero-se-
quence voltage (3V0) required is 1.0 V secondary, and the default minimum
amount of zero-sequence current (3I0) required is 0.2 A secondary.
The positive-sequence calculation determines the angle between the measured
positive-sequence impedance (based on measured current, and the memory
voltage output of the ring filter) and the positive-sequence line impedance an-
gle entered in settings. To perform the positive-sequence impedance calcula-
tion, the directly measured positive-sequence current must exceed 0.2 A
secondary, and the memorized positive-sequence voltage must exceed 2 V sec-
ondary. The positive-sequence calculation will only be considered for phase-
phase faults.
There may be some rare circumstances where there may not be sufficient volt-
age or current, using the negative, zero, and positive sequence components, for
the directional element to make a valid directional decision. The most likely
circumstance where this may occur is a 3-phase bolted fault near the line VTs,
that is not cleared in an appropriate amount of time. It takes approximately 30
cycles, after the measured 3-phase system voltage drops to 0, for the ring filter
voltage to decay such that the Vpos_mem is less than 2 V secondary. For this
circumstance, or for any other fault case where there are insufficient sequence
component quantities for any of the directional calculations to operate, the di-
rection is set to “forward”. Setting the reverse reach to zero sets the direction
control to forward and setting the forward reach to zero sets the direction con-
trol to reverse. Setting both forward and reverse reaches non-zero sets the di-
rectional element to non-directional.
Directional The output of the directional element asserts when the direction is determined
Element to be “forward”. This output is used internally by protection functions directly
supervised by the element, and is also available as the “Directional Element -
Outputs Phase” and “Directional Element - Ground” indications in ProLogic equations.
The directional element also provides the “Directional Valid - Phase” and “Di-
rectional Valid - Ground” output for use in ProLogic equations. This output as-
serts when any one of the active sequence impedance calculations has
sufficient input quantities to make a valid direction determination, regardless
of the actual direction. The two outputs can be combined in a ProLogic equa-
tion to enable a secure forward or reverse directional outputs from the relay,
for example.

Directional Element - Phase

Reverse Phase Fault
Directional Valid - Phase
Directional Element - Ground Reverse Ground Fault

Directional Valid - Ground
Directional Element - Phase

Forward Phase Fault
Directional Valid - Phase
Directional Element - Ground Forward Ground Fault

Directional Valid - Ground
Figure 5.11: Directional Element ProLogic configurations
Directional The default setting of the directional element in the relay should be correct for
Element most applications. The default settings enable both the negative-sequence and
zero-sequence calculations, with the minimum sensitivities as described. There
Settings are some applications where it may be advisable to change the sensitivity
thresholds for the negative-sequence or zero-sequence calculations, or it may
be desirable to disable one or both of these elements.
Selecting “Directional Element Override Enabled” allows user settings for the
negative-sequence and zero-sequence directional elements.
The settings for the negative-sequence voltage sensitivity and negative-se-
quence current sensitivity should be normally higher than the maximum nega-
tive sequence quantities generated by unbalanced load. These settings should
also be low enough to maintain sensitivity for the minimum unbalanced fault,
in terms of negative sequence quantities.
The zero-sequence directional element can be used in many applications. How-
ever, where strong mutual coupling between parallel lines exist, the zero-se-
quence calculation must be disabled to prevent an incorrect directional
determination. The sensitivity settings should be low enough to permit opera-
tion during the lowest expected ground fault in terms of zero-sequence quanti-
ties expected during a fault, and high enough to allow for normal load
imbalance.
Table 5.3: Directional Element Settings
Override Enabled Enable/Disable
Negative-Sequence Enable/Disable
V2 Sensitivity Level (V secondary) 0.5 to 5.0
I2 Sensitivity Level (A secondary) 0.1 to 1.0 (5 A)

0.02 to 0.20 (1 A)
Zero Sequence Enable/Disable
3V0 Sensitivity Level (V secondary) 1.0 to 10.0
3I0 Sensitivity Level (A secondary) 0.2 to 2.0 (5 A)

0.04 to 0.40 (1 A)

21P and 21N The phase selector algorithm for the relay ensures that:
Phase Selector
• 21N only trips on single-phase-to-ground fault, so as to prevent 21N from
false tripping for phase-to-phase-to-ground faults with arc resistance
• Supervise 21P for low Source Impedance Ratio (SIR) ratios and single-
phase-to-ground faults at 20% of line reach or below.
Algorithm Details
The phase selector uses a combination of positive, negative and zero sequence
current phasors to correctly determine the faulty phase. No user settings are re-
quired for the phase selector functionality. An OR function with angle checks
between I1 and I2 as well as the angle between I2 and I0. The OR function al-
lows the algorithm to adapt to various fault conditions and provide the correct
fault type. When energizing a line with a T-tapped load, the user may have sys-
tem conditions where no pre-trigger load current is available. Using positive
and negative sequence currents alone may cause an incorrect fault determina-
tion if the load current is significantly large enough to affect the total positive
sequence current, which includes both load and fault current. Our algorithm
overcomes this problem.
Angle Relationship of Positive and Negative Sequence Currents

The angle comparison scheme is used to determine the faulty phase and the
fault type. If the load current is subtracted from the total current (i.e. only fault
current is left for angle comparison), the positive sequence (I1) and negative
sequence (I2) current phase angle relations are listed in the following table:
Table 5.4: Angular difference between positive and negative sequence

currents for various faults
AG BG CG BCG ABG CAG

Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
Angle Diff. between I1A and I2A 0 120 120 180 60 60

(AngleDiff_A)
Angle Diff. between I1B and I2B 120 0 120 60 60 180

(AngleDiff_B)
Angle Diff. between I1C and I2C 120 120 0 60 180 60

(AngleDiff_C)
Phase Selector Criteria for I1 and I2

The following criteria is used to determine the fault type and phase:
AG Fault: AngleDiff_A<45.0 and AngleDiff_B >90.0 and AngleDiff_C >90.0
BG Fault: AngleDiff_B<45.0 and AngleDiff_C >90.0 and AngleDiff_A >90.0
CG Fault: AngleDiff_C<45.0 and AngleDiff_A >90.0 and AngleDiff_B >90.0

In the above criteria only one can become true at a time. They are used to su-
pervise 21N_A, 21N_B, 21N_C respectively.
Angle Relationship of Negative and Zero Sequence Currents

The angle comparison scheme is used to determine the faulty phase and the
fault type. The negative sequence (I2) and zero sequence (I0) current phase an-
gle relations are listed in the following table:
Table 5.5: Angular difference between negative and zero sequence currents
for various faults
AG BG CG BCG ABG CAG

Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
Angle Diff. between I2A and I0 0 120 120 0 120 120

(AngleDiff_I2_I0_A)
Angle Diff. between I2B and I0 120 0 120 120 120 0

(AngleDiff_I2_I0_B)
Angle Diff. between I2C and I0 120 120 0 120 0 120

(AngleDiff_I2_I0_C)
Phase Selector Criteria for I2 and I0

The following criteria is used to determine the fault type and phase:
AG Fault: AngleDiff_I2_I0_A<25.0 degrees
BG Fault: AngleDiff_I2_I0_B<25.0 degrees
CG Fault: AngleDiff_I2_I0_C<25.0 degrees
Though AG type of fault will be declared for a BCG fault by the above angle
criteria between I2 and I0, the characteristic of AG impedance prevents AG
from tripping because the phase selector is used for supervision only, i.e. the
phase selector is not a tripping device.
Device 21P Supervision

A 21P supervision logic is formed based on the above Phase Selector Criteria.
The phase-to-phase distance element is only allowed to operate if the faulted
phase is not involved with the element:
21P_AB Supervision = Not AG Fault and Not BG Fault
21P_BC Supervision = Not BG Fault and Not CG Fault
21P_CA Supervision = Not CG Fault and Not AG Fault
The Start of the Phase Selector

The phase selector starts only when a fault occurs. The start definition is: if 3I0
is greater than the minimum of any enabled 21N zone’s 3I0 supervision level
setting, begin the phase selector algorithm.
A buffer is used to track the pre-trigger load current, which is subtracted from
the total current before checking the phase selector criteria.

During fault conditions the system frequency may change causing a drift in the
angle difference being calculated by the phase selector. The locked pre-trigger
load current vector is adjusted accordingly based on this angle difference be-
tween the pre-trigger positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence volt-
age during the fault. If the faulted positive sequence voltage shifts, the angle
difference is taken into account. (i.e. the same angle relationship remains along
the fault duration.)
Duration of the Phase Selector Supervision

The maximum blocking time to 21N for a phase-phase-ground fault is from 2.0
seconds to x seconds, where x is the maximum pickup delay in enabled 21P2
to 21P5, and then plus 8 cycles (8 cycles is the maximum breaker opening).
This ensures that if 21P did not trip on the phase-phase-ground fault for some
reason, 21N is allowed to trip on this fault after this maximum blocking time
delay has expired.
Ground Indicator in 21P Event Message

3I0 is checked against the minimum of the following settings:
• 21N1: 3I0 supervision when it’s enabled
• 21N5: 3I0 supervision when its enabled
• 50N Pickup level when it’s enabled
• 51N Pickup level when it’s enabled
• 50N_67F when it’s selected as Scheme_Only or both ProLogic & Scheme
When 3I0 exceeds the minimum of the above values, a ground indicator “G” is
put in the 21P event messages, e.g. “21P Trip ABG 123.1 km”.
Series Capacitor on 21 Devices

When a series capacitor is added to a transmission line, performance of 21 de-
vices can be affected significantly due to the effects such as sub-harmonics,
voltage inversion and current inversions. Series capacitor algorithm provides
enhanced performances against the effect of series capacitors. The algorithm
consists of two parts namely (i) sub-harmonic removal filter and (ii) modified
directional function.
The sub-harmonic removal filter is a 5th order Infinite Impulse Response (IIR)
filter. Upon enabling the series capacitor option, sub-harmonic removal filter
will be activated.
Based on compensation factor settings (i.e. if compensation factor > 0), direc-
tional function will be enabled. When the series capacitor is located at the end
of the line, a compensation factor greater than zero should be used. In this case,
voltage is measured from the line side PTs/CVTs. Reverse side voltage (esti-
mated using line side voltage and phase currents) is used to determine the di-

rectionality. When the series capacitor is located at the far end of the line or
middle of the line, the compensation factor setting should be set to zero.
Table 5.6: Series Capacitor Settings
Settings: End A Settings: End B

Example
Series capacitor % compensation Series capacitor % compensation
Capacitor located at the end of the line Enabled 40 Enabled 0
Capacitor located at the middle of the line Enabled 0 Enabled 0
Capacitance When a fault occurs, especially on a line with high source to impedance ratio
Coupled Voltage (SIR), the CCVT secondary voltage can become quite different from the actual
(CCVT) system voltage varying in both magnitude and phase due to the transient re-
Transformer on 21 sponse of the CCVT. This transient response can cause device 21 overreach
Devices significantly. A special CCVT transient compensation algorithm (Patent Pend-
ing) has been included in L-PRO 4500 relay to address this issue.
The CCVT transient compensation algorithm uses a combination of techniques
with digital filters, vector averages and other means to rebuild the correct volt-
age from the transient distorted voltage waveforms. This combination of tech-
niques provides a secure method for detecting and correcting CCVT transient
phenomena. On one hand, it improves the reach accuracy of 21 devices dra-
matically during the period of the CCVT subsidence transient. On the other
hand, it will not sacrifice the relay operation speed very much. It does not add
any additional delay when the SIR is low (<1.2). In the worst case, it adds about
one cycle delay when the SIR is high (>15). For the operation time details, refer
to “IED Specifications” in Appendix A.
This compensation algorithm can be enabled or disabled through

settings. Note that this algorithm is applied to all 21 devices once it is
enabled. For the applications without CCVTs, this compensation al-
gorithm should be disabled so as to eliminate the possible additional
delay introduced by this algorithm.

68 Power Swing The Power Swing function can be used as a tripping or blocking function. This
function consists of 2 sets of inner and outer impedance Zones on the R-X
plane, for details see Figure 5.12: Power Swing Characteristic on page 5-18.
Set the Power swing zones to different values and to have the Power Swing
function operate for different system conditions. The Power swing zones are
quadrilateral characteristic and the reactance lines with the same angle as the
angle chosen for the line positive sequence impedance. Outputs from the outer
and the inner power swing zones are available on the output matrix for use with
other types of Power Swing schemes or for monitoring.
X4
X3
Zone 5
Zone 3
R1 R2 R3 R4
Zone 2
Line Z1
Zone 1
Line Angle
R
Zone 4
X2
X1
Figure 5.12: Power Swing Characteristic
The basic Power Swing scheme looks at the positive sequence impedance of
the line with respect to the line loading. If the line loading causes the imped-
ance to cross the outer Zone, an Power Swing timer is started. If the impedance
does not cross the inner zone before this timer times out, the function produces
an output (either a block or trip whichever is set) when the impedance crosses
the inner Zone. The entire activity is supervised by an overcurrent function to
prevent undesired operations for impedances far from the origin.
The logic has a timeout feature that prevents the blocking function from oper-
ating for an indefinite amount of time. Device 68 functions as either a blocking
device or tripping device. The 68 Power Swing (68 Trip or 68 Block), 68 Inner
and 68 Outer Zone logic points are available in the output matrix. These logic
points are also logged as event messages in the event log, “Event Messages”
in Appendix D In addition, the outputs from the inner and outer Zones are
available for use with ProLogic to create any application scheme required.
If the user selects Device 68 to block for Power Swing conditions, the relay en-
ergizes the front panel alarm LED when the 68 elements are blocking. If the
user selects the 68 to trip for Power Swing conditions the relay energizes the
front panel target light.
Inner Blinder Alarm

Zpos X
Outer Blinder Alarm
Enable Setting
50 Ipos TB
R
0 68 Block Out of Step
50 3I0 68 Trip
60
Figure 5.13: Power Swing Function

Table 5.7: 68 Power Swing Function Details
Mode Block, Off, Trip
Zone Blocking
Zone 1 Blocking Enable/Disable
Out of Step Swing Timer 0.00 to 1.00 seconds
I1 Supervision 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5A)

0.1 to 10.0 A secondary (1A)
3I0 Blocking 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5A)

Blocking Reset Time 0.25 to 2.00 seconds
Left Hand Side (LHS) Blinder
Outer (R1) -100.0 to R2 ohms secondary (5A)

-500.0 to R2 ohms secondary (1A)
Inner (R2) R1 to R3 ohms secondary
Right Hand Side (RHS) Blinder
Inner (R3) R2 to R4 ohms secondary
Outer (R4) R3 to 100.0 ohms secondary (5A)

R3 to 500.0 ohms secondary (1A)
Top Blinder
Outer (X4) X3 to 100.0 ohms secondary (5A)

X3 to 500.0 ohms secondary (1A)
Inner (X3) X2 to X4 ohms secondary
Bottom Blinder
Inner (X2) X1 to X3 ohms secondary
Outer (X1) -100.0 to X2 ohms secondary (5A)

-500.0 to X2 ohms secondary (1A)

Line
Energization Vpos - VposOld > 10 volts
Supervision VposOld < 30 volts Block all 21 devices

Logic Ipos < 4% of Norminal Current
1 sec.
20 ms
Figure 5.14: Line Energization Supervision Logic
Note: Vpos is the present positive sequence voltage.

VposOld is the positive sequence voltage at two cycles before.
The Logic shown in “Line Energization Supervision Logic” on page 5-20 has
been introduced in order to prevent potentially erroneous operations of the 21
upon energizing of T-tapped transmission lines that have transformers connect-
ed and the PT connected on the line side of the breaker. This logic does not re-
quire any user setting.
In this logic, the present positive sequence voltage is compared with the posi-
tive sequence voltage of 2 cycles previously. In an energization situation, the
VposOld would be near zero V and the present Vpos would be approximately
the nominal. As time goes by the old Vpos gets updated with the nominal volt-
age and would eventually equal the present. When it gets within 10 V second-
ary the top input to the AND gate would reset, go to zero, and reset the blocking
function.
The second input is the previous 2 cycle positive sequence voltage and has an
undervoltage setting of 30 V. This input goes high to block the distance relays
only if the positive sequence voltage from 2 cycles back was less than 30 V
(approximately 50% nominal), so, for a line that has been previously energized
and now experiences a fault, no distance relay blocking takes place.
The third input (the bottom one) produces an output only if the positive se-
quence line current is less than 4% nominal or 4.0% of 5 A secondary = 0.20
A secondary. If this current has been that low for the 1 second pickup time de-
lay this input to the AND gate would go high. For a de-energized line this input
would normally be high to allow the blocking scheme to operate if the other
two inputs are high. This input along with input two are present to help prevent
any distance relay blocking for a line that is in service and is now experiencing
a line fault.

Switch-On-To- When energizing a line that has been out of service, the line may have a fault
Fault (SOTF) on it. If the line potential is derived from bus PTs, the distance relay function
acts normal and operates for any fault that exists when the line is energized. If
the line uses line PTs, the output of these line PTs is zero before energizing.
Because there is no memory voltage, operation of the line distance functions
may be undefined. To provide protection to detect faults when a line is first en-
ergized, the Switch-On-To-Fault function (SOTF) is involved.
SOTF Enable
Close Pulse Enable
Breaker Signal Close Pulse B1

B1 10ms
50 ILa RMS
<4% I nominal A1
50 ILb RMS B1
RMS fixed 50 ILc RMS
Status Montioring Enable

>4% I nominal 50 ILa RMS
50 ILb RMS
RMS fixed B1
50 ILc RMS
52A (Main) 10ms
Breaker Signal
52A (Aux) S SOTF
Enable Under Voltage Monitoring R TRIP
27 Under Voltage A1
50 ILa Trip
50 ILb Trip
C1
50 ILc Trip
50N Enable
50N Trip
21P2 Alarm
21N2 Alarm
21 Zone 2 Enable
21P3 Alarm
21N3 Alarm
21 Zone 3 Enable
From Back-up 50 Trip

Protection 50N Trip
IL2a / IL1a
2nd Harmonic
IL2b / IL1b
Block
IL2c / IL1c
2nd Harmonic Restraint Enable
Figure 5.15: Switch-On-To-Fault (SOTF)
The logic diagram, Figure 5.15: Switch-On-To-Fault (SOTF) on page 5-21,

shows how the circuit actually works. The SOTF function has options as Close
Command or Status Monitoring.
Close Command
This method can be applied where the relay can get the Breaker Close com-
mand from control panel manual close switch (TNC) or SCADA Close com-
mand. This Close command should reach the relay as an External Input or a
Virtual Input or ProLogics to initiate SOTF logic.
This method ensures that all the poles or any one pole are in dead condition for
more than the A1 timer by checking the current level (i.e. lower than 4% of
nominal), then it will enable the SOTF function.

Status Monitoring
This method can be applied where the relay can get Breaker status (52A). This
Breaker Status Monitoring signal should reach the relay as an External Input
or a Virtual Input to initiate SOTF logic.
This method will monitor all the pole statuses as well as each pole load current.
The SOTF function is enabled whenever current value is changing from 0 to
more than 4% of nominal or any pole Breaker status is changing from open to
close.
Both options have a common Pick-up delay (i.e. timer B1), which will allow
to extend the SOTF function enabled up-to the desired settable duration. Typ-
ically, this timer value shall be equal to Zone 2 time delay setting.
Additional Function Information

Under voltage supervision is available as an optional supervision. When the 27
under voltage element is enabled in the SOTF function, it is recommended to
keep the C1 timer setting greater than or equal to 20ms to avoid any nuisance
tripping because of the reset delay in 27 under voltage element. User can also
enable or disable 21 Zone-2 and/or 21 Zone-3 monitoring.
During SOTF Enabled condition, if any 50 Trip or 50N Trip or Zone 2 (21N2
or 21P2) or Zone 3 (21P3 or 21N3) alarm pick-up condition happens, then the
relay will go for an instantaneous 3-pole SOTF Trip.
In addition to the above options, the SOTF function has a second harmonic re-
straint logic which allows the line to be more easily energized if the line is T-
tapped with an online reactor or transformer. Energization of the line with the
T-tapped device results in second harmonics that allows the line to be ener-
gized. If a fault exists that exceeds the line high set overcurrent devices, the line
is allowed to trip.
Table 5.8: Switch-On-To-Fault Settings
Switch-On-To-Fault Enabled/Disabled
Breaker Signal Close Command/ Status Monitoring
Close Pulse EI1 to EI 20, PL1 to PL24, VI1 to VI30 (This setting is
enabled when the Breaker signal setting is selected as
Close Command)
Main Breaker Status EI1 to EI 20, PL1 to PL24, VI1 to VI30 (This setting is
enabled when the Breaker signal setting is selected as
Status Monitoring)
Aux Breaker Status EI1 to EI 20, PL1 to PL24, VI1 to VI30 (This setting is
enabled when the Breaker signal setting selected as Sta-
tus Monitoring and the “ring bus/one and half breaker
configuration” is enabled)
Pole Dead Pick-up Timer (A1, 0.0 to 999.9 Seconds (This setting is enabled when the
Pick-up timer) Breaker signal setting is selected as Close Command or
when the Undervoltage supervision is enabled.)
SOTF Enabled Duration (B1, 0.0 to 999.9 Seconds

Pick-up timer)

Table 5.8: Switch-On-To-Fault Settings
Device 50 Pickup 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5 A)

0.1 to 10.0 A secondary (1 A)
Device 50N Enabled Enabled/Disable
Device 50N Pickup 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5 A)

Device 50/50N Pickup Delay C1 0.00 to 0.20 Seconds
Enable Device 21 Zone-2 Enabled/Disabled
Enable Device 21 Zone-3 Enabled/Disabled
Under-voltage Supervision Logic Enabled/Disabled
Device 27 Pickup 1.0 to 120.0 (V)
Second Harmonica Restraint Enabled/Disabled

Logic
I2/I1 Ratio 0.0 to 10.0
Weak Infeed Weak Infeed provides tripping if fault levels are too low to activate the distance
(WI) units. If enabled, this function sends a permissive trip signal even if the fault
level seen by the relay is very low as when the line breaker is open. The posi-
tive sequence and zero sequence voltage detectors allow the relay to echo back
a permissive signal to allow the end with fault current to trip quickly without
the need for an auxiliary b contact.
Table 5.9: Weak Infeed Settings
Weak Infeed Enable/Disable
Device 27 V1 Pickup 0.0 to 69.0 V secondary
Device 59 3V0 Pickup 0.0 to 100.0 V secondary
Zone 2/Zone 4 Reset Delay (TWD1) 0.02 to 0.20 seconds
Communication Cycle Reset Delay 0.02 to 0.20 seconds

(TWD2)
Communication Reset Time Delay 0.02 to 1.0 seconds

(TW3)

25/27/59 Sync The relay can bring in voltages from both line and bus PTs. The Line Sync
Check Check function, if enabled, looks at the voltage steady state angle between the
line and bus PT voltage. If this angle is within a plus/minus specified value, (+/
- 1 to 50 degree magnitude range of setting available), the function enables a
definite time delay pickup (user-selectable 0 to 10 seconds) after which time
an output is produced.
The line sync reference voltage is taken from a bus source. The relay can bring
one single phase-to-neutral voltage. The Aux. Voltage Input setting on the Sys-
tem Parameters screen allows the single-phase quantity to be set to either A, B
or C phase. If the relay hardware is ordered with six voltage inputs, all unused
single-phase inputs must be grounded for proper operation.
The Dead Main Live Auxiliary (DMLA), Live Main Dead Auxiliary (LMDA)
and Dead Main Dead Auxiliary (DMDA) logic functions use fixed values of
main and auxiliary positive sequence secondary voltages to determine the Sync
Check condition. The voltage is fixed at 20 V secondary, voltages below 20 V
are declared a dead state and voltages above 20 V are declared a live state.
When enabled, this function checks that the voltage angle between the line PT
and bus PT are within a specified value. Use this function to ensure that closing
a line to a system will result in acceptable power flow. The function uses pos-
itive sequence voltage, and therefore, can accommodate single-phase sources
as well as 3-phase sources. If a single-phase source is used, it must be connect-
ed to the corresponding phase designation on the relay input. For example: If
only a B-phase bus PT is available, it should be connected to the relay input B-
phase terminals. In this example, the voltage and angle limit is 20 degrees with
no pickup or drop out delay.
The Dead Main Live Auxiliary, Live Main Dead Auxiliary and Dead Main
Dead Auxiliary logic functions use fixed values of main and auxiliary positive
sequence secondary voltages to determine the sync check condition. The volt-
age is fixed at 20 V secondary. Voltages below 20 V are declared a dead state
and voltages above 20 V are declared a live state.
Table 5.10: 25/27/59 Sync Check Settings
25 Sync Check Enable/Disable
Maximum Voltage 60.0 to 138.0 V secondary
Minimum Voltage 40.0 to 69.9 V secondary
Angle Difference 1.0 to 50.0 degrees
Pickup Delay 0.00 to 10.00 seconds
Enable Frequency Difference Enable/Disable
Frequency Difference 0.010 to 2.000 Hz
Main/Aux
Enable Dead Main Live Aux. (DMLA) Enable/Disable
Enable Live Main Dead Aux. (LMDA) Enable/Disable
Enable Dead Main Dead Aux. (DMDA) Enable/Disable

79 Recloser The relay provides single-phase tripping and reclosing and 3-phase tripping
and reclosing on the 4500 hardware platform.
The schemes available are user-programmable and consist of the following
user setting options:
• 3-Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme
• 1-Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme
• 1-Phase/3-Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme
Please note that the user can select only one scheme at a time, although the user
can change the scheme selected by using the setting groups within the setting
software.
Table 5.11: 79 Recloser Settings
Protection Scheme Timers
1 Ph max open Pickup Delay (TM) 0.100 to 5.000 seconds

(Pole Discrepancy Time)
1Ph/3ph for 3ph Dropout Delay (TD4) 0.100 to 999.000 seconds

(Reclaim Time for 3Ph AR)
1Ph/3ph for 1ph Pickup Delay (TL5) 0.100 to 5.000 seconds
1Ph/3ph for 1ph Dropout Delay (TD5) 0.100 to 999.000 seconds

(Reclaim Time for 1Ph AR)
Fault Timer Enable/Disable
Fault Timer Pickup 0.05 to 10.00 seconds
79-3Ph Recloser
79-3Ph Recloser Enable Enable/Disable
Number of Shots 1 to 4
First Dead Time/Reclose (T1) 0.1 to 999.9 seconds
Second Dead Time/Reclose (T2) 1.0 to 999.9 seconds
Third Dead Time/Reclose (T3) 1.0 to 999.9 seconds
Fourth Dead Time/Reclose (T4) 1.0 to 999.9 seconds
Closing Pulse Time (Tp) 0.1 to 1.0 seconds
(Lead) Lockout Time (TD) 0.1 to 999.9 seconds
Reclose Initiate Reset (TDI) 0.0 to 999.9 seconds
Recloser Mode Main only, Aux. Only, Main then Aux.,

Aux. then Main
Block Reset (TDB) 0.0 to 999.9 seconds
Follower Time (TF) 0.0 to (TD - 0.1) seconds
Breaker Out of Service (TC) 0.0 to 999.9 seconds
Follower Sequence Switch

Table 5.11: 79 Recloser Settings
Close after the Recloser Follower Time (TF) On/Off
Close after the Recloser Reset Time (TD) On/Off
Sync Control Enabled/Disable
79-1Ph Recloser
79-1Ph Recloser Enable Enabled/Disabled

(determined by Protect Scheme setting
on Scheme Selector screen)
Main Breaker Pole Dead/Live Detection Phase Current/CB Status
Aux. Breaker Pole Dead/Live Detection Phase Current/CB Status
CB AR External Initiation Pole A EI 1-24, PL 1-24, VI 1-30
CB AR External Initiation Pole B EI 1-24, PL 1-24, VI 1-30
CB AR External Initiation Pole C EI 1-24, PL 1-24, VI 1-30
Number of Shots 1
Dead Time/Reclose (T1) 0.1 to 999.9 seconds
Closing Pulse Time (Tp) 0.1 to 1.0 seconds
(Lead) Lockout Reset (TD) 0.1 to 999.9 seconds
Reclose Initiate Reset (TDI) 0.0 to 999.9 seconds
Recloser Mode Main only, Aux. Only, Main then Aux.,

Aux. then Main
Block Reset (TDB) 0.0 to 999.9 seconds
Follower Time (TF) 0.0 to (TD - 0.1) seconds
Breaker Out of Service (TC) 0.0 to 999.9 seconds
Follower Sequence Switch
Close after the Recloser Follower Time (TF) On/Off
Close after the Recloser Reset Time (TD) On/Off

3-Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme

This scheme allows the relay to 3 phase trip always (even if the fault is single
phase in nature) and reclose the 3 phases after a period of time. Up to 4 shots
of reclosing is possible, depending upon the user recloser settings. The recloser
logic control is capable of reclosing a single line breaker or two ring bus line
breakers in a variety of sequences. The breaker reclosing sequence refers to the
breakers as lead and follower breakers. The first breaker selected to reclose is
called the lead breaker and the second breaker that is reclosed is called the fol-
lower. The reclosing can be done with or without synch check supervision. The
output matrix is used to determine the inputs and the outputs to the 3-phase 79
recloser. The line breaker (s) is deemed to be open based on the Breaker Status
input.
3-Phase Reclose Timers

The lead breaker open interval times are settable for each reclosing shot (T1 to
T4) for the 3-phase recloser. The follow breaker open time interval is common
for each reclosure attempt. This follower breaker reclose time can be set to use
the 79 follower timer TF or the 79 reset timer TD. See L-PRO 4500 Function
Logic Diagram for details.
Lead or Follower Breaker Logic

The recloser setting options allow the lead breaker to be the main or auxiliary
breaker. The recloser automatically selects the follower breaker into the lead
position after the out of service time delay, TC is exceeded. If the follower
breaker is removed from service, after the out of service time delay, TC, there
is no further follower breaker reclose attempts. The breaker status is reset when
the breaker status changes to closed for at least 10 seconds, or if the relay pow-
er supply is toggled Off then On again. The breaker (s) is deemed to be open
based on the Breaker Status input.
External Reclose Blocking

The 79 also supports blocking from external devices via the output matrix and
the internal 79 Lockout indication. The user can control the 79 remotely or lo-
cally with external or virtual inputs.
Lockout Indication
Lockout indication is provided for the lead and follower breaker. The lead and
follower lockout indication is set for a fixed time delay pickup of the close sig-
nal time (TP) plus 1.0 second. When the recloser goes to the lead lockout con-
dition, the breaker out of service timers are set to zero seconds and
automatically pick up. If the recloser is in the lead lockout state, the logic re-
mains in that state for setting (TD) seconds after the main or auxiliary breaker
is manually closed. The follower lockout condition occurs when the follower
breaker receives a close signal and the breaker remains open. If the recloser is
in the follower lockout state, the logic remains in that state for setting (TD) sec-
onds after the follower breaker is manually closed.
The recloser provides flexibility with lead and follower breaker options. The
lead breaker is in the main or auxiliary position. This allows the user to control

the lead circuit breaker with complete Dead Main Live Auxiliary, Live Main
Dead Auxiliary, Dead Main Dead Auxiliary or Live Main Live Auxiliary su-
pervision (angle limit and voltage limit). The user also has the ability to control
the 79 remotely or locally with external or virtual inputs. The 79 recloser mon-
itors the breaker contact “a” status and automatically moves the follower
breaker into the lead position when the lead breaker is removed from service,
after an out-of-service time delay setting. For details of auto-recloser examples
see “Recloser Operation Example” in Appendix L.
Sync Control
The flexibility provided with device 79 allows the user to control 1 or 2 circuit
breakers with complete Dead Main Live Auxiliary, Live Main Dead Auxiliary,
Dead Main Dead Auxiliary or Live Main Live Auxiliary supervision (slip fre-
quency). Sync control is provided on the lead breaker only, because the follow-
er breaker always recloses after the lead breaker has successfully closed.
ProLogic can be used to supervise follower breaker closing attempts if an ex-
ternal input is used to signal that the follower breaker has a valid sync check
signal from an external device (e.g. PLC).

1-Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme Setting

This setting allows the relay to trip only the faulted phase if the fault is single
phase in nature, then initiate a reclose of that phase after a line dead time. The
reason for this is that many faults are transient in nature, such as those caused
by lightning. Tripping only the faulted phase, and then reclosing it some time
later, should in many cases allow the line to return into service.
In operation, the Single-Phase Trip Setting blocks 79-3 from any attempts to
reclose on a 3 Phase basis. If a single phase fault occurs on the line, the faulted
phase is identified and only that phase is opened. After a period of time as de-
fined by the pickup time of timer T1 in the single phase recloser 79-1, that
phase will be reclosed. If the fault starts as a single phase fault and then evolves
into a multiphase fault, or commutates to a different phase while the first phase
is open, the line will 3 phase trip and reclosing will be inhibited. If the first sin-
gle phase fault is detected, then reclosed upon, and if the fault persists, the line
will 3-phase trip and lockout. Timer TD5 dropout time determines how soon a
subsequent single line to ground fault can occur after the first one in order for
the line to attempt another single phase trip and reclosure. If a single phase
fault is detected and that phase opens but fails to reclose before timer TM times
out, the line will 3-phase trip and lockout. It is important therefore that timer
TM be set longer in duration than the single phase recloser time. Only one sin-
gle phase reclose is attempted. If upon reclosure the fault persists, before timer
TD5 has had a chance to dropout, the line will 3-phase trip and lockout. To get
the line out of a locked out state, the line must be manually reclosed and stay
in service for longer than the single phase lockout timer TD reset.
There are two methods of recloser initiation for the 1-phase recloser, internal
and external initiation. Internal initiation is performed via protection functions
assigned to the 94 1-ph in the output matrix. External initiation is performed
by EIs, VIs or PLs assigned to the “CB AR External Initation Pole A/B/C” set-
ting in the 79 1-Ph settings. The internal and external initiation methods work
in parallel (see “79 1-Ph Recloser Initiation” on page 5-69).
For the internal initiation, the protection functions that can initiate a single
phase trip and reclose are defined by the user in the output matrix setting
screen. The user has full control to dictate which protection functions should
initiate the recloser logic. The single phase initiation is performed by assigning
a protection function to the 94 1-Ph. For more information on the 94 tripping
function, see “94 Tripping” on page 5-68. Time delayed trips for instance may
be considered backup functions where recloser initiation is undesired. In this
case these types of operations can be set to block any attempted reclosures in
any of the chosen reclosure schemes. These protection functions can also be set
to initiate transient fault or dynamic swing recordings and breaker failure ini-
tiations on the output matrix as well.
The external initiation method is controlled by the “CB AR External Initiation
Pole A/B/C” setting in the 79 1-Ph settings. Any EI, PL or VI can be assigned
to each Pole. When these external signals go High, they act as the initiator for
the 79 1-Ph. Once the reclose sequence has been initiated, any subsequent ini-
tiations are ignored during the sequence.

The Pole Dead/Live detection for the 79 1-phase scheme can be set to either
CB Status or Phase Current detection methods. In the CB Status Method, the
pole dead/live detection is performed by monitoring the circuit breaker status
input configured on the Breaker Status screen (see “Breaker Status” on page 7-
27). The Phase Current detection method monitors the phase currents to deter-
mine the dead/live condition for the circuit breaker. If measured current flow
is less than 4% nominal current (0.2 A for 5 A relay) the breaker is considered
to be open (see “79 1-Ph Recloser Initiation” on page 5-69).
During the single pole open condition while in the single pole tripping mode,
unbalanced line load current will create negative and zero sequence line quan-
tities. In order to override these unbalances, provisions have been made in the
relay logic to allow the user to apply modified protective relay settings to the
line protections that will be automatically applied while the line is in a phase
open condition. These settings can be determined through load flow and fault
study cases for the protected line. Once the line phase recloses, the protective
settings that have been modified will return to their original settings. In this
way, protection security can be maintained while the line goes through a single
phase trip and reclose operation.
The drawing for the single phase reclosing logic is shown on the L-PRO 4500
Function Logic Diagram.
If the Protection Scheme is set to 1 Phase, the 79 1-Ph Recloser

function is automatically always enabled.

1-Phase/3-Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme

With this scheme setting, the relay will trip and reclose a single phase for an
initial Single Phase fault and will trip and reclose for a Three Phase or multi-
phase fault. Only one attempt to reclose will occur if the fault is permanent in
nature before lockout will occur.
If sufficient time takes place between the first fault and subsequent new line
faults, as determined by the TD4 and TD5 dropout times, the protection will
try to keep the line in service by tripping and reclosing the line as required.
It should be noted that the relay has two types of reclosers, a single phase type
79-1 and a 3-phase type 79-3 recloser.
The single phase recloser has only one shot, determined by timer T1. This time
delay applies for both the Single Phase Scheme and for the Single Phase/Three
Phase Scheme settings.
The 3-phase recloser has a common setting for the first reclose of the Three
Phase or the Single Phase/Three Phase Trip and Reclose Schemes.
Summary of 3-Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme Setting

Trip and Provides 3-phase tripping for any type of line fault with up to four (4) shots of
Reclose reclosure possible.
Schemes
1-Phase Trip and Reclose Scheme Setting
This scheme allows one shot of trip and reclose if the fault is single phase in
nature. Multiple Phase line faults will cause a 3-phase trip and lockout. Single
phase faults occurring at a frequency less than TD5 reset time will result in 3-
phase trip and lockout after first attempted reclose.
1-Phase/MultiPhase Trip Scheme Setting

An initial line fault will cause the line to either 3-phase trip or single phase trip.
If subsequent line faults occur before timers TD4 or TD5 reset it will result in
a 3-phase trip and lockout.
For any schemes selected, if a line goes into the lockout state, only a successful
manual line reclose or a relay power supply reboot will reset the lockout logic.

59 Main/ The relay provides overvoltage protection from both the bus and line PTs. Each
Auxiliary input has two definite time delay functions.
Overvoltage
Gate Switch (Setting)
59 Va Main 1/2
59 Vb Main 1/2
T
59 Vc Main 1/2
0
Figure 5.16: 59 Main Overvoltage
The definite time delay main overvoltage function, similar to the undervoltage
function, looks at all 3 phase-to-neutral voltages. This function uses the RMS
voltages to make this determination of overvoltage and is settable to an AND
or OR logic.
The auxiliary overvoltage function operates exactly the same way as the main
overvoltage function except that (i) it uses voltage from the auxiliary PT inputs
and (ii) the gate switch setting of the 59 Aux. is forced to OR when the Aux.
Voltage Input setting is set to one phase (A, B or C phase).
Table 5.12: 59 Overvoltage Settings
Main-1 / Main-2 Enable/Disable
Auxiliary-1 / Auxiliary - 2 Enable/Disable
Gate Switch AND or OR
Pickup 1.0 to 138.0 V secondary
59N Zero The relay provides Zero sequence overvoltage protection from line side PT.
Sequence The element operates on the residual voltage quantity 3V0. The element has
one DTL and one Inverse Time stage
Overvoltage
The device 59N Inverse Time provides three IEC inverse time curve types,
three IEEE inverse time types of Zero sequence overvoltage protection and one
user defined curve .The equation and the parameters of device 59N are listed
below.
Pickup
T (3V0) =TMS (B+ (A/ ((3V0/3V0pickup) p -1)))
Reset
T (3V0) =TMS (TR/ (1-(3V0/3V0pickup) 2))

Table 5.13: IEC and IEEE Curves
N
Curve Type A B P TR
O
1 IEC Standard Inverse 0.14 (Fixed) 0.00 (Fixed) 0.02 (Fixed) 13.5
2 IEC Very Inverse 13.5 (Fixed) 0.00 (Fixed) 1.00 (Fixed) 47.3
3 IEC Extremely Inverse 80.00 (Fixed) 0.00 (Fixed) 2.00 (Fixed) 80
4 IEEE Moderately 0.0104 0.0228 0.02 (Fixed) 0.97

Inverse (Fixed) (Fixed)
5 IEEE Very Inverse 3.880 (Fixed) 0.0963 2.00 (Fixed) 4.32

(Fixed)
6 IEEE Extremely 5.67 (Fixed) 0.0352 2.00 (Fixed) 5.82

Inverse (Fixed)
7 User-defined 0.0010 to 0.0000 to 0.01 to [0.1,

1000.0000 10.0000 10.00 100]
Table 5.14: Table 4.13: 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage setting functions
3V0 Pickup Minimum level operates device 59N
Curve type Sets the type of inverse time curve
TMS Time scaling factor for inverse time curve
A, B, p Parameters for defining the curve
TR Factor for altering the reset time
Table 5.15: 59N Zero sequence overvoltage setting ranges
59N Inverse Time Delay Enable/Disable
Pickup (Volt) 5.00 to 150.00
Curve Type See Table 4.12: IEC and IEEE curves
TMS 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.0010 to 1000.0
B 0.0000 to 10.0
p 0.01 to 10.0
TR 0.10 to 100.0
59N Definite Time Delay Enable/Disable
Pickup (Volt) 5.00 to 150.00
Pickup Delay (Sec) 0.00 to 99.99

27 Main/ The relay provides undervoltage protection from both the bus and line PTs.
Auxiliary These functions are definite time delay functions.
Undervoltage The definite time main undervoltage function looks at the phase-to-neutral
voltage of all 3 phases to determine an undervoltage condition. The fundamen-
tal RMS voltage is used for this calculation. If any of the phase-to-neutral volt-
ages is below the set value, the function starts the definite time delay timer. The
user can set this function to be an AND or OR logic.
The auxiliary undervoltage function operates exactly the same way as the main
overvoltage function except that (i) it uses voltage from the auxiliary PT inputs
and (ii) the gate switch setting of the 59 Aux. is forced to AND when the Aux.
Voltage Input setting is set to one phase (A, B or C phase).
Gate Switch (Setting)

27 Va Main
27 Vb Main
T
27 Vc Main
O
Figure 5.17: 27 Undervoltage

60 Loss of
Potential (LOP)
27 VLa (0.75 pu fixed)
27 VLb (0.75 pu fixed)
27 VLc (0.75 pu fixed)

59 VLc (0.1 pu fixed) 0 60 LOP
dVpos/dt > 3V/cycle 17ms
dVpos/dt < -3V/cycle
ABS | dIpos/dt | > 0.1A/cycle 0 5ms

20ms 12ms
Negative Sequence Monitoring
V2 > Vnps
I2 < Inps
50 Ipos
50 3I0
50 ILA (4% I nominal)

50 ILB (4% I nominal)
50 ILC (4% I nominal)
Figure 5.18: Loss of Potential Logic
The relay distance elements (21P and 21N) are supervised by both instanta-
neous non-directional overcurrent and the loss of potential (LOP) logic to pre-
vent false trip due to the loss of potential, where the phase distance elements
are supervised by the delta current (i.e. Ia-Ib, Ib-Ic and Ic-Ia), and the ground
distance elements are supervised by both the phase current and the zero se-
quence (3I0) current.
The loss of potential (LOP) function uses rate of change values for the positive
sequence voltage and current signal along with voltage and current supervision
to detect loss of potential conditions. This function operates very fast and been
field proven to block the distance elements during potential transferring be-
tween buses.
The function looks for a negative rate of change on the positive sequence volt-
age while determining if the positive sequence current is changing. A loss of
potential in itself should result in only a loss of voltage or a negative rate of
change of voltage. A fault results in a high rate of change of current as well. In
some rare cases there is a negative rate of change of fault current, therefore we
use an absolute rate of change of current. When the loss of potential condition
is detected, it is latched until all the 3-phase voltages are above 75% or a pos-
itive rate of change of voltage is detected. So the circuit detects a loss of poten-
tial that results in a voltage of less than 75%. Select positive and zero sequence
current blocking functions above the maximum load current, this ensures that
LOP does not pick up on fault.
A dropout timer has been added on the di/dt signal (in front of gate 169) to en-
sure that the di/dt signal will not reset earlier than the dv/dt signal. This change
improves the security of the algorithm in some particular fault situations.
If desired, negative sequence monitoring can be enabled to provide enhanced
performance against PT fuse failure conditions occur during line energization.

Table 5.16: 60 Loss of Potential Settings
60 Loss of Potential Enable/Disable
I1 Blocking 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5 A)

3I0 Blocking 0.5 to 50.0 A secondary (5 A)

Negative Sequence Monitoring Enable/Disable
Vnps 7.0 to 110 V
Inps 0.25 to 5.0 A secondary (5 A)

If this function is enabled and an AC Loss of Potential takes place, an output

contact can be closed.
Loss of potential causes an alarm and distance elements will be blocked. Pos-
itive and zero sequence current settings provided will block this function for
faults. If voltage goes below 75% nominal (49.8 V) and the currents obtained
do not exceed the settings, the loss of potential will be initiated.
Note that the positive and zero sequence current blocking level
should be set above the maximum line current. This function is fast
enough to provide blocking of the distance functions for schemes that
use bus potential inputs that are sometimes transferred without the
need for any external blocking inputs.
60 CT The relay provides CT secondary circuit supervision function for both main
Supervision and auxiliary CT’s. The element operates on presence of negative sequence
current Inps on main CT above the set vale and the absence of negative se-
quence voltage Vnps (below the set value, line PT) principle.
The auxiliary CT Supervision function operates exactly the same way as the
main CT Supervision function except that it uses the Inps current from the aux-
iliary CT inputs. The auxiliary CT Supervision function is only available on the
10CT, 6PT model.
Main CT Supervision Enabled T

Main CT Inps > Pickup
Main PT Vnps < Pickup O
Figure 5.19: 60 CT Supervision

Table 5.17: 60 CT Supervision Settings
Main Enable/Disable
Inps Pickup 0.25 to 5.00 A secondary (5A)

Vnps Pickup 7.00 to 110.00 V secondary
Auxiliary Enable/Disable
(Available on 10CT, 6PT model)
Inps Pickup 0.25 to 5.00 A secondary (5A)

Vnps Pickup 7.00 to 110.00 V secondary
81 Frequency The relay has 4 frequency devices available. Each frequency element can be
set to operate either at a fixed level of under-frequency, a fixed level of over-
frequency, or at a rate of change level (df/dt). The df/dt function can be set to
operate for a positive rate of change or a negative rate of change. Each frequen-
cy element has a definite time delay setting to create a time delayed output. A
fixed level of positive sequence voltage of 0.25 pu provides an undervoltage
inhibit on each element
T
Frequency (Hz)
O
Figure 5.20: Frequency Fixed Level
T
df/dt (Hz/s)
O
Figure 5.21: Frequency Rate of Change
Table 5.18: 81 Over/Under Frequency Settings
Disabled/Fixed Level/Rate of Change
50.000 to 59.995 or 60.005 to 70.000 (fixed level)

Pickup
-10.0 to -0.1 or 0.1 to 10.0 (rate of change)
81.1
0.05 to 99.99 seconds (fixed level)
Pickup Delay
0.20 to 99.99 seconds (rate of change)

Table 5.18: 81 Over/Under Frequency Settings

Pickup
81.2
Pickup Delay

Pickup
81.3
Pickup Delay

Pickup
81.4
Pickup Delay
Four frequency elements are provided with adjustable definite time delays.
Frequency is determined from the main voltage input (3 phase voltage).
50LS Individual overcurrent devices are provided for the main and auxiliary CTs.
Overcurrent These individual overcurrent devices can be used with ProLogic to create logic
or used directly from the Output Matrix.
The auxiliary 50LS function is only available on the 10CT, 6PT model.
50 I1a RMS T Low Set Overcurrent

50 I1b RMS
50 I1c RMS 0
Figure 5.22: Low Set Overcurrent
Table 5.19: 50LS Low Set Overcurrent Settings
Main (Input 1) Enable/Disable
Pickup 0.10 to 50.0 A secondary (5A)

Pickup Delay 0.00 to 10.00 Seconds
Auxiliary (Input 2) Enable/Disable

(Available on 10CT, 6PT model)

Pickup Delay 0.00 to 10.00 Seconds

50BF Breaker The Breaker Failure (BF) protection function detects breaker failures. There
Failure are two sets of breaker failure protection functions, 50BF Main and 50BF Aux-
iliary. When breaker failure is detected by a trip or other internal logic (user-
settable through the output matrix) and the breaker current still exists, two tim-
ers (T1 and T2, user-settable) are started. When the timers are timed out and
the current still exists (which indicates breaker failure), the output of this func-
tion is set high. Use the two outputs of this function to trip another trip coil or
the next level of breakers, such as bus breakers.
The 50BF Auxiliary function is only available for the 10CT, 6PT model and is
only available in a ring-bus configuration.
Pro tec tion Sch e me = 1 Ph as e
Pro tec tion Sch e me = 1 /3 Ph ase M ain Ext erna l

3 Ph ase In itiat e 5 0 I 1a > B re ake r
M ain Ext erna l C urren t P ickup

A P ha se Initia te
5 0B F In it ia tio n (Ou tp ut m atrix)
Sin gle Ph as e
T rip Picku p D elay 1
A P ha se 5 0 I 1b > B re ake r
T rip M ain Ext erna l 50BF-1 Main Trip
C urren t P ickup
B Ph ase In itiat e
Picku p D elay 2
B Ph ase 5 0 I 1c > Brea ke r 50BF-2 Main Trip

T rip M ain Ext erna l C urren t P ickup
C P ha se Initia te
C P ha se
T rip
Figure 5.23: 50BF Main Breaker Failure
Table 5.20: 50BF Breaker Failure Settings
Main Enable/Disable
Pickup Delay 1 0.01 to 99.99 Seconds
Breaker Current Pickup 0.10 to 50.0 A secondary (5A)

Auxiliary (available on 10CT/6PT Enable/Disable

model)
Breaker Current Pickup 0.10 to 50.0 A secondary (5A)

External Single Phase 50BF Initiate
Main
A Phase Disabled, EI 1 to EI 24, PL1 to PL24
B Phase Disabled, EI 1 to EI 24, PL1 to PL24

Table 5.20: 50BF Breaker Failure Settings
C Phase Disabled, EI 1 to EI 24, PL1 to PL24
Auxiliary (available on 10CT/6PT model)
A Phase Disabled, EI 1 to EI 24, PL1 to PL24
B Phase Disabled, EI 1 to EI 24, PL1 to PL24
C Phase Disabled, EI 1 to EI 24, PL1 to PL24
The L-PRO breaker failure protection can be initiated by any protection func-
tion located within the L-PRO relay by initiating the BFI column in the Output
Matrix screen. When the breaker failure function is initiated this way several
modes of operation may occur.
1. If the 3 Pole tripping option for the relay is selected, initiation of the BFI
column in the Output matrix will result in 3 pole breaker failure initiation.
Output of the breaker failure function will then be a three pole output. The
3 pole BF initiation will occur regardless of the type of fault detected, sin-
gle phase or multi-phase fault.
2. If the 1 Pole (single pole) tripping option for the relay is selected, initiation
of the BFI column in the Output matrix will result in a 1 pole breaker fail-
ure initiation if a single phase trip by a protection function operates. If a
multi phase fault occurs, a multi-phase protection function will be initiated
and the BF initiation will be a 3 pole breaker failure. For this case all three
poles of the breaker will be checked to see if they open correctly. Breaker
failure operation will result in 3 pole backup breaker tripping just like the
single pole BF initiation.
3. If the 1/3 Pole Scheme tripping option for the relay is selected, the breaker
failure initiation will be a combination of (1) and (2) above, with single or
three pole BF initiation as required by the fault detection.
The breaker failure function can also be initiated by an input to one of the ex-
ternal inputs from an outside protective relay or by a ProLogic input. This input
can be a phase segregated input that can come from a single pole trip from an
external relay.
The breaker failure logic uses a current detector that is user settable in the 50BF
Setting screen to determine whether a pole is open or closed in the range of 0.1
- 50 A secondary. There are two (2) breaker failure functions available per line
breaker with adjustable pickup definite time delays from 0.01 to 99.9 seconds.
In any case, the output of the Breaker Failure function must be set to close out-
put contacts to perform its function. This is done by mapping the BF output to
the appropriate output contact in the Output Matrix screen.

Directional Overcurrent elements (50/51/67, 50N/51N/67, 50G/51G/67 and 46-50/46-51/

Control Used in 67) can be monitored by the directional element used in the 21P/N elements or
the directional functions that operate based on Alpha and Beta settings.
Overcurrent
Elements Operating boundaries of the Alpha and Beta based directional element are de-
fined as shown in Figure 5.24: Directional Control on page 5-41.
Figure 5.24: Directional Control
1. Alpha is the angle by which current leads or lags the positive real axis of V1
ref. Alpha is a positive in value if current leads V1 ref and vice versa.
2. Beta is the angle by which current leads or lags the Alpha boundary. Beta
is set to a positive value if current leads Alpha angle and vice versa.
This directional function consists of following options:

Directional: Above directional control is applied. Since the positive sequence
voltage is used, directionality is accurate even under 2- phase LOP conditions.
Under 3-phase LOP conditions, function goes into the block mode.
Non-directional: Directional control is disabled.
Combined: Works as the directional option under all conditions except, 3-
phase LOP. Under 3-phase LOP conditions, function goes into the non-direc-
tional mode.

50/51/67 Phase Phase Overcurrent provides backup protection to the line. The user can define
Overcurrent directional or non directional control on either 50 or 51 functions.
Device 51 provides 3 IEC inverse time curve types, 3 IEEE inverse time types
of overcurrent protection and one user-defined curve. The equation and the pa-
rameters of Device 50/51/67 are listed below.
Table 5.21: IEC and IEEE Curves
No Curve Type A B p TR
1 IEC Standard Inverse 0.14 0.00 0.02 13.5
2 IEC Very Inverse 13.50 0.00 1.00 47.3
3 IEC Extremely Inverse 80.00 0.00 2.00 80
4 IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.0103 0.0228 0.02 0.97
5 IEEE Very Inverse 3.922 0.0982 2.00 4.32
6 IEEE Extremely Inverse 5.64 0.0243 2.00 5.82
7 User-defined [0.001, 1000] [0.0, 10.0] [0.01, 10.0] 0.1, 100
The equation of Devices 50/51/67 is given in Equation (5 and 6) below. The

various parameters are defined in Table 5.22: 50/51/67 Phase Overcurrent Set-
tings on page 43.
For I > pickup (5)

A
T  I  = TMS B + ------------------------------------
I - p – 1
 -----------------
 Pickup
For I < pickup (6)

TR
T  I  = TMS -----------------------------------
I - 2
1 –  -----------------
 Pickup
The 51 Reset time (equation 6) is the equivalent of the disk reset time on an
electro-mechanical induction disk overcurrent relay.

Table 5.22: 50/51/67 Phase Overcurrent Settings
50 Enable/Disable
Directional Directional, non-directional, combined,

Forward and Reverse

Pickup Delay 0.00 to 99.99 seconds non-directional

0.01 to 99.99 seconds directional
51 Enable/Disable

Forward and Reverse
Pickup 0.25 to 25.00 A secondary (5 A)

Curve Type For details see Table 5.21: IEC and IEEE Curves on page
42.
TMS 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.0010 to 1000.0000
B 0.0000 to 10.0000
p 0.01 to 10.00
TR 0.10 to 100.00
Directional Angle Setting
Alpha -179.90 to 180.00
Beta 0.10 to 360.00
Phase Setting Multiplier for Single-Phase Open Pole Condition
50 Pickup Current Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
50 Pickup Time Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
51 Pickup Current Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
51 Pickup Time Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00

50N/51N/67 Neutral calculated overcurrent provides backup protection for line to ground
Neutral faults. The user can define directional or non directional control on either 50N
or 51N functions. 51N can also be configured for use in the communication
Calculated scheme. All the curve definitions are the same as the phase overcurrent except
Overcurrent that this function uses 3I0 rather than phase current. The equation is:
For 3I0 > pickup (7)

A
T  3I 0  = TMS B + ------------------------------------
3I 0  p
 ------------------ –1
 Pickup
For 3I0 < pickup (8)

TR
T  3I 0  = TMS -----------------------------------
 3IO - 2
1 – -----------------
 Pickup
All parameters for Equations 5 and 6 are defined in Table 5.23: 50N/51N/67
Neutral Overcurrent Settings on page 44.
Table 5.23: 50N/51N/67 Neutral Overcurrent Settings
50N Enable/Disable

Forward and Reverse
Pickup (3I0) 0.25 to 50.00 (5 A)

0.05 to 10.00 (1 A)

51N Enable/Disable
Directional Directional, non-directional, combined, direction in scheme

Forward and Reverse
Pickup (3I0) 0.25 to 50.00 (5 A)

0.05 to 10.00 (1 A)
Curve Type For details see Table 5.21: IEC and IEEE Curves on page 42.
TMS 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.0010 to 1000.0000
B 0.0000 to 10.0000
p 0.01 to 10.00
TR 0.10 to 100.00
Alpha -179.90 to 180.00

Table 5.23: 50N/51N/67 Neutral Overcurrent Settings
Beta 0.10 to 360.00
Phase Setting Multiplier for Single Phase Open Pole Condition
50N Pickup Current Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
50N Pickup Time Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
51N Pickup Current Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
51N Pickup Time Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
50G/51G/67 Neutral measured overcurrent provides backup protection for line to ground
Neutral faults. The user can define directional or non directional control on either 50G
or 51G functions. All of the curve definitions are the same as the neutral cal-
Measured culated overcurrent except that this function uses measured neutral current
Overcurrent rather than calculated 3I0 current. The equation is:
For Ig > pickup (9)
For Ig < pickup (10)
All parameters for Equations 9 and 10 are defined in Table 5.24: 50G/51G/67
Neutral Overcurrent Settings.
Table 5.24: 50G/51G/67 Neutral Overcurrent Settings
50G Enable/Disable

Forward and Reverse
Pickup (I0) 0.25 to 50.00 (5 A)

0.05 to 10.00 (1 A)

51G Enable/Disable

Table 5.24: 50G/51G/67 Neutral Overcurrent Settings
Directional Directional, non-directional, combined, direction in scheme

Forward and Reverse
Pickup (I0) 0.25 to 50.00 (5 A)

0.05 to 10.00 (1 A)
Curve Type For details see Table 5.21: IEC and IEEE Curves on page 42.
TMS 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.0010 to 1000.0000
B 0.0000 to 10.0000
p 0.01 to 10.00
TR 0.10 to 100.00
Alpha -179.90 to 180.00
Beta 0.10 to 360.00
50G Pickup Current Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
50G Pickup Time Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
51G Pickup Current Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
51G Pickup Time Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
46-50/46-51/67 Negative Sequence Overcurrent provides further backup protection for any un-
Negative balanced faults. The user can define directional or non direction all control on
either 46-50 or 46-51 functions. All the curve definitions are the same as the
Sequence Phase Overcurrent. The only difference is that this function uses the negative
Overcurrent sequence current (I2) rather than phase current. The equation is:
For I2 > pickup (9)

A
T  I 2  = TMS B + -----------------------------------
-
 ------------------ p – 1
I 2
 Pickup
For I2 < pickup (10)

TR
T  I 2  = TMS -----------------------------------
 I 2 - 2
1 – -----------------
 Pickup
Table 5.25: 46-50/46-51N/67Negative Sequence Overcurrent Settings
46-50 Enable/Disable

Table 5.25: 46-50/46-51N/67Negative Sequence Overcurrent Settings

Forward and Reverse
Pickup 0.50 to 50.00 (5 A)

0.10 to 10.00 (1 A)

46-51 Enable/Disable

Forward and Reverse
Pickup 0.50 to 50.00 (5 A)

0.10 to 10.00 (1 A)
Curve Type For details see Table 5.21: IEC and IEEE Curves on page
42.
TMS 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.0010 to 1000.0000
B 0.0000 to 10.0000
p 0.01 to 10.00
TR 0.10 to 100.00
Alpha -179.90 to 180.00
Beta 0.10 to 360.00
46-50 Pickup Current Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
46-50 Pickup Time Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
46-51 Pickup Current Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
46-51 Pickup Time Multiplier 0.10 to 2.00
Adaptive The relay provides an adaptive additional time delay (maximum 16 ms) re-
Additional sponse to the 50 O/C elements to prevent operation during RFI testing with
minimal pickup set points and operation near pickup.
Delay for 50 O/C
Elements This adaptive delay is applied to: 50LS-1, 50LS-2, 50LS-3, 50LS-4, 50, 50N,
50G, 46/50.
If the Pickup Delay setting (Tp) < 20ms AND Pickup Level setting <Inominal
(nominal current), an extra 8 ms delay is added. After this 8 ms timer expires,
if I < threshold, the second 8 ms extra delay will be added in addition to the
original Tp. If I > threshold after the first 8 ms timer expires, only Tp is used
for the delay. (Note: Tp is the setting which is less than 20 ms, could be 0 ms).

The threshold is equal to 2*PickupLevel if pickup is between 40%*Inominal and

Inominal (i.e. between 2 A and 5 A for 5 ACT). The threshold is equal to
40%*Inominal if 2*PickupLevel < 40%*Inominal. The threshold is equal to Inom-
inal if 2*PickupLevel>Inominal
46BC - Broken The Broken Conductor (46BC) function can detect unbalanced series or open-
Conductor circuit faults (referred to as series faults from here on). Series faults can arise
from broken conductors or jumpers, misoperation of single phase switchgear
and the operation of series fuses. Series faults do not cause an increase in phase
currents in the system and thus are not easily detectable by standard overcur-
rent relays. However, series faults produce an unbalance and a detectable level
of negative sequence current.
A negative sequence overcurrent relay (46-50/46-51) could possibly be used to
detect series fault conditions. However, on a lightly loaded line, the negative
sequence current resulting from a series fault may be very close to, or less than,
the full load steady state unbalance in the system. A negative sequence element
therefore would not operate at low load levels. For this reason, the 46BC func-
tion is used to detect series faults.
The function incorporates an element which measures the ratio of negative se-
quence to positive phase sequence current (I2/I1). This ratio is affected less se-
verely than the measurement of negative sequence current alone, since the ratio
remains approximately constant with variations in load current. This ratio al-
lows for a more sensitive setting to be achieved.
An adequate time delay should be used to coordinate with other protective de-
vices and to ensure that the device does not trip during the operation of single
phase switchgear or during re-close sequences.
I2 / I1 > P ick-U p Se ttin g

T
I1 > 2 .5 % In om in al
46BC Trip
0
IL A < U n d er C u rren t S e ttin g
IL B < U n de r C urre nt Se tt in g
IL C < U n d er C u rre n t S et tin g
Figure 5.25: 46 Broken Conductor Logic
Table 5.26: 46BC Settings
46BC Function Enable/Disable
I2/I1 Pickup 10% to 100% (selectable in 10% increments)
Undercurrent 0.04 to 0.50 A (1A)

0.20 to 2.50 A (5A)
Pickup Delay 0.01 to 999.0 s

Z Circle Trigger
X
Figure 5.26: Z Circle Trigger
Table 5.27: Z Circle Trigger Settings
Z Circle Trigger Enable/Disable
Positive Sequence Impedance 0.1 to 50.0 ohms secondary (5 A)

0.5 to 250.0 ohms secondary (1 A)
The Impedance Circle Trigger (Z Circle Trigger) triggers the relay to record on
a dynamic swing disturbance — only used to trigger a recording. This trigger
is usually set outside the last protection zone used and blocked during LOP
conditions.
Fault Locator Whenever a fault occurs and the line trips, the fault locator calculates the fault
type and the distance to the fault. This information is available from the front
display of the relay or through Port 010, 51A or the SCADA port or through
Relay Control Panel software. Fault locator information can also be captured
optionally in event records. Fault locator can be enabled/disabled through set-
tings (system parameters).
The fault locator is initiated by the following logic:
• 21 Trip
• 50N Trip
• 50G Trip
• 51 G Trip
• 51N Trip
• Scheme Trip
• 21 Alarm (configurable)
The relay fault locator uses the Takagi method of fault location. The imped-
ance calculated for a fault initiated by any of the above functions will be cal-
culated and compared with the line impedance to calculate distance to fault.

Mutual Compensation
The fault locator has the ability to take into account mutual compensation for
up to two lines in parallel with the protected line where the relay is applied.
The currents from the parallel line (s) is brought into the relay via current in-
puts 3I01 and 3I02. The currents from up to two parallel lines can be added to
determine the parallel line 3I0 current.
ProLogic ProLogic Control Statements

Using ProLogic, the relay can pick any of the protection functions, external in-
puts or virtual inputs and place them into Boolean-like statements. ProLogic
handles up to 5 functions to generate one ProLogic statement; 24 statements
are possible. The results from these statements are mapped to output contacts
using the output matrix.
The ProLogic control statements are used to create Boolean-like logic. The re-
lay can use any of the protection functions or external inputs combined with
logic gates to create a ProLogic control statement. The possible gates are AND,
NAND, OR, NOR, XOR, NXOR, and LATCH. The control can be time delay
pickup and or time delay dropout, and can drive the front panel target LED.
Twenty-four ProLogic control statements outputs are available and can be used
in the output matrix to customize the relay to specific needs. Inputs to ProLogic
are all the elements plus previous ProLogic statements for logic nesting usage.
The example, for details see Figure 5.27: ProLogic on page 5-50, shows A to
E inputs are status points of devices that are user-selectable. Each ProLogic
output can be given a specific name, pickup and reset time delay.
Op 1 Op 2
A
B Op 3
C Op 4
D Op 5
T
E O
Figure 5.27: ProLogic
Table 5.28: ProLogic Setting Functions
Name Give the ProLogic a meaningful name
Pickup Delay Delay time from pickup to operate
Dropout Delay Delay time from dropout to a ProLogic status

of low
A, B, C, D, E Relay elements as input statements
Operators Boolean-type logic gates

Group Logic Group Logic Control Statements

The relay has 8 Setting Groups (SG). The user can change all relay setting pa-
rameters except the physical connections such as input or output parameters in
each setting group. Setting group changes are performed by using any one of
the 16 available Group Logic statements per setting group. The Group Logic
statements are similar to the ProLogic statements with the following excep-
tions – the sole function is to activate one of the 8 setting groups and the pro-
cessing is in a slower half second cycle. Group Logic inputs statements are
driven from ProLogic or any external input or virtual input or from previous
Group Logic statements. Each Group Logic statement includes 5 inputs (with
Boolean statements), one latch state and one pickup delay timer. The Active
Setting Group (ASG) is viewed from the Terminal Mode, the front panel or
from a record stored by the relay, the ASG is stored with the record).
Group Logic Processing

The 16 Group Logic statements reside in a slower processing thread within the
relay protection algorithms. The processing cycle happens once every half sec-
ond (0.5 second). When using ProLogic statements remember that a latch or
dropout timer should be used if the initiating condition does not last at least 0.5
seconds. In the example following, we will create a definite pulse length using
ProLogic, for details see “Recloser Operation Example” in Appendix L.
Default Setting Group

The relay uses Setting Group 1 as the factory default setting group and retains
the current active setting group in memory. This allows the relay to use the last
active setting group prior to interruption of relay power as the default setting
group following power up.
Change Active Group

The user can at any time change the active setting group. When initiating a set-
ting group change, this change takes precedence over an automatic setting
group change.
The setting group can be changed using the Relay Control Panel, with either
Change or Service access level, using the following path:
Relay Control Panel > Utilities > Settings Group
In this tab, choose desired setting group number and hit Save.
The setting group can also be changed using the relay display interface, after
login in with the Change or Service access level, using the following path:
Main Menu > Utilities > Maintenance > Settings Group Control

In this screen, highlight the group number, and then hit Edit. Choose the de-
sired setting group number, and then hit Enter with the cursor in the return
character (bottom right).
Figure 5.28: Setting Group Control
The protection processor does not have any interruption in service.
Automatic Settings Change

Relay configuration changes during a relay-initiated setting; change does not
disrupt the relay protection functions. Since the relay setting file does not
change, the interface processor uses the new setting group ancillary setting in-
formation at the same time as the protection processor switches to the new set-
ting group. An event is logged to show when the new setting group is in
service.

5.2 Communication-Aided Scheme

LPRO-4500 relay supports two types of communication-aided tripping
schemes: Distance scheme and Directional Earth Fault (DEF) scheme. Basic
logic for the communication-aided schemes (distance and DEF) is shown in
“Communication-aided Scheme” on page 5-58.
Distance The distance scheme provides 4 tripping options. Permissive Over-Reaching

Scheme Transfer Trip (POTT), a combination of POTT with Weak Infeed (WI), Direc-
tional Comparison Blocking (DCB) or Permissive Under-Reaching Transfer
trip (PUTT) are available to be used with external telecommunications devices
for enhanced tripping of the protected line. The combination of phase distance,
ground distance and neutral overcurrent elements provide flexible setting op-
tions for the selected communication aided tripping scheme. All the Distance
Scheme tripping can be assigned to use either Zone 2 starter or Zone 3 starter
by user setting to handle various line configuration applications.
Logic for 2 communication receivers available for distance scheme can be used
for 3 terminal lines or if the telecommunications use 2 separate communication
channels. The user can set the communications receivers to use one of 24 ex-
ternal inputs or one of the 24 ProLogic statements or one of the 30 Virtual In-
puts. The same input cannot be shared between the 2 communication receivers.
The output matrix is used to configure the Distance Scheme Send (permissive
trip or block), the Distance Scheme Phase Trip and Distance Scheme Ground
Trip (local tripping) to any combination of the available output contacts. The
user-set dropout extension on output contacts is eliminated on any contact that
is configured to operate for the scheme send signal; The user can provide the
pickup and dropout time delays for scheme send with timer settings TL3 and
TD3.
In addition, following timers are available.
• Pickup and dropout time delays for POTT current reversal (TL1 and TD1).
• Pickup time delay for DCB Scheme Zone-2 (TL2)
• Dropout time delay for DCB Scheme Receiver (TD2)
For more details, please refer the descriptions specific to each option.
The distance scheme options use the general distance and overcurrent protec-
tion functions of the relay, along with directional overcurrent elements specif-
ically included in the scheme. These elements use the memory polarization as
described in the “Relay Method of Memory Polarization” on page 5-8 and the
directional element as described in “Directional Element” on page 5-10.
50N/51N - OC The carrier trip logic is traditionally initiated by the Zone 2 distance elements,
Carrier Trip and but the relay provides the option to use Zone 3 as the starter, or 2 directional
neutral overcurrent elements that can be used in addition to the Zone 2/3 dis-
Block Logic tance elements. The device 51N time overcurrent element, and the 50N/67F in-
stantaneous overcurrent if enabled can be configured to drive the carrier trip
logic. The 51N is configured in the 50N/51N screen, while the 50N/67F is con-

figured in the scheme selector screen, both elements are forward directional el-
ements.
The scheme selector can also be configured to enable the 50N/67F and 50N/
67R directional overcurrent elements as inputs to ProLogic statements. The
50N/67F element can be set to either forward directional or non-directional
when selecting the action, “ProLogic Only”.
If the pickup delay setting (Tp) < 9 ms, then 9 ms will be used for the delay.
Otherwise Tp will be used for the delay. This change is always applied regard-
less of the direction setting (Non-dir, FWD, REV) and the 3I0 pickup level.
Note: If the directional element cannot determine a valid direction, the direc-
tion is set to “forward”, the 50N/67F may operate, and the 50N/67R element is
blocked. See “The zero-sequence directional element can be used in many ap-
plications. However, where strong mutual coupling between parallel lines ex-
ist, the zero-sequence calculation must be disabled to prevent an incorrect
directional determination. The sensitivity settings should be low enough to per-
mit operation during the lowest expected ground fault in terms of zero-se-
quence quantities expected during a fault, and high enough to allow for normal
load imbalance.” on page 5-13.
POTT Logic The POTT logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end over-reaches
the remote end for forward fault conditions, for details see Figure 5.29: Com-
munication-aided Scheme on page 5-58. The local end sends a permissive trip
signal to the remote end when one of the forward directional elements operates.
The scheme send signal (permissive transfer trip send) is time delayed by timer
setting TL3; the local end is required to sense a forward fault for durations
greater than TL3. The local end does not produce a scheme trip output unless
the remote has detected a forward directional fault and sends the similar per-
missive trip signal to the local end. The local end senses a permissive trip re-
ceive signal and the scheme trip closes the output contacts and removes the
fault contribution from the local end. The remote end acts in a similar fashion
and the fault contribution is removed from the remote end.
Current reversal logic guards against incorrect permissive tripping for installa-
tions with parallel lines where one end of the un-faulted line is contributing
fault current and the other end of the un-faulted line is over-reaching and send-
ing a permissive trip signal. The local reverse directional elements are used
with the permissive receive signal from the remote end to form the blocking
logic. The blocking logic is time delayed by timer setting TL1; the local end is
required to sense reverse faults while receiving the remote permissive trip for
durations greater than TL1. The blocking logic continues to block the scheme
send and scheme trip signals when the reverse fault detection or permissive trip
receive signals go low. Timer setting TD1 determines the current reversal
block extension time.
For line terminals with a weak source, fault conditions could occur on the pro-
tected line where no elements operate at the weak source. Weak infeed (WI)
logic enables the relay to protect lines where one end of the line has no source
or has a very weak source. The WI scheme can only be enabled if the user has

selected the POTT scheme otherwise it is disabled. If enabled, the WI feature

enhances the POTT tripping logic.
WI enables the POTT scheme to quickly isolate line faults where one end of
the line has a high source of impedance.
During fault conditions where no weak source elements pick up the WI logic
echoes back the permissive transfer trip signal received by the weak source. If
a permissive transfer trip is received from the remote line end, AND 110, AND
111 and OR 115 echo a POTT signal back to the remote end. The permissive
transfer trip signal is required to last for durations greater than 20 ms. A 3 ms
time delay pickup and time delay dropout timer TWD2 determine the amount
of time between permissive transfer trip receive signals that the scheme echoes
back. If the permissive transfer trip receive signal is constantly high the WI
logic only echoes back for a time equal to TWD3 plus 3ms. If the PT signal
being received resets then starts up again, after timer setting TWD2, a new per-
missive transfer trip signal echoes back.
The WI logic blocks when forward or reverse faults are detected, the logic is
also blocked for a loss of potential condition. During a reverse or a forward
fault condition, the Zone 2, Zone 4, 51N, or 50N/67 elements could pick up. If
any of these functions pick up, they block the WI scheme by putting a high in-
put into inverted input of AND 110. The blocking condition is required last for
durations greater than 6 ms. The blocking logic continues to block the scheme
send and scheme trip signals when the fault detection or loss of potential sig-
nals go low. Timer setting TWD1 determines the block extension time. TWD1
should be set to coordinate with the communication-reset time of the PT signal.
It should be set greater than the time it takes for the remote end’s Zone 2 to re-
set and for the PT channel to reset.
Timer setting TWD2 should be set to a time that prevents chattering of the
communications channel. If TWD2 is allowed to reset before the remote end
(strong source) clears the fault and stops sending the permissive transfer trip
signal the WI echoes back another block of permissive transfer trip send.
The WI logic is also used to provide local tripping if both ends of the line are
to be isolated. The line voltages provide supervision with a positive sequence
under-voltage element (27V1) and a zero sequence over-voltage element
(59V0). If a permissive transfer trip is received from the remote line end, AND
110, AND 112, OR 113 and OR 119 provide a local tripping signal.
DCB Logic The DCB logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end over-reaches
the remote end for forward fault conditions, for details see Figure 5.29: Com-
munication-aided Scheme on page 58. Typically DCB is used when the com-
munications link may be disrupted during fault conditions, for example power
line carrier.
The local end sends a block trip signal to the remote end when one of the en-
abled reverse directional elements operates. The scheme send signal (block trip
send) is time delayed by timer setting TL3, the local end is required to sense a
reverse fault for durations greater than TL3. If one of the forward directional
elements operates the blocking logic does not operate. For forward directional

fault conditions the DCB logic is time delayed by timer setting TL2. The for-
ward fault condition has to last for durations greater than TL2. The local end
does not produce a scheme trip output if the remote has detected a reverse di-
rectional fault and sends the similar block trip signal to the local end. The local
end senses a block trip receive signal and the scheme trip logic is disabled with
no intentional delay. Current reversal logic guards against incorrect local trip-
ping for installations with parallel lines where one end of the un-faulted line is
contributing fault current and the other end of the un-faulted line is reverse
reaching and sending a block trip signal. The local forward directional ele-
ments are supervised by the block receive signal from the remote end to form
the blocking logic. The blocking logic reset is time delayed by timer setting
TD2; the local end is required to receive the remote block trip for durations
greater than 0 ms. The blocking logic continues to block the scheme trip signals
when the block trip receive signal goes low. Typically the block reset timer
TD2 is set longer than the forward directional elements reset time.
PUTT Logic The PUTT logic is used for tripping schemes where the local end under-reach
the remote end for close in forward fault conditions, for details see Figure 5.29:
Communication-aided Scheme on page 58. The local end sends a permissive
trip signal to the remote end when one of the forward directional elements op-
erates (Zone 1 distance elements). The scheme send signal (permissive transfer
trip send) is time delayed by timer setting TL3, the local end is required to
sense a forward fault for durations greater than TL3. The remote end does not
produce a scheme trip output unless a forward directional fault is detected and
the local end has sent the permissive trip signal. The remote end senses a per-
missive trip receive signal and the scheme trip closes the output contacts and
removes the fault contribution from the remote end. The remote end can act
quicker for fault conditions where the Zone 2 or 3 faults would be time delayed
unless the close in fault condition was not transferred by the scheme send.
DEF Scheme Although the 51N time overcurrent element and the 50N/67F instantaneous
overcurrent element can be enabled as an option in the distance scheme (see
above), it may not be desired for some applications due to the high sensitivity
in overcurrent elements. For such applications, the DEF scheme can be used as
an option. The DEF scheme provides Zone-2 monitoring to provide an extra
security to the logic.
The DEF scheme provides the options “Permissive tripping” and “Blocking”.
One communication receiver is available for the DEF scheme. The user can set
the communications receiver to use one of 24 external inputs or one of the 24
ProLogic statements or one of the 24 Virtual Inputs.
Similar to the distance scheme, the output matrix is used to configure the
scheme send (permissive trip or block), and the scheme trip (local tripping) to
any combination of the available output contacts. The user-set dropout exten-
sion on output contacts is eliminated on any contact that is configured to oper-
ate for the scheme send signal; The user can provide the pickup and dropout
time delay for scheme send with timer settings TL6 and TD6.

Permissive Permissive scheme logic allows rapid fault clearing for sensitive earth fault
Logic conditions occurred within the protected line.
The local end sends a permissive trip signal to the remote end when the direc-
tional element of overcurrent device recognizes a forward fault, for details see
Figure 5.29: Communication-aided Scheme on page 58. The scheme send sig-
nal (permissive transfer trip send) is time delayed by timer setting TL6, the lo-
cal end is required to sense a forward fault for durations greater than TL6. The
remote end does not produce a scheme trip output unless a forward directional
ground fault is detected with 21N Zone2 pickup and the local end has sent the
permissive trip signal.
Blocking Logic The basic operation of the block logic is very similar to the DCB logic in the
distance scheme except the directionality is purely based on the overcurrent el-
ement. Typically blocking logic is used when the communications link may be
disrupted during fault conditions, for example power line carrier.
The local end sends a block trip signal to the remote end when the reverse di-
rectional element operates. The scheme send signal (block trip send) is time de-
layed by timer setting TL6, the local end is required to sense a reverse fault for
durations greater than TL6. If one of the forward directional elements operates
the blocking logic does not operate. For forward directional fault conditions
the block logic is time delayed by 50 ms. The forward fault condition has to
last for durations greater than 50ms. The local end does not produce a scheme
trip output if the remote has detected a reverse directional fault and sends the
similar block trip signal to the local end.

21P1
101
21N1
Receiver #1
102
Receiver #2 103
(+)
PUTT SCHEME
21-2
50N-67R
105
104 21-4 R
Receiver #1 0
106
Receiver #2 TD2
(If DCB shceme
is selected, Zone
TL2
4 must be set 107
reverse) 0
DCB SCHEME
6ms
108
TWD1
60 110 0
111
3ms TWD3
TWD2
20ms
0 112
27 V1
113
59 V0
Weak Infeed
WEAK INFEED LOGIC Enable Switch
Receiver #1
120
Receiver #2
(+)
51N Alarm 115

117
TL1
116 DCB DCB
TD1
50N-67F 119 PUTT PUTT
114 21-2 118
21P2 POTT BASIC POTT BASIC
21P3
21N2
21N3
Zone 2/
Zone 3 TL3
Starter Selection Distance Scheme Send
TD3
TL3, TD3 range: 0-1s

Distance Scheme Trip
Distance Scheme Selector

POTT SCHEME
3I0 > Pickup TCS

121
Forward 0 Router #3 PERMISSIVE
Non-directional (Minimum time delay of 0.005 seconds
is 0.000 seconds when set for non-directional)
(+)
BLOCK DISABLED
50ms
3I0 > Pickup TCB
Reverse 122
0
0
DEF Scheme Trip

PERMISSIVE
BLOCK DISABLED
21N4 TL6
21P4 DEF Scheme Send
21N2 TD6
21P2 DEF
SCHEME SELECTOR TL6, TD6
21N1
21P1 range 0.1s
Figure 5.29: Communication-aided Scheme

5.3 Recording Functions

Introduction The relay has high speed fault recording and logging functions to allow the
user to analyze faults and to review the operation of the overall protection
scheme. Slow speed swing recording can be used to analyze system stability.
If the relay has reached its recording capacity, new records overwrite the oldest
records.
Fault Recording The relay provides DFR-quality fault recording, capturing input signal wave-
forms and external input states at a rate of 128 samples per cycle. Each record
also contains the timing of the internal logic produced by the relay (e.g. Device
51 trip). Obtain this information by uploading the records from the relay via
the Relay Control Panel file transfer process and view them with RecordBase
View software.
The quantities recorded are:
• 16 analog channels (6 voltages and 10 currents) @ 128 samples/cycle
which captures up to the 33rd harmonic
• External inputs @ 1 ms resolution
• Protection element output signals @ 8 samples/cycle
• ProLogic signals @ 8 samples/cycle
• Active setting group
The recorded protection element output signals includes Phase segregated Start
and Trip signals of the Distance trip, Backup Overcurrent, Back up Earth Fault,
Overvoltage, Undervoltage and CB Fail Protection.
Parameters that are user-selectable with respect to recording transients:
• Record length (0.2 to 10.0 seconds => 12 to 600 cycles @ 60 Hz Base) with
automatic extension to capture successive triggers
• Recorder triggering by any internal logic or external input signal (e.g. 52 A)
• Pre trigger time configurable between 0.10 to 2.00 seconds

Swing The relay records dynamic system responses allowing the user to analyze sys-
Recording tem stability and to provide a larger context for fault analysis. Swing records
contain positive sequence phasor measurements and system frequency calcu-
lated at a rate of 1 phasor per cycle. Swing records can extend to 2 minutes in
duration.
The quantities recorded are:
• Positive sequence impedance (magnitude)
• Positive sequence voltage (magnitude)
• Positive sequence current (magnitude)
• 3-Phase Reactive Power (Vars)
• 3-Phase Real Power (Watts)
Event The event recording provides permanent storage for the event log. The user can
Recording create an event record automatically or manually. When the event auto save is
enabled, an event record is created approximately every 250 events.
The user can initiate an event recording manually through the Relay Control
Panel.
Record Recording can be initiated automatically by the relay when a fault or abnormal
Initiation condition is detected. Set the relay to initiate a fault record on activation of any
of its trip or alarm functions or on assertion of any external digital inputs.
The assignment of fault record initiation to the various relay functions is done
through the relay’s Output Matrix settings (see “Recording Trigger” on page 5-
65).
A recording can also be initiated manually through the Relay Control Panel.
The commands Trigger Fault, Trigger Swing and Trigger Event are available
under the following path:
Relay Control Panel > Records
Also the relay display provides the option to initiate Fault Recording, under the
following path:
Main Menu > Records > Fault Recording
A swing record can take a couple of minutes to produce due to the

long post-trigger time.

Record The length of each record is determined by the Record Length setting. Fault
Duration and (transient) record lengths can be set between 0.2 and 10.0 seconds; Swing re-
cord lengths can be set between 60 and 120 seconds. Pre-trigger times are con-
Extension figurable between 0.10 to 2.00 seconds for Fault records and fixed at 30
seconds for Swing records and are included as part of the normal record length.
The relay automatically extends a record as required to capture consecutive
triggers that are close together. If a trigger occurs while a recording is in prog-
ress, the record is extended to include the full post-trigger time of subsequent
triggers, up to a maximum length —12.0 seconds for Fault records; 180 sec-
onds for Swing records. If a trigger occurs before the end of a record caused by
a previous trigger, but too late to allow sufficient post-trigger time in a maxi-
mum extended record, a new overlapping record is created.
The normal record length settings are accessible under the Record Length
heading of the relay settings, and can be set with the Offliner Settings software.
Record Storage The relay compresses records on the fly, achieving a typical lossless compres-
sion rate of 4:1. As a result, the relay can store up to 150 Fault records, or up
to 150 Swing records, or a combination of 150 Fault, Swing and optionally
Event records. If the storage is full, new records automatically overwrite the
oldest, ensuring that the recording function is always available.
The record length and the number of events stored within the records may re-
duce how many records can be stored on the relay. The record storage capacity
may be reduced to 80 fault records if the record duration is set to 10 seconds.
Record A listing of stored records is available through the Relay Control Panel under
Retrieval and the Records > List menu. The listing transfers records to a connected PC and
deletes them from storage.
Deletion

5.4 Event Log

The relay maintains a log of events in a 250 entry circular log. Each entry con-
tains the time of the event plus an event description.
Logged events include trips, alarms, external input assertions plus internal
events such as setting changes. Phase information is included in event messag-
es where appropriate. For example, the event log entry for a device trip might
be:
2010 Nov 21, 15:34:19.832: 51 on ABC Trip
The event log can be viewed in 2 ways:
Table 5.29: Event Log
Front Panel The front panel display shows events in abbreviated form (Trip
and Alarm events only).
Relay Control Panel The full event log is available through the Main Menu->Events of
the Relay Control Panel
SCADA The protocols included in the relay allow all the SCADA master
access to the event data from the relay (Trip and Alarm events
only).
This display is a snapshot of the event list which must be manually

refreshed to display new events that occur while the display is up.
There is a list of Event Messages, for details see “Event Messages”

in Appendix D.
Event Log Filter The relay event log contains a 100ms pickup filter to ensure that duplicate
events are not stored for the same protection function. When a protection func-
tion operates, only the first operation will be logged in the event log. If the pro-
tection function re-occurs within 100ms, it will be ignored by the event log.

5.5 Fault Log

The L-PRO stores a log of faults in a 100 entry circular log. Each entry contains
the time of the fault, fault type, faulted phase, fault quantities as per the below
table. Fault log will be triggered only for trip condition and it won’t log for an
alarm condition.
Table 5.30: Fault Log
Fault Type Fault Quantities
21P Phase Distance - Fault Location

- Fault Impedance Magnitude and Angle
- Main VA/VB/VC Phasors
- “Line” IA/IB/IC Phasors
- Frequency
21N Ground Distance - Fault Location

- Fault Impedance Magnitude and Angle
- Main Voltage Zero Sequence Phasor (3V0)
- “Line” Current Zero Sequence Phasor (3I0)
- Frequency
Distance Scheme Trip (POTT, - Fault Location

PUTT, DCB) - Fault Impedance Magnitude and Angle
- Main Voltage Zero Sequence Phasor (3V0)
- “Line” Current Zero Sequence Phasor (3I0)
- Frequency
59 Main Over voltage - Main VA/VB/VC Phasors

27 Main Under voltage
59 Aux Over voltage - Aux VA/VB/VC Phasors

27 Aux Under voltage
50LS Main - I1A/I1B/I1C Phasors
50LS Aux - I2A/I2B/I2C Phasors
50-67 Trip - “Line” IA/IB/IC Phasors

51-67 Trip
50N-67 Trip - “Line” Current Zero Sequence Phasor (3I0)

51N-67 Trip
50G-67 Trip 51G-67 Trip - “Line” Current Measured Zero Sequence Phasor
46-50/67 Trip - “Line” Current Negative Sequence Phasor (3I2)

46-51/67 Trip
The fault log can be viewed in three ways:

• Relay Front HMI
• Relay Control Panel interface is in the Faults tab
• 61850 SCADA protocol included in the L-PRO allow the SCADA client
access to Trip event data.

5.6 Output Matrix

The Output Matrix is a powerful, easy-to-use, single-screen tool that allows for
the assignment of protection and control functions (referred to as “devices” in
this section) to output contacts, recording triggers and target LEDs. The Output
Matrix also provides the initiation settings for the Single Pole Tripping, Break-
er Failure and the 79 Recloser functions.
The Output Matrix contains seven setting sections which will be described in
detail:
• “Device Output Contacts” on page 5-65
• “Recording Trigger” on page 5-65
• “Target LED” on page 5-66
• “Blocking & Initiation” on page 5-66
• “Pole Tripping” on page 5-67
• “94 Tripping” on page 5-68
• “Phase Indication Tripping” on page 5-70
• “External Blocking” on page 5-70
Figure 5.30: Output Matrix

Device Output The Device Output Contact section of the Output Matrix allows for easy as-
Contacts signment of output contacts to devices. The same output contact may be as-
signed to multiple devices.
The assigned output contact will operate when the associated device transitions
to a High state. Each Output Contact can be configured as Self Reset, Latched
or Pulse reset type. For more details see “Output Contacts” on page 7-11.
Figure 5.31: Device Output Contact assignment
Recording The Recording Trigger section of the Output Matrix allows for devices to be
Trigger assigned to initiate Fault and/or Swing recordings. When the assigned device
transitions to a High state, the recording is immediately initiated. See “Record-
ing Functions” on page 5-59 for more details on the recording functions.
Figure 5.32: Recording Trigger assignment

Target LED The Target LED section of the Output Matrix allows for the front-panel Target
LEDs to be assigned to devices via the use of a drop-down box for each device.
The LEDs may be set to operate with or without “Target Latching” enabled
(see “Target LED Reset Type” on page 4-12).
Note: The “Target LED” function enables both the front panel LEDs
and the event pop-up message on the front panel LCD screen. If no
LED is assigned to the protection device, then there will be no target
event pop-up messages displayed on the LCD screen for that device.
Figure 5.33: Target LED assignment
Blocking & The Blocking & Initiation section of the Output Matrix is used to assign devic-
Initiation es to block and initiate the Recloser and Breaker Failure functions.
The 79I (initiate) and 79B (block) columns are used to assign devices to either
initiate a 3-Phase 79 Recloser sequence or to block the 1/3 Phase 79 Recloser
from operating. Monitor the Logic 4 metering screen to directly view the status
of the 79 initiate and 79 block. For more details on the 79 Recloser function,
see “79 Recloser” on page 5-25.
The BFI column is used to assign protection functions to initiate the 50BF
function. For more details on the 50BF function, see “50BF Breaker Failure”
on page 5-39.
Figure 5.34: Blocking and Initiation assignment

Pole Tripping The “Poles” setting in the Output Matrix is used in conjunction with the 79 Re-
closer and 94 Tripping functions for single or three-phase Pole tripping. The
Pole tripping operation directly follows the operation of the 94 tripping func-
tion. When a 94 1-Ph trip occurs, the corresponding Pole output contact oper-
ations. When a 94 3-Ph trip occurs, all three Pole output contacts operate. See
the table in Figure 5.36: 94 Tripping Logic on page 5-68 for a list of functions
that support Single Pole Tripping (SPT).
If pole tripping is enabled for a particular output contact, that output contact
may not be assigned to any other function. For example, you may not assign
both Pole A Trip and 21N1 Trip to output contact 2, as shown in Figure 5.35:
Pole Tripping assignment.
Figure 5.35: Pole Tripping assignment

94 Tripping The Output Matrix provides the ability to assign devices to trip a 94 Tripping
function which is used to initiate single pole tripping and as the internal initia-
tion for the 79 1-Ph Recloser. Any device may be assigned to the 94 1-Ph or
the 94 3-Ph outputs, however, only the devices listed in the table below are ca-
pable of initiating a 94 1-Ph trip. All other devices (those not listed in the table)
will cause a 3-Ph trip. The 94 Tripping function follows the logic shown in Fig-
ure 5.36: 94 Tripping Logic, and acts as an internal initiator for the 79-1Ph Re-
closer as shown in Figure 5.37: 79 1-Ph Recloser Initiation.
The 94 tripping outputs are not directly displayed in the event log, metering or
targets, but they can be monitored by assigning the 94 phase-wise outputs to
ProLogic functions. The Pole A/B/C trips are available in shown event log.
Single P hase
Trip
F unction Operation A P ha se Trip

(Ouput Ma trix)
94 A Phase
Single P hase Ca pable
94 -1 Ph B P hase Trip
(Ouput Matrix)
94 B Phase
C P hase Trip
94-3 P h 94 C Phase
(Output Ma trix)
F orce Thre e P hase Trip

(1 P h/ 3 P h P rotection Scheme)
Allow Single Phase Operation
Function SPT & R
T hree P hase
Trip 50 ........................................
51 ........................................
50N .....................................
51N .....................................
50LS Main ...........................
50LS Aux .............................
21 N-1,2,3,4,5 ....................
50G, 51G ....................
Distance and DEF Scheme
All other functions ......
Figure 5.36: 94 Tripping Logic

P rotectio n Mo de = 1
P rotectio n Mo de = 1/3
Single Phase Trip -

Internal Initiation
(94 Tripping)
CB AR External
Initiation Pole A
CB AR External
Initiation Pole B
CB AR External
Initiation Pole C
50 I1a (4% Ino minal R MS fixe d)

A P ha se Trip
Main Breaker Pole Dead/Live Detection = Phase Current 0
TDI
79-1 Ph Initiated
50 I1b (4% Ino minal R MS fixe d)

B P hase Trip 0
Main Breaker Pole Dead/Live Detection = Phase Current TD
50 I1c (4% Ino minal R MS fixe d) 52a M ain

C P hase Trip
Main Breaker Pole Dead/Live Detection = Phase Current
52a Aux
50 I2a (4% Ino minal R MS fixe d)

A P ha se Trip
Aux Breaker Pole Dead/Live Detection = Phase Current
50 I2b (4% Ino minal R MS fixe d)

B P hase Trip
50 I2c (4% I no minal R MS fixe d)

C Phase Trip
Main Breaker Pole A
Main Breaker Pole Dead/Live Detection = CB Status
Main Breaker Pole B
Aux Breaker Pole Dead/Live Detection = CB Status
Main Breaker Pole C
Aux Breaker Pole A
Aux Breaker Pole B
Aux Breaker Pole C
Figure 5.37: 79 1-Ph Recloser Initiation
The assignment for the 94 Tripping function is performed in the “94” column
of the Output Matrix. Directly assign a device to either the 94 1-Ph or 94 3-Ph
as shown in the Figure 5.38: 94 Tripping assignment on page 5-69.
Figure 5.38: 94 Tripping assignment

Phase The Phase Indication Tripping function is used to provide phase indication for
Indication protection function operation via the output contacts and target LEDs. The user
may assign any output contact or LED to Phase A, Phase B, Phase C or
Tripping Ground. When a trip occurs for a supported protection function (see Table
5.31: Supported Phase Indication Tripping Functions), the assigned Phase out-
put contact and LED will operate.
Table 5.31: Supported Phase Indication Tripping Functions
Protection Function Phase Indications Available
21P1 Trip, 21P2 Trip, 21P3 Trip, 21P4 Trip, 21P5 Trip A, B, C, G
21N1 Trip, 21N2 Trip, 21N3 Trip, 21N4 Trip, 21N5 Trip A, B, C, G
50 Trip, 51 Trip A, B, C
50N Trip, 51N Trip A, B, C, G
50BF Main-1 Trip, 50BF Main-2 Trip, A, B, C
27 Main Trip, 27 Aux Trip, 59-1 Main Trip, 59-2 Main Trip, A, B, C
Distance Scheme Trip A, B, C, G
For any supported protection device, the user may assign both normal device
output contacts and phase indication output contacts. If the relay is configured
as shown in Figure 5.39: Phase Indication Tripping assignment, when a 21P1
AB Trip occurs:
• Phase A Output Contact 13 and Phase B Output Contact 14 will operate
• Phase A Target LED 14 and Phase B Target LED 15 will turn on
• 21P1 Trip Output Contact 2 will operate and Target LED 1 will turn on
Figure 5.39: Phase Indication Tripping assignment
External The External Blocking column of the Output Matrix provides the ability to
Blocking block the respective protection function operation completely (no event log,
LED indication, SCADA reporting etc.). Any External Input, ProLogic or Vir-
tual Input can be used to block protection functions.
Figure 5.40: External Blocking

6 Data Communications
Section 5 deals with data communications with the relay. First, the SCADA
protocol is discussed, and it is then followed by the IEC 61850 communication
standard.
The SCADA protocol deals with the Modbus and DNP (Distributed Network
Protocol) protocols. The SCADA configuration and its settings are described.
The parameters for SCADA communications are defined using L-PRO 4500
Offliner software. Finally, details on how to monitor SCADA communications
for maintenance and troubleshooting of the relay are given.
6.1 SCADA Protocol

Modbus The relay supports either a Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII SCADA connec-
Protocol tion. Modbus is available exclusively via a direct serial link. Serial Modbus
communications can be utilized exclusively via the serial port (Port 52), an RS-
485 terminal block port located on the back of the relay. An external RS-485
to RS-232 converter can be used to connect the relay to an RS-232 network.
For details on connecting to serial Port, see “Communicating with the Relay
Intelligent Electronic Device (IED)” on page 3-4, “Accessing the Relay’s
SCADA Services” on page 3-12 and “Communication Port Details” on page 3-
13.
The data points available for Modbus SCADA interface are fixed and are not
selectable by the user. Complete details regarding the Modbus protocol emu-
lation and data point lists can be found in “Modbus RTU Communication Pro-
tocol” in Appendix E.
DNP Protocol The relay supports a DNP3 (Level 2) SCADA connection. DNP3 is available
via a direct serial link or an Ethernet LAN connection using either TCP or
UDP.
Serial DNP communications can be utilized exclusively via the serial port (Port
52), an RS-485 terminal block port located on the back of the relay. An external
RS-485 to RS-232 converter can be used to connect the relay to an RS-232 net-
work. For details on connecting to serial port, see “Communicating with the
Relay Intelligent Electronic Device (IED)” on page 3-4, “Accessing the Re-
lay’s SCADA Services” on page 3-12 and “Communication Port Details” on
page 3-13.
Network DNP communications can be utilized via the network port. The net-
work port is available as an RJ-45 or ST fiber optic port on the rear of the relay.
DNP communications can be used with multiple masters when it is utilized
with TCP. For details on connecting to the Ethernet LAN, see “Network Link”
on page 3-6.

The data points available for DNP SCADA interface are user configurable.
Complete details regarding the DNP3 protocol emulation and data point lists
can be found in “DNP3 Device Profile” in Appendix F
SCADA The parameters for SCADA communications may be defined using L-PRO
Configuration 4500 Offliner.
and Settings If DNP3 LAN/WAN communications were chosen, the relay’s network pa-
rameters need to be defined. This is done via the Maintenance interface. Note
that this effort may already have been completed as part of the steps taken to
establish a network maintenance connection to the relay.
1. Establish a TUI session with the relay and login as maintenance. The fol-
lowing screen appears.
Figure 6.1: L-PRO 4500 System Utility

2. Select the first option by entering the number 1 followed by Enter. The fol-
Figure 6.2: Change the network parameters as needed for the particular application

Offliner SCADA Details on using the Offliner software are available in “L-PRO Offliner Setting
Configuration Software” on page 7-2. Details on downloading a completed settings file to the
relay are available in “Sending a Setting File to the Relay” on page 7-6.
Open the Offliner application according to the instructions found in the indi-
cated section and highlight the SCADA Communication selection. The screen
appears as follows.
Figure 6.3: SCADA Communications
The configuration of SCADA communication parameters via the Offliner ap-

plication is very intuitive. Several settings options are progressively visible and
available depending on other selections. As noted before, there is no field to
configure the number of data and stop bits. These values are fixed as follows:
• Modbus Serial – 7 data bits, 1 stop bit
• DNP Serial – 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
Monitoring The ability to monitor SCADA communications directly can be a valuable

SCADA commissioning and troubleshooting tool. It assists in resolving SCADA com-
Communications munication difficulties such as incompatible baud rate or addressing. The util-
ity is accessed through the Maintenance user interface.
1. Establish a TUI session with the relay and login as maintenance.

2. Select option 9 by entering the number 9 followed by Enter. The following

screen appears.
Figure 6.4: Select option 9 – Monitor SCADA
3. Pressing the Enter key results in all SCADA communications characters to

be displayed as hexadecimal characters.
Figure 6.5: SCADA monitoring with Modbus Protocol
4. Press Ctrl-C to end the monitor session.

6.2 IEC 61850 Communication

The L-PRO 4500 is an IEC 61850 enabled device. For details on the IEC 61850
implementation on the L-PRO 4500, refer to “IEC 61850 Implementation
Overview” on page 8-1. Also, refer to Appendix N for the relevant confor-
mance statements and data mapping specification.
Enabling The IEC61850 port must be enabled in order to use the IEC61850 communi-
IEC61850 cation protocol on the IED. The IEC61850 port is enabled or disabled using the
relay’s Maintenance menu. See “Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay’s
Communication Maintenance Menu” on page 3-7 for more details on the use of the Mainte-
nance Menu.
To enable the IEC61850 port:
1. Establish a TUI session with the relay and login as maintenance. The fol-
Figure 6.6: Maintenance Interface
2. Select the first option by entering the number 1 followed by <Enter>. The
following screen appears. Follow the prompts to enable the IEC61850 port
as shown in Figure 6.7:
Figure 6.7: Change the network parameters as needed for the particular application

Note that unit’s IP address can be used on the IEC61850 client side for unique
unit identification instead of a physical device “PD Name”. The publisher con-
figuration is defined in the ICD file and available for reading to any IEC61850
client. IEC61850 configuration is configured using the ERL 61850 Configura-
tor Tool software. Subscriber functionality is fixed and supported for the Vir-
tual Inputs only.

7 Settings and Analysis Software
Introduction This section describes the supporting software used to set the relay parameters
and to analyze records. There are three main software tools used for these pur-
poses: L-PRO Offliner Setting Software, RecordGraph and ERL 61850 IED
Configurator. The L-PRO Offliner software will be described at length, while
the RecordGraph and ERL 61850 IED Configurator tools will be briefly intro-
duced.
L-PRO Offliner is used to configure all of the protection and system parameter
variables on the IED. Setting files are created locally on a personal computer
with the Offliner software and then are sent to the IED through Relay Control
Panel (see “Relay Control Panel” on page 4-16) via a communication link (see
“Communicating with the Relay Intelligent Electronic Device (IED)” on
page 3-4).
RecordGraph is a powerful record analysis tool used to analyze both high-
speed Fault Recordings and low-speed Swing Recordings. RecordGraph pro-
vides many useful tools including fault impedance plotting and harmonic anal-
ysis.
The ERL 61850 IED Configurator is used to configure ERLPhase IEC 61850
based devices for substation automation. This tool helps the user to map data
from remote GOOSE into ERLPhase IED data, to perform GOOSE mapping
from ERLPhase IEDs to other devices and to map the required RCB (Report
Control Block) datasets for SCADA.

7.1 L-PRO Offliner Setting Software

Introduction L-PRO Offliner is used to configure all of the protection and system parameter
variables on the IED. The following section provides a full breakdown of the
user interface and all of the features available within the software.
More detailed information about relay settings and protection functions are
provided in Chapter 5.
Figure 7.1: L-PRO Offliner Software

Toolbar and The Offliner software includes the following menu and system tool bar.
Menu Structure
Help - Help Topics
About L-PRO Settings
New Save Copy Copy Show/Hide

Undo
Setting Left-Hand
Open Cut Paste Copy Group Side Menu
Graph About
Print
Figure 7.2: Top Tool Bar
Table 7.1: Windows Menu
Windows Menu Sub Menu Comment
File Menu New Opens up a default setting file of the

most recent setting version
Open Open an existing setting file
Close Closes the active Offliner setting docu-

ment
Save Saves the active setting file
Save As Saves the active setting file with a new

name or location
Convert to Newer Convert an older setting version to a

newer version.
Print Prints graphs or setting summary

depending on active screen
Print Preview Provides a print preview of the setting

summary
Print Setup Changes printers or print options
1-8 The eight most recently accessed set-

ting files
Exit Quits the program

Table 7.1: Windows Menu
Edit Menu Undo Undo last action
Cut Cut the selection
Copy Copy the selection
Paste Insert clipboard contents
Copy Graph Copy the graph for the active screen to

the clipboard
Copy Setting Group Copy values from one Setting Group to

another
Window Cascade Cascades all open windows
Tile Tiles all open windows
Hide/Show Tree If this option is checked then the LHS

Tree view will be hidden
1-9, More Windows Allows access to all open Offliner set-

ting files. The active document will
have a check beside it
Help User Manual Displays the user manual
About Offliner Displays the Offliner version
Toolbar
New Create a new document. Create a new document of the most

recent setting version
Open Open an existing document. Open an existing document
Save Save the active document. Save the active document
Cut Cut the selection. Cut selection
Copy Copy the selection. Copy the selection
Paste Insert clipboard contents. Insert clipboard contents
Undo Copy graph to clipboard. Undo last action
Copy Graph Copy the graph for the active screen to

the clipboard
Copy Setting Copy values from one Setting Brings up the Copy Inputs dialog box
Group Group to another.
Show/Hide LHS If this option is checked then the LHS

Tree Tree view will be hidden
Print Print active document. Prints Graphs or the setting summary,

depending on which seen is selected
About Display program information. Displays the Offliner version

Offliner The following table lists the keyboard shortcuts that Offliner provides.
Keyboard
Shortcuts Table 7.2: Keyboard Shortcuts
Ctrl+N Opens up a default setting file of the most recent setting version
Ctrl+O Open an existing setting file
Ctrl+S Saves the active setting file
Ctrl+Z Undo
Ctrl+X Cut
Ctrl+C Copy
Ctrl+V Paste
Ctrl+F4 Closes the active Offliner setting document
Ctrl+F6 Switches to the next open Offliner setting file, if more than one setting file is being
edited
F6 Toggles between the LHS Tree view and HRS screen
F10, Alt Enables menu keyboard short-cuts
F1 Displays the user manual
Graphing Grid On/Grid Off

Protection The graph can be viewed with the grid on or off by clicking the Grid On or Grid
Functions Off button. A right-click on the trace of the curve gives the user the x and y
coordinates.
Refresh
This button will manually refresh the graph if it has been zoomed.
Print Graph
To print a particular graph, click the Print Graph button.
Zoom on Graphs
Graphs can be zoomed to bring portions of the traces into clearer display. Left-
click on any graph and drag to form a small box around the graph area. When
the user releases the mouse, the trace assumes a new zoom position determined
by the area of the zoom coordinates.
To undo the zoom on the graph, click the Refresh button.
Displaying Co-ordinates
At any time the user may right-click on the graph to display the co-ordinates of
the point the user selected.

Sending a Loading setting files to the IED is performed on the Configurations screen in
Setting File to Relay Control Panel. To send a setting file to the relay, select a setting file from
the Saved Settings list and then press the Load to Relay button (shown in Figure
the Relay 7.3:). Make sure the settings version and the serial number of the relay in the
setting file match. The relay will reject the setting file if either the serial num-
ber or the settings version do not match.
A “serial number discrepancy” message may appear. This is to en-

sure that the user is aware of the exact relay in which settings are
to be loaded. If this happens, check the relay serial number on the
Utilities > Unit Identification. Type this serial number into the L-PRO
Serial No. box in the Identification tab display area of Offliner Set-
tings. Alternately the user may check the Ignore Serial Number
check box to bypass serial number supervision.
Figure 7.3: RCP Configuration screen

Tree View - The following sections describe the tree view, which provide access to the var-
Introduction ious setting screens. This section will not describe individual settings, but will
provide a general description of where to find the individual settings. For a de-
tailed description of the individual settings see Chapter 5.
Figure 7.4: LHS Tree View Menu
In the LHS Menu Tree there are a series of menu headings that may have sub
menus associated with them. Clicking on an item in the left hand side tree view
will display its corresponding menu in the RHS view. Similarly, the user can
use the arrow keys to scroll through the menu tree.

Identification The Identification screen provides information related to the specific IED’s
hardware, software and installation location. The items on the identification
screen are described in Table 6.3below.
Table 7.3: Relay Identification
Identification
Settings Version Indicates the settings version number, fixed.
Ignore Serial Number Bypass serial number check, if enabled.
Serial Number Available at back of each relay.
Unit ID User-defined up to 20 characters.
Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz or 50 Hz
Analog Input 10CT, 6PT or 5CT, 4PT
Digital I/O 24 Digital Inputs and 32 Digital Outputs,

16 Digital Inputs and 24 Digital Outputs,
16 Digital Inputs and 16 Digital Outputs,
8 Digital Inputs and 8 Digital Outputs
Comments User-defined up to 78 characters.
Setting Software
Setting Name User-defined up to 20 characters.
Date Created/Modified Indicates the last time settings were entered.
Station
Station Name User-defined up to 20 characters.
Station Number User-defined up to 20 characters.
Location User-defined up to 20 characters.
Line User-defined up to 20 characters.
The serial number of the relay must match the one in the setting file,
or the setting will be rejected by the relay. This feature ensures that
the correct setting file is applied to the right relay.
Choose to ignore the serial number enforcement in the identification

screen by checking the Ignore Serial Number check box. The relay
only checks for proper relay type and setting version if the ignore se-
rial number has been chosen.

Analog Inputs
Figure 7.5: Analog Inputs
Analog Input Names screen identifies all the ac voltage and current inputs to
the relay. These names appear in any fault disturbance records the relay pro-
duces.
Table 7.4: Analog Inputs
Input Channels
Main Voltage VIA, V1B, V1C
Main Current I1A, I1B, I1C, I1G
Auxiliary Voltage V2A, V2B, V2C

(3 Phase for 10CT/6PT, 1 Phase for 5CT/
4PT hardware configuration)
Auxiliary Current I2A, I2B, I2C, I2G

(Available only for the 10CT/6PT hardware
configuration)
Mutual (Zero Seq.) Current 3I01, 3I02

(3I02 is only available on the 10CT/6PT
hardware configuration)

External Inputs
Figure 7.6: External Inputs
External Input Names screen allows the user to define meaningful names for
up to 24 external digital inputs (varies depending on the hardware configura-
tion). Meaningful names may include terms such as T.T. (Transfer Trip) and
P.T. (Permissive Trip).
Table 7.5: External Input Names
1 to 24 (may vary depending User-defined

on hardware configuration)

Output Contacts
Figure 7.7: Output Contacts
The Output Contacts screen allows for configuration of each Output Contact’s
name and reset type. It also allows for configuration of a global Output Contact
Reset input which is used to externally reset all latched Output Contacts.
Each Output Contact may be given a unique user-configurable Name.
If the Output Contact is set to the Self Reset type, it will close for the duration
that the associated function is High, plus the duration of the configured Timer.
If the Output Contact is set to the Pulsed type, it will close when the associated
function goes High and will remain closed only for the duration of the config-
ured Timer, regardless of how long the associated function is High.
If the Output Contact is set to the Latched type it will close when the associated
function goes High and will remain closed until the user manually resets it. A
latched Output Contact can be reset either by the Front Panel (see “Output
Contact Reset” on page 4-14), Relay Control Panel’s Utilites>Outputs Output
Contact clear function or by the Output Contact Reset setting (shown in Figure
7.7).
Figure 7.8 shows a timing diagram of the different Output Contact Reset types.

HIGH
21P1 Trip
LOW
OC2 CLOSED
(Self Reset) OPEN
OC3 CLOSED
(Latched) OPEN
OC3 CLOSED
(Pulsed) OPEN
Timer Timer User-Initiated/

External Reset
Figure 7.8: Output Contact Reset Types example
Table 7.6: Output Contacts
Outputs 1 to 32 (may vary User-defined name

depending on hardware con-
figuration)
Type Self Reset, Latched, Pulsed
Dropout Timer (only used for 0.00 to 20.00 s

Self Reset and Pulsed Type)
Output Contact Reset
Reset Select any EI, VI, SPC 1-6 or PL to be used for resetting
Latched Output Contacts.

Control Commands
Each control command can be configured with a user-defined name. There are
12 Single-Point Control commands provided. See “Control Commands” on
page 8-4 for more details.
Figure 7.9: Control Command name configuration
Virtual Inputs
Figure 7.10: Virtual Inputs
Table 7.7: Virtual Inputs
Virtual Inputs 1 to 30 User-defined

The relay can control its internal functions and connected devices both
locally and remotely. Thirty general purpose logic points are accessible
via DNP3, IEC 61850 and RCP. The 30 virtual inputs are individually
controlled and include a set, reset and pulse function. The latch state is
retained during setting changes and relay power down conditions. The
30 virtual inputs conform to DNP3 standards. Use the DNP3 functions
such as SBO (select before operate), Direct Operate, or Direct Operate
with no acknowledge to control virtual inputs.
Use virtual inputs to:
• control circuit breakers
• enable or disable reclosing
• enable or disable under-frequency load shedding
• change setting groups
• provide interlocking between local/remote supervisory control

Target Reset
The Target Reset screen is used for configuration of each LED Reset Type and
an external Target Reset input. For more details see “Target LED Reset Type”
on page 4-12.
Figure 7.11: Target Reset
Table 7.8: Target Reset Settings
Target Reset Type Self Reset, Latched

(LED 1 to 17)
Target Reset
Reset Any EI, VI, SPC 1-6 or PL

Setting Groups
Figure 7.12: Setting Groups
Table 7.9: Setting Groups
Setting Groups 1 to 8 User-defined

System
Parameters
Figure 7.13: System Parameters
Table 7.10: System Parameters
System Parameters
Base MVA 1.00 to 2000.00 MVA (Primary)
Phase Rotation ABC or ACB
Fault Location Display Enable/Disable
Aux Voltage Input 3-phase, A-Phase, B-Phase or C-Phase
Fault Location Initiated by 21 Alarm Enable/Disable
Line
Line to Line Voltage 1.00 to 2000.00 kV (Primary)
Distance Units km or miles
CT Turns Ratio
Ring Bus / One and Half Breaker Enable/Disable

Configuration (Aux. CT Line Input)
Main Phase CT Primary 1.00 to 30000.00
Auxiliary Phase CT Primary 1.00 to 30000.00
Main Neutral CT Primary 1.00 to 30000.00
Auxiliary Neutral CT Primary 1.00 to 30000.00
3I0 Input #1 CT Primary 1.00 to 30000.00
3I0 Input #2 CT Primary 1.00 to 30000.00
CT Secondary 1A/5A

Table 7.10: System Parameters
CT Turns Ratio Calculated quantity.

CT Turns Ratio = CT Primary/CT Secondary
PT Turns Ratio
CCVT Transient Compensation on All 21 Enable/Disable

Devices
PT Primary Same setting as Line to Line Voltage setting
Main PT Secondary 100.00 to 150.00 (V, Ph-Ph)
Auxiliary PT Secondary 100.00 to 150.00 (V, Ph-Ph)
PT Turns Ratio Calculated quantity.

PT Turns Ratio = PT Primary/PT Secondary
Base MVA
The base MVA is used for recording purposes.
CT Turns Ratio and PT Turns Ratio

The CT and PT ratios are specified for the monitoring of analog inputs. All CT
and PT ratios are specified with a ratio relative to one. L-PRO Offliner pro-
vides means to select the CT Primary and CT Secondary values, and from these
values the CT Ratio is determined. Likewise, the PT Primary and PT secondary
are both configurable and the PT Ratio is determined from these two settings.
The line protection uses the main current and the main voltage to operate.
When 2 sets of CTs (main and auxiliary) are used as line current input (e.g. ring
bus application), the user must enable ring bus configuration to configure the
relay. If enabled, the currents from the two sets of CTs are added to the relay
to form the line current. For cases where voltage for line protection is obtained
from bus PTs, the bus PTs are connected to the main voltage inputs.
Auxiliary Voltage Input

For the 10CT/6PT hardware variant, if a single-phase source is used, it should
be connected to the corresponding phase designation on the relay input. Exam-
ple: If only a B phase bus PT is available, it should be connected to the relay
input B phase terminals. All unused single-phase inputs must be grounded for
proper operation.

SCADA
Communication
Figure 7.14: SCADA Communication
The relay has configurable SCADA communication parameters for both Serial
and Ethernet (TCP and UDP). For DNP3 Level 2 (TCP) up to 3 independent
Masters are supported.
DNP Point Map

Configuration
Figure 7.15: Point Map

The relay has configurable DNP point mapping. On the Point Map screen, any
of the configurable points may be added or removed from the Point List by
clicking (or using the cursor keys and space bar on the keyboard) on the asso-
ciated check box. A green 'X' denotes that the item will be mapped to the Point
List.
The list contains separate sections for Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs, and An-
alog Inputs. The list is scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand
side.
Class Data
Figure 7.16: Class Data
Class data for each DNP point can be assigned on the Class Data screen. Only
Points which were mapped in the Point Map screen will appear here. Sections
for Binary Inputs and Analog Inputs appear here; Binary Outputs cannot be as-
signed a Class. The list is scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand
side.
In addition to assigning a Change Event Class to each mapped point, most An-
alog Inputs can also be assigned a Deadband and Scaling factor.

SCADA
Settings
Summary
Figure 7.17: SCADA Settings Summary
This screen provides a summary of the current SCADA settings as set in the
working setting file. This includes SCADA Communication parameters and (if
the SCADA mode is set to DNP) Binary Input, Binary Output, and Analog In-
put information including Deadband and Scaling factors.
This SCADA Summary screen is scrollable and can be printed.
Record Length
Figure 7.18: Record Length

Table 7.11: Record Length
Fault
Fault Record Length 0.2 to 10.0 seconds
Prefault Time 0.10 to 2.00 seconds
Swing
Swing Record Length 60 to 120 seconds
Event Auto Save Enable/Disable
The relay has recording and logging functions to analyze faults and dynamic
swing, and to review the operation of the overall protection scheme.
This screen displays the record length for each of the two types of recordings
provided: fault and swing. Pre-trigger times are configurable between 0.10 to
2.00 seconds for fault records and fixed at 30 seconds for swing records and
are included as part of the record length.
Setting Groups
Figure 7.19: Setting Groups Comments
The relay has 8 setting groups (SG). The user can change all relay setting pa-
rameters except the physical connections such as input or output parameters in
each setting group. Use any one of the 16 available Group Logic Statements
per setting group to perform Setting Group changes. The Group Logic state-
ments are similar to the ProLogic statements with the following exceptions, the
sole function is to activate one of the 8 setting groups and the processing is in
a slower half second cycle. Group Logic inputs statements can be driven from
ProLogic or any external input or virtual input or from previous Group Logic
statements. Each Group Logic statement includes 5 inputs (with Boolean state-

ments), one latch state and one pickup delay timer. View the active setting
group (ASG) from the Terminal Mode, from the front panel or from a record
stored by the relay (the active setting group is stored with the record).
Line Parameters
Figure 7.20: Line Parameters
Table 7.12: Line Parameters
Line
Line to Line voltage 1.00 to 2000.00 kV primary
Line Length (km/mile) 0.50 to 2000.00
Sequence Impedance
Positive Sequence Impedance (Z1) (ohm sec- 0.01 to 66.00 (5A)

ondary) 0.05 to 330.00 (1A)
Positive Sequence Angle (Z1) (deg) 5.0 to 89.0
Zero Sequence Impedance (Z0) (ohm) 0.01 to 300.00 (5A)

0.05 to 1500.00 (1A)
Zero Sequence Angle (Z0) (deg) 5.0 to 89.0

Table 7.12: Line Parameters
Series Compensation
Series compensation enabled Enable Disable
% compensation 0.0 to 70.0
K0
K0 Override Enable/Disable
K0 Magnitude 0.00 to 10.00
K0 Angle (deg) -180.0 to 180.0
Mutual Compensation
KM1
KM1 Mutual Line 1 Enable/Disable
KM1 Magnitude 0.10 to 2.00
KM1 Angle (deg) -25.0 to 25.0
KM2
KM2 Mutual Line 2 Enable/Disable
KM2 Magnitude 0.10 to 2.00
KM2 Angle (deg) -25.0 to 25.0
Line Parameter Settings permit a parameter entry related to the line voltage,
CT ratio, PT ratio, line length, line secondary positive and zero sequence im-
pedance.
The K0 factor used is a default factor based on the line parameters (K0 = [Z0 -
Z1] / 3Z1). The user can specify by selecting K0 Override Enable.

Scheme Selector
Figure 7.21: Scheme Selector
Table 7.13: Scheme Selector
Protection Scheme
Protection Scheme Selection 1 Phase/3 Phase/1/3 Phase
Distance Scheme
Distance Scheme Selection Basic/POTT/PUTT/DCB
Use Zone 2 Starter/Zone 3 Starter
Communication Receiver1 EI 1 to EI24, PL1 to PL24, VI1 to VI30
Communication Receiver2 Disabled, EI 1 to EI24, PL1 to PL24, VI1 to VI30
Scheme Send Pickup Delay (TL3) sec 0.000 to 1.000
Scheme Send Dropout Delay (TD3) sec 0.000 to 1.000
POTT Current Reversal Pickup Delay 0.000 to 0.500

(TL1) sec
POTT Current Reversal Dropout Delay 0.000 to 0.500

(TD1) sec
DCB Scheme Zone 2 Pickup Delay (TL2) 0.005 to 0.500

sec
DCB Scheme Receiver Dropout Delay 0.000 to 0.500

(TD2) sec
DEF Scheme
DEF Scheme Selection Disable/Permissive/Blocking
Communication Receiver3 Disabled, EI 1 to EI24, PL1 to PL24
DEF Scheme Send Pickup Delay (TL6) 0.000 to 1.000

sec

Table 7.13: Scheme Selector
DEF Scheme Send Dropout Delay (TD6) 0.000 to 1.000

sec
50N-67F - Overcurrent Carrier Trip
Action DEF Scheme Only/DEF & Dist Scheme/DEF &

ProLogic/DEF, Dist & ProLogic
Direction Forward
3I0 Pickup A 0.2 to 50.0 (5A)

0.1 to 10.0 (1A)
Pickup Delay sec 0.005 to 99.990
50N-67R - Overcurrent Carrier Block
Action Dist Scheme Only/ ProLogic only/ Dist & Pro-

Logic
Direction Reverse
3I0 Pickup A 0.2 to 50.0 (5A)

0.1 to 10.0 (1A)
Pickup Delay sec 0.005 to 99.990
The relay supports a Basic (no communication), a Permissive Overreaching

Transfer Tripping (POTT), a Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Tripping
(PUTT) and a Directional Comparison Blocking Scheme (DCB).

Breaker Status
Figure 7.22: Breaker Status
This screen provides configuration options for the breaker status inputs. Any
EI, PL or VI can be assigned to each breaker status input.
In order to configure the Auxiliary Breaker inputs, the “Ring Bus/One and Half
Breaker Configuration” check-box must be enabled on the Line Parameters
screen (see “System Parameters” on page 7-17).
Table 7.14: Breaker Status
Main Breaker EI1-24, PL1-24, VI 1-30
Aux. Breaker EI1-24, PL1-24, VI 1-30

(Ring Bus/One and Half Breaker Configu-
ration must be enabled)
Main Breaker Pole A EI1-24, PL1-24, VI 1-30
Main Breaker Pole B EI1-24, PL1-24, VI 1-30
Main Breaker Pole C EI1-24, PL1-24, VI 1-30
Aux. Breaker Pole A EI1-24, PL1-24, VI 1-30

Aux. Breaker Pole B EI1-24, PL1-24, VI 1-30

Aux. Breaker Pole C EI1-24, PL1-24, VI 1-30


Directional Element
Figure 7.23: Directional Element
Table 7.15: Directional Element
Directional Element Override Enable/Disable
Negative Sequence Directional Element Enable/Disable
V2 Sensitivity Level 0.5 to 5.0 Volts secondary
I2 Sensitivity Level 0.1 to 1.0 A secondary (5A)

Zero Sequence Directional Element Enable/Disable
3V0 Sensitivity Level 1.0 to 10.0 Volts secondary
3I0 Sensitivity Level 0.2 to 2.0 A secondary (5A)


Figure 7.24: Protection Functions
The Protection Summary screen gives a summary of which protection func-

tions are enabled, and allows the user to easily enable and disable functions.
There is one configuration screen available for each protection function in the
tree view. For a detailed descriptions of each of these protection function see
“Protection Functions and Specifications” on page 5-1.

ProLogic
Figure 7.25: ProLogic
Apply ProLogic to multiple inputs to create an output based on qualified in-

puts. ProLogic enables up to 24 ProLogic control statements and programs
those logics to output contacts. The user can name the function being created
and set a pickup and dropout delay. Start with input A by selecting any of the
relay functions using the list for up to 5 possible inputs. Put these inputs into
AND, NAND, OR, NOR, XOR, NXOR and LATCH logics by clicking on the
gate. Invert the input by clicking on the input line.
The output of ProLogic 1 can be nested into ProLogic 2 and so forth. If de-
scribed, the user can illuminate the front target LED on operation of this func-
tion by enabling this feature. The operation of the ProLogic statements are
recorded in the events logs.
The above is an example of a ProLogic application where an output is pro-
duced if either of the line breakers is slow to open following a line fault.
In this example current through the main and aux line breaker is present as
measured by the 50LS Main and the 50LS Aux functions after a protection line
trip as by Output Contact 14 and after the 0.50 ms (3 cycles) ProLogic 1
pickup time delay.
Group Logic
The 16 Group Logic statements reside in a slower processing thread within the
relay protection algorithms. The processing cycle happens once every half sec-
ond (0.5 s). When using ProLogic statements the user must keep in mind that
a latch or dropout timer should be used if the initiating condition does not last
at least 0.5 seconds.

Output Matrix
Figure 7.26: Output Matrix
The output contact matrix determines which function initiates which output re-
lay. All output relays have an individual user-selectable stretch time, except
those outputs identified as communication initiation outputs. They can have
their time delay characteristics changed. Functions also initiate recording as re-
quired.
For a more detailed description of the functions available on the output matrix,
see “Output Matrix” on page 5-64.
For a particular function to operate correctly, it must be enabled and

must also have its logic output assigned to at least one output contact
if it is involved in a tripping function.
Print the entire output matrix by selecting Print under the File menu. This print-
out is produced on two pages.

Settings Summary
Figure 7.27: Settings Summary
Select Settings Summary to view and print the relay settings in text form, for
details see “IED Settings and Ranges” in Appendix B.

7.2 RecordGraph Software

Introduction RecordGraph is a tool that is used to display and analyze records from
ERLPhase relays and recorders. Use it to graphically view the data recorded
during faults and swings. RecordGraph provides many powerful analysis tools
including:
• Timeline view
• Overlay view
• Phasor view
• Impedance view (for distance fault analysis)
• Symmetrical Component view
• Harmonic view
• Sub-Harmonic view
Figure 7.28: RecordGraph
Launching 1. Go to the Records screen in Relay Control Panel.

RecordGraph 2. Select one or more remote records on the relay. Press the Get from Relay
from Relay Button to retrieve the records from the relay and to store them locally. Se-
lect one or more local records and press the Graph button to launch the re-
Control Panel cord(s) in RecordGraph.
OR
Double-click on a remote record to directly graph it in RecordGraph
For further instructions on how to use the software, refer to the Re-
cordGraph Manual.

7.3 ERL 61850 IED Configurator
Introduction The ERL 61850 IED Configurator is used to configure ERLPhase IEC 61850
based devices for substation automation. This tool helps the user to map data
from remote GOOSE into ERLPhase IED data, to perform GOOSE mapping
from ERLPhase IEDs to other devices and to configure the required RCBs (Re-
port Control Block) for SCADA.
The ERL 61850 IED Configurator provides configuration options for GOOSE
Control Blocks, Sample Value Control Blocks, Report Control Blocks and
Datasets. It also provides GOOSE Mapping and Sample Value Mapping con-
figuration.
Figure 7.29: ERL 61850 IED Configurator
For further details refer to Chapter 8 and to the ERL 61850 IED Con-
figurator Manual.
8 IEC 61850 Implementation Overview
8.1 Introduction
The IEC 61850 standard defines a suite of protocols that permit substation
equipment from different manufacturers to communicate with each other. ERL
is dedicated to developing IEC 61850-based devices that can be used as part of
an open and versatile communications network for power system automation.
The IEC 61850 defines an Ethernet-based protocol used in power systems for
data communication. Power systems implement a number of devices for pro-
tection, measurement, detection, alarms, and monitoring. System implementa-
tion is often slowed down by the fact that the devices produced by different
manufacturers are incompatible, since they do not support the same communi-
cation protocols. The problems associated with this incompatibility are quite
serious, and result in increased costs for protocol integration and system main-
tenance.
The IEC 61850 is a broad ranging standard which encompasses the entire
scope of power system automation, from the highest level of substation design
to the lowest level of the communication protocol implementation on IEDs.
The IEC 61850 Standard also defines a standard Engineering Process which is
an iterative process which allows for the implementation and management of
power system automation.
Some key concepts which are discussed further in the following sections are:
• Substation Configuration Language (see Section 8.2)
• The Engineering Process (see Section 8.3)
• Edition 2.0 Implementation (see Section )
Parts of the The IEC 61850 Standard is comprised of many parts. The parts of the standard
Standard which are most relevant to the implementation in this device are:
• IEC 61850-6 Edition 2.0: Configuration description language for commu-
nication in electrical substations related to IEDs
• IEC 61850-7-2 Edition 2.0: Basic information and communication struc-
ture – Abstract communication service interface (ACSI)
• IEC 61850-7-3 Edition 2.0: Basic communication structure – Common data
classes
• IEC 61850 -7-4 Edition 2.0: Basic communication structure – Compatible
logical node classes and data object classes

8.2 The Substation Configuration Language (SCL)

The Substation Configuration Language (SCL) is an XML based language
which provides the basis for interoperable data exchange between IEDs from
different vendors and between configuration tools. The SCL file structure is
comprised of five main parts:
• Header - defines file information history
• Communication - defines access points and network configurations
• Substation - defines the substation equipment and provides coordinates for
locating equipment on a Single Line Diagram
• IED - provides the definition of the IED(s) including the Services, Logical
Devices, Logical Nodes, DataSets, Report Control Blocks, GOOSE Con-
trol Blocks and Sampled Value Control Blocks
• DataType Templates - contains the templates which define common data
used within the data model
There are multiple types of SCL files which are used for different applications
within the Engineering Process. Each type of SCL file is constructed using the
sections defined above, but not all SCL file types contain all five sections (for
example, the CID file type does not include a Substation section).
The SCL File types are:
• SSD - System Specification Description.
Data exchange from a system specification tool to the system configura-
tion tool.
• SED - System Exchange Description.
Data exchange between system configuration tools of different projects.
• SCD - System Configuration Description.
Data exchange from the system configuration tool to IED configuration
tools.
• ICD - IED Configuration Description.
Data exchange from the IED configuration tool to the system configuration
tool. Defines the IEDs capabilities and Data Model.
• IID - Instantiated IED Description.
Data exchange from the IED configuration tool to the system configuration
tool which contains add-on and/or modified values.
• CID - Configured IED Description.
Data exchange from the IED configuration tool to the IED.
ERL 61850 IED Configurator supports all of the SCL File types which are di-
rectly related to IED configuration (SCD, ICD, IID and CID).

8.3 The Engineering Process

The IEC 61850 standard defines an Engineering Process which is used to man-
age and implement substation automation. The basic Engineering Process is
shown in the diagrams below. For further details, refer to IEC 61850-6 Edition
2.0.
System
Specification
.SSD
IED System .IID IED Configuration Tool

Capabilities
.ICD Configuration (i.e. ERL 61850 IED .CID IED
Tool .SCD Configurator)
.SED
System
Configuration
Tool
Figure 8.30: The Engineering Process
Contains single IED
Import IED .IID

Modify and instantiate
System IED Configuration Tool

Configuration Tool (ie. ERL 61850 IED .CID IED
Configurator)
Load final
configuration to IED
Update system
.SCD Import IED
Contains multiple IEDs
Figure 8.31: Iterations between IED Configuration Tool and System Configuration tool
ERL 61850 IED Configurator supports import and export of CID, ICD, IID
and SCD, thus making it compatible with the Engineering Process. Refer to the
ERL 61850 IED Configurator user manual for more details.
Note: Importing SCD files which contain mapping to ERL Devices

which use IEC 61850 Edition 1.0 is not fully supported and is not rec-
ommended. ERL devices which support IEC 61850 Edition 2.0 fully
support the SCD import feature and thus are compatible with System
Configuration Tools as part of the Engineering Process.

8.4 Control Commands

The L-PRO 4500 provides Single Point (SPC) Control Commands for control
via a 61850 MMS Client. There are 12 Single Point Control Commands pro-
vided (six are latching, six are pulsing). Each Control Command has a user
configurable channel name.
These Control Commands are available as ProLogic inputs as well as for map-
ping directly from the Output Matrix.
Configuration Each of the 12 Control Command has a user configurable channel name. This
of Control Configuration is available in L-PRO Offliner (see “Control Commands” on
page 7-13). The configured name will be reflected on the metering, events and
Command recording.
Names
Latching and There are two methods of activation for the Control Commands, Pulse and
Pulsing Latch.
SPC 1-6 Controls are set as Pulsing commands. This means when the Control
Command is executed, all of the logic downstream from the SPC (PL, OC,
LED, Event etc.) will transition to the “True” state for a period of 1 second and
then will transition back to “False”. However, in the current implementation,
the Metering point and IEC 61850 Data attribute associated with this SPC will
remain True until the 61850 client sets the SPC to False via a control command
execution.
In the current implementation, for the Pulse command points (SPC 1-6), the
associated Metering channel and IEC 61850 Data Attribute will remain
latched in the True state after a command execution. The state must manu-
ally be reset using a command execution to return the state to False.
SPC 7-12 Controls are set as Latching commands. This means when the Con-
trol Command is executed, the SPC point will remain in it’s new state until a
new Control Command is executed.

8.5 IEC 61850 Edition 2.0 Implementation

The L-PRO 4500, starting with firmware version 2.1, uses the second edition
of the 61850 Standard. Edition 2.0 of the standard provides many new func-
tionalities. The major changes which have been implemented in the L-PRO
4500 from Edition 2.0 of the standard are described below.
Test Features IEC 61850 Edition 2.0 introduced two new test features: Simulation and Mode
Control. Simulation is an IED level test feature which allows the IED to sub-
scribe to simulated GOOSE messages from test-set devices. The Mode Control
is an LD level test feature (for testing LDs independently) which allows the LD
to process or ignore incoming “test” data. These two features are described in
detail below.
Simulation
Edition 2.0 introduced a new Simulation function. Simulation allows for 61850
publisher devices to publish “simulated” GOOSE messages, and for 61850
subscriber devices to subscribe to these “simulated” GOOSE. The devices
which publish simulated GOOSE are typically test-set devices used for testing
and commissioning. A simulated GOOSE means a GOOSE message with the
“Simulation/Test” flag set to True. The L-PRO 4500 has the ability to sub-
scribe to simulated GOOSE, but does not publish any simulated messages.
Figure 8.32 shows the basic flow of how Simulation subscription works for
GOOSE subscription.
Setting the IED into Simulation mode allows for the IED to subscribe to both
real and simulated GOOSE messages simultaneously. The simulation mode is
controlled by the SYS/LPHD1.Sim attribute. If the LPHD1.Sim attribute is set
to True via a control command, then the IED may begin to subscribe to Simu-
lated GOOSE messages.
When the IED is in Simulation mode (LPHD1.Sim = True), then the IED will
continue to subscribe to real GOOSE (see diagram 2 in Figure 8.32). However,
once a simulated GOOS has been received, the IED will ignore the real
GOOSE message if a duplicate real and simulated GOOSE exist simultaneous-
ly (see diagram 3 in Figure 8.32). The simulation mode works on a per-
GOOSE subscription basis.

1. 2.
IED IED
SYS /LPHD1.Sim = False SYS /LPHD1.Sim = True
Real input buffer Real input buffer Real data

GOOSE A Real data GOOSE A
processed processed
LGOS.Sim.StVal LGOS.Sim.StVal
= False = False
Simulation input Simulation input
buffer buffer

Real data GOOSE B
GOOSE B processed
processed
= False = False
buffer buffer
3. 4.
IED IED
SYS /LPHD1.Sim = True SYS /LPHD1.Sim = False
Real input buffer Real input buffer

Real data Real data
GOOSE A GOOSE A
processed processed
GOOSE A (Simulation = True) = True GOOSE A (Simulation = True) = False
buffer buffer

GOOSE B Real data GOOSE B
processed processed
= False = False
buffer buffer
Figure 8.32: Simulated GOOSE processing
For example, imagine an L-PRO 4500 is subscribing to GOOSE A and

GOOSE B simultaneously (see diagram 1 in Figure 8.32) and then the IED is
then set into simulation mode (see diagram 2). The IED will continue to sub-
scribe to the real GOOSE messages as no simulated messages have been re-
ceived yet. Next, a test-set publisher begins to publish GOOSE A (Simulation
= True) and while the real GOOSE A and GOOSE B are still being published
on the network (see diagram 3). The IED will successfully subscribe to
GOOSE A (Simulation = True) and GOOSE B, but GOOSE A will be ignored.
If the test-set stops publishing GOOSE A (Simulation = True) the IED will not
return to subscribing to the real GOOSE A until the simulation mode is manu-
ally turned off (see diagram 4).
In order to monitor the simulation state of the device, monitor the
LGOS.Sim.StVal attribute for each GOOSE subscription (see “Subscription
Supervision via LGOS” on page 8-8 for more details). LGOS.Sim.StVal =
True is an indication that only simulated GOOSE will be accepted for this par-
ticular GOOSE subscription. Once the LPHD1.Sim is set back to FALSE, all
LGOS.Sim.StVal attributes will change back to FALSE.

Mode Control
The use of the Mod data object was expanded in Edition 2.0 (appended by TIS-
SUE #671) to included the following Modes:
• On
• Blocked
• Test
• Test/Blocked
• Off
The L-PRO 4500 implementation currently supports the use of modes On, Test
and Test/Blocked. Control the mode via a control command to change the val-
ue of the LLN0.Mod data object. The LLN0.Mod may only be controlled for
subscription Logical Devices on the L-PRO 4500.
The LLN0.Mod value determines how incoming data is processed and how
data quality output is published. It also determines how control commands are
processed. For example, a subscription LD will only process incoming data
with q.test = True if the LLN0.Mod is also set to Test or Test/Blocked.
The status of the LLN0.Mod object is reflected in the Beh object for all LNs
within the LD. If any LD LLN0.Mod is set to Test or Test/Blocked, the front
panel “Test Mode” LED will be turned on.
For further details regarding the behavior different modes, refer to IEC 61850-
7-4 Annex A (appended by TISSUE #671).
Table 8.16: Mode Implementation on the L-PRO 4500

(based on Table A.2 in IEC 61850-7-4 (Edition 2) Appended by TISSUE #671)
Mode
On Test Test/Blocked
Output to process via a non- Yes Yes No

61850 link
Value is Value is Value is

Output of FC, ST, MX
relevant. relevant. relevant.
(issued independently from Beh)
q is relevant. q.test=true q.test=true
Positive Negative Negative

Response to Normal Command
Acknowledge- Acknowledge- Acknowledge-
from Client
ment ment ment
Negative Positive Positive

Response to TEST Command
Acknowledge- Acknowledge- Acknowledge-
from Client
ment ment ment
Incoming Data with Validity = Process as Process as Process as

Good and Test = False and Valid Valid Valid
operatorBlocked = false
Incoming Data with Validity = Process as Process as Process as

Good and Test = True and Invalid Valid Valid
operatorBlocked = false

Subscription A new logical nodes, LGOS has been added in Edition 2.0 to provide the ability
Supervision via to supervise GOOSE subscription statuses. The LGOS LN is used to monitor
GOOSE subscriptions.
LGOS
One LGOS LN is created for each GOOSE Control Block which the IED sub-
scribes to. The data objects of the LGOS LN are described in the table below:
Table 8.17: LGOS LN
Data Object Description
NdsCom Subscription needs commissioning
St Status of the subscription (True = active, False = not active).

If LGOS.St = False, this means that this GOOSE has not been
received for 2x Time Allowed to Live.
SimSt Status showing if simulated messages are received and

accepted (see “Simulation” on page 8-5)
LastStNum Last state number received
ConfRevNum Expected configuration revision number
GoCBRef Reference to the subscribed GOOSE control block
Subscription Supervision in the Event Log

Along with the LGOS.St attribute, the Event Log also displays when there is a
GOOSE Subscription loss. When the LGOS.St attribute transitions states,
there is an event logged into the Event Log. This Event Log entry contains a
MAC address which can be used to identify the GOOSE which caused the
communication alarm. This MAC address corresponds to the Multicast MAC
of the published GOOSE.
GOOSE Subscriber
Event Log
GOOSE Publisher
Muliticast MAC Address
Figure 8.33: Event Log Subscription Supervision

Subscription to There are two Logical Device naming methods (LDName), used for object ref-
ldName erences, described in IEC 61850-6 Edition 2.0. These methods are:
• Product-related naming
• Function-related naming
In product-related naming, the LDName is comprised of the IED name and the
LDevice inst attribute. ERL IEDs only use product-related naming for Logical
Device naming. For example, for an L-PRO 4500 with the IED name “MyL-
PRO”, the LDName for the Protection LD would be:
LDName = IED name/LDevice inst = MyLPRO/Protection
In function-related naming, the LDName is derived from the LDevice ldName
attribute. For IEDs to support the use of ldName, they must support the free set-
ting of the Logical Device names. ERL IEDs do not support free setting of the
Logical Device names, and so do not use the ldName attribute. However, Edi-
tion 2.0 ERL IEDs do support subscribing to data from other vendor's IEDs
which use the function-related naming via the ldName attribute.
Data from an IED which uses the ldName attribute may be mapped to the ERL
Edition 2.0 IED for subscription. The ldName attribute shows in the ldName
column on the GOOSE Subscription screen in ERL 61850 IED Configurator.
Figure 8.34: Mapping from IED which uses ldName attribute
Note: Edition 1.0 does not support the ldName attribute, so Edition
1.0 IEDs cannot subscribe to Edition 2.0 IEDs which use the ldName
attribute. See “Mapping Edition 2.0 Data to an Edition 1.0 IED” on
page 8-11 for other a summary of Edition 2.0 to 1.0 mapping incom-
patibilities.

Subscription to In IEC 61850 Edition 2.0, fixed-length encoded GOOSE messages were intro-
Fixed-Length duced. This is an optimized version of GOOSE encoding which uses a fixed
length offset for each field of the GOOSE packet. If a GOOSE Control Block
GOOSE has the fixedOffs attribute set to True, this indicates that the GOOSE message
uses fixed-length encoding.
ERL IEDs do not support publishing the fixed-length encoded GOOSE mes-
sages (fixedOffs attribute is always set to False). However, ERL IEDs can sub-
scribe to GOOSE messages from other vendors which use fixed-length
encoded GOOSE messages.
The fixed-length GOOSE subscription is backwards compatible, meaning that
even ERL devices which use Edition 1.0 of the standard can subscribe to fixed-
length GOOSE messages.
IED Name Edition 2.0 of the IEC 61850 standard allows for longer IED names. The max-
Length imum IED name length allowed according to the standard is 64 characters.
However, this is limited by the total maximum allowed length for LDName
references which is also limited 64 characters. The LDName is defined as IED
name/LDevice inst (see “Subscription to ldName” on page 8-9). The total IED
name + LDevice inst character count may not exceed 64 characters. This is
handled automatically in ERL 61850 IED Configurator. The software ensures
that IED name length does cause the maximum length for the LDName to be
exceeded. For example, if the longest LDevice inst name is 10 characters long,
then IED name length is limited to 54 characters, so that IED name + LDevice
inst does not exceed 64 characters.
Common Data In Edition 2.0 of the IEC 61850 Standard some new Common Data Classes
Classes (CDC) were added and others were updated. The only CDC change in Edition
2.0 which affects the L-PRO 4500 implementation is the LLN0.Beh data object
was changed from CDC Type INS to ENS. The L-PRO 4500 uses the ENS
CDC type for LLN0.Beh as required by Edition 2.0.

Edition 1.0 In general, Edition 1.0 and Edition 2.0 devices are compatible with each other
Compatibility for GOOSE mapping. However, there are some backward compatibility issues
which the user should be aware of before attempting mapping between Edition
1.0 and Edition 2.0 devices.
Mapping Edition 1.0 Data to an Edition 2.0 IED

There are no compatibility issues when mapping data from an Edition 1.0 ERL
IED to an Edition 2.0 ERL IED. The Edition 2.0 of the IEC 61850 Standard is
designed to handle this forward-compatibility case.
Mapping Edition 2.0 Data to an Edition 1.0 IED

Edition 2.0 of the IEC 61850 introduced some backward-compatibility limita-
tions when mapping to an Edition 1.0 IED. The user should be aware of these
limitations before configuring mapping Edition 2.0 data to an Edition 1.0 IED.
In order to map data from an Edition 2.0 IED to an Edition 1 IED, the following
restrictions must be followed:
• The IED Name on the Edition 2.0 IED (publisher) must be limited such that
IED Name + Longest LD Inst does not exceed 32 characters. This restric-
tion is not enforced by ERL IEC 61850 Configurator, it is the responsibil-
ity of the user to ensure name length on the Edition 2.0 IED is not too long.
• The Edition 2.0 publisher cannot use function-related naming (i.e. ldName
attribute). Edition 1.0 does not support the ldName attribute. If the Edition
2.0 publisher uses the ldName attribute, then its data may not be mapped
to an Edition 1.0 ERL IED. ERL 61850 IED Configurator prevents this
mapping when attempted by the user. The L-PRO 4500 does not support
publishing the ldName attribute, so this condition only applies when map-
ping with third party vendors who support the ldName attribute.
• In Edition 2.0 of the standard, new CDCs were introduced which may cause
backward-compatibility issues. These new CDCs do not apply to the im-
plementation in the L-PRO 4500 and therefore this should not cause any
issues when mapping between ERL Edition 1.0 and 2.0 devices. However,
the user should be aware when mapping from other vendor’s IEDs that
there may be issues if using data from CDCs which are newly introduced
in Edition 2.0.

9 Acceptance/Protection Function Test
Guide
9.1 Introduction
The acceptance test section is a guide for testing any and all protection ele-
ments in the relay. These tests should be performed upon first delivery of the
relay, prior to applying in-service settings. Once in-service settings are applied,
ERLPhase recommends that the user test enabled functions to ensure the de-
signed application is fulfilled.
This section deals with the Acceptance Testing and the L-PRO Acceptance
Test Procedure.
First, the acceptance testing describes the test equipment requirements, calibra-
tion methods, testing the external inputs and testing the output relay contacts.
Next, a step-by-step test procedure for testing all the relay devices is outlined.
9.2 Acceptance Testing

ERLPhase relays are fully tested before leaving the factory. A visual inspec-
tion of the relay and its packaging is recommended on receipt to ensure the re-
lay was not damaged during shipping.
The electronics in the relay contain static sensitive devices and are
not user-serviceable. If the front of the relay is opened for any reason
exposing the electronics, take extreme care to ensure that the user
and the relay are solidly grounded.
Generally an analog metering check, as well as testing the I/O (External Inputs
and Output Contacts) is sufficient to ensure the functionality of the relay. Fur-
ther tests can be performed on delivery and acceptance of the purchaser’s op-
tion according to the published relay specifications in “IED Settings and
Ranges” in Appendix B.
Test Equipment • 3 ac voltage sources (variable frequency capability)

Requirements • 3 ac current sources
• 1 ohmmeter
• 1 - 125 Vdc test supply

9 Acceptance/Protection Function Test Guide
Set nominal CT secondary current to either 5 A or 1 A, and nominal

system frequency to either 60 Hz or 50 Hz. This example uses 5 A/
60 Hz.
Calibration The relay is calibrated before it leaves the factory; but if component changes
are made within the relay, the user may need to do a re-calibration.
Before beginning a new calibration, establish the accuracy of the

equipment being used.
To perform a calibration, the user must be logged into the relay using Relay
Control Panel at the Service access level to the front USB Port. Proceed to the
Utilities>Analog Input Calibrate. The Calibrate menu leads the user through
every analog input and prompts the user to apply the appropriate quantity.
Figure 9.1: Enter actual applied signal level
Figure 9.2: Calibration error - out of range

For example, when selecting Channel 1 to calibrate Main VA, the Applied Sig-
nal check box will indicate the desired calibration of the relay. If a 69 V phase-
to-neutral quantity is applied to the back VA terminals, 69.0 V would be indi-
cated as the desired calibration. If a 69 V phase-to-neutral quantity is applied
to the to the back VA terminals, 69.0 V would be indicated as the desired cal-
ibration.
In a similar way, the user needs to go through all 16 ac analog quantities and
provide the information about the injected calibration quantities. The user must
have a test source to perform this function. Only the magnitude of the analog
input requires calibration, not the angle.
When an analog input channel is calibrated, verify the quantity measured by
selecting the Metering menu and the Analog Quantity submenu. VA of the ac
voltage input is used as a reference quantity by the relay. Therefore, if it is ab-
sent, there is not a locked, valid relationship among all of the analog quantities.
Note: For the 10CT, 6PT configuration, only the Aux. Voltage chan-
nel that corresponds to the System Parameters > Aux. Voltage Input
setting is able to be calibrated.
Testing the To test the external inputs connect the relay using Relay Control Panel, Meter-
External Inputs ing>External. This screen displays the status of the Input and Output Contacts.
Placing a voltage of 125 Vdcnominal, (150 Vmaximum), to each of the external
inputs in turn causes the input to change from Low to High status. These inputs
are polarity sensitive and this screen has a 0.5 second update rate.
Testing the Test the output relays to verify their integrity using the Utilities>Toggle Out-
Output Relay puts. The output contacts are toggled from open to closed by pressing the
Closed button. Verify the output contact status using an ohmmeter. When ex-
Contacts iting this sub-menu, each contact status reverts to the open position.

9.3 L-PRO Acceptance Test Procedure Outline

Devices to Test • 21P Phase-to-Phase Impedance
• 21N Phase-to-Neutral Impedance
• Load Encroachment
• Weak Infeed
• Switch-On-To-Fault
• 60 AC Loss of Potential
• 68 Power Swing
• 27 Undervoltage
• 59 Overvoltage
• 59N Zero Sequence OverVoltage
• 50N/51N Neutral Overcurrent
• 50G/51G Measured Neutral Overcurrent
• 50/51 Phase Overcurrent
• 46-50/46-51 Negative Sequence Overcurrent
• 46 Broken Conductor
• 50LS Low Set Definite Time Overcurrent
• 50BF Breaker Fail
• 60CTS CT supervision
• 81 Over/Under/Rate of Change of Frequency
• 25 Sync Check
• Communication Aided Schemes
• 79 Recloser
• Z Circle Trigger

Download 1. Browse to find the following Offliner Setting file “LPRO4500accTestset-

Acceptance ting60hz” in C:\Program Files\ERLPhase\LPRO Offliner Settings\.
Test File 2. Double-click the Setting file to open. Enter the serial number of the relay
being tested or check Ignore Serial Number checkbox.
Figure 9.3: Identification Serial Number Screen
3. Save the file.

4. Connect to the relay in Service or Change mode via the relay front port (Port
010) using the Relay Control Panel.
5. From the Main Menu double click on Configuration.
6. From the Configuration submenu select Import.
7. Browse to the converted acceptance test file and click on Open.
8. Select the file under Saved Settings list and click on the Load to IED button
on the right.

About the The acceptance test setting file provided is not necessarily configured to a pro-
Acceptance vide a realistic setting example. Its configuration is intended to demonstrate
simple test methods for each relay element. Tests are organized to prevent in-
Test Setting File terference of one protection element on the next within the relay for ease of
testing without using multiple setting files and minimizing the number of test
connection changes. All contacts in the relay will be tested if all elements in
this procedure are tested as written.
Testing all the elements is accommodated by using of the relay Setting Groups
(8 groups are used).
Setting Group 1 tests elements: 21P, 21N, 68, Switch-On-To-Fault, Overcur-
rent elements pickup, Directional Element minimum pickup
Setting Group 2 tests elements: Overcurrent elements directionality, 27, 59,
59N, 60
Setting Group 3 tests elements: 60CTS, 50LS, 81
Setting Group 4 test elements: 50BF, Z circle
Setting Group 5 test elements: 79 3Phase 2 breaker, POTT, Sync Check
Setting Group 6 test elements: PUTT
Setting Group 7 test elements: DCB/DEF permissive
Setting Group 8 test elements: DEF block
The file demonstrates all types of impedance characteristics available in the re-
lay: circle, tomato, lens, Quadrilateral.
In addition to, or exclusive of these tests, the user may wish to perform dynam-
ic simulation tests on the relay to verify the relay operates as per protection
scheme design using the settings that are applied for the particular line on
which the relay will be installed.
Impedance Characteristics Available in L-PRO (Mho and Quadrilateral)
Reactive (x)
Forward
Characteristic
Angle = 90 degrees
Line
Angle
Resistive (R)
Directional
Reverse
Supervision
Figure 9.4: MHO Circle (Characteristic Angle = 90) Available for 21P and 21N

Reactive (x)
Forward
Characteristic
Angle = 90 degrees
Line
Angle
Resistive (R)
Reverse
Directional
Supervision
Figure 9.5: MHO Tomato (Characteristic Angle < 90) Available for 21P and 21N
Reactive (x)
Forward
Characteristic
Angle = 90 degrees
Line
Angle
Resistive (R)
Reverse Directional
Supervision
Figure 9.6: MHO Lens (Characteristic Angle > 90) Available for 21P and 21N

Reactive (x)
Forward
Line
Angle
R1
Resistive (R)
Reverse Directional
Supervision
Figure 9.7: Quadrilateral Available for 21P and 21N Only
Basic Testing Calculations
Nominal primary voltage = 230kV (1)
kV 230kV (2)
Nominal secondary phase-to-phase voltage = ---------------------- = ---------------- = 115V
PTRatio 2000
115V (3)
Nominal secondary phase-to-neutral voltage = ------------- = 66.4V
3
where
kV - Nominal Primary Voltage
PT Ratio - Potential Transformer Ratio
Zero Sequence Impedance calculations for phase-to-ground impedance ele-
ment tests (using secondary Positive and Zero Sequence Line Impedances):
Z 1 = 5.9 80 =  1.03 + j5.81  (4)
Z 0 = 16.0 74 =  4.41 + j15.38  (5)

Z0 – Z1
K 0 = ------------------
3  Z1
  4.41 – 1.03  +  j15.38 – j5.81  -
= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3  5.9 80
70.52- =  0.57 – 9.5 
= 3.38 + j9.57- = 10.15 (6)
----------------------------- ---------------------------------
17.7 80 17.7 80
where
Z1 - Positive Sequence Impedance
Z2 - Negative Sequence Impedance
K0 - Factor
The multiplier used to compensate phase-to-ground impedances:
1 + K0 = (1 + 0.57-9.5)
= (1 + 0.562 – j0.094)
= (1.562 – j0.094) = 1.5693.5
(7)
21N Reach Settings

Zone 1 Reach: Mho 4.72 
Zone 2 Reach: Quadrilateral X: 8 , R: 6.00 
Zone 3 Reach: Mho Forward 17.7 , Reverse 0.50 
Zone 4 Reach: Mho Forward 0.00 , Reverse 4.72 
Zone 5 Reach: Quad Reverse X: 7.38R: 6
Compensated 21N1 setting 4.72  (Zone 1 phase-to-ground compensated Mho
impedance):
4.72 80  1.569 – 3.5 = 7.40 76.5 (8)

Compensated 21N2 Setting 8  (Zone 2 phase-to-ground compensated Quad-

rilateral impedance):
Reactive: 8 80  1.569 – 3.5 = 12.55 76.5 (9)
Resistive: 6.0 0  1.569 – 3.5 = 9.41 – 3.5 (10)
The pure resistive component 9.41  cos  – 3.5  = 9.39 0 (11)
Compensated 21N3 (Zone 3 Phase-to-ground compensated impedance):
Forward: 17.70 80  1.569 – 3.5 = 27.76 76.5 (12)
Reverse: 0.50 – 100  1.569 – 3.5 = 0.78 – 103.5 (13)
Compensated 21N4 (Zone 4 phase-to-ground compensated impedance)
Forward: 0 (must be 0 for POTT Scheme) (14)

Reverse: 4.72 – 100  1.569 – 3.5 = 7.40 – 103.5 (15)
Compensated 21N5 Setting 7.38 (Zone 2 phase-to-ground compensated

Quadrilateral impedance):
Reactive: 7.38 80  1.569 – 3.5 = 11.58 76.5 (16)
Resistive: 6.0 – 0  1.569 – 3.5 = 9.41 – 3.5 (17)
The pure resistive component: 9.41  cos  – 3.5  = 9.39 0 (18)

For each test specifies Metering/Protection, view the following screen under
Metering > Logic in the Relay Control Panel.
Figure 9.8: Protection Function Metering Screen
Directional Settings:
Element Directional Element Override = Enabled
Minimum Negative Sequence Directional Element = Enabled
Pickup V2 Sensitivity level = 0.5V
I2 Sensitivity level = 0.1A
Zero Sequence Directional Element = Enabled
3V0 Sensitivity Level = 1.0V
3I0 Sensitivity Level =0.2V
ProLogic18: Input A = Directional Valid (Map to Output 12)
V2 Minimum Pickup Test Procedure

1. Apply 3 Phase current at 5A
Ph-A: 711 – 7121, 5 A 0
Ph-B: 715 – 716, 5 A120
Ph-C: 719 – 720, 5 A120
2. Start three phase voltage at 0.4V.

Ph-A: 701, 0.4 V0
1.For terminal numbering, see Appendix I Connection Diagram.

Ph-B: 702, 0.4 V120

Ph-C: 703, 0.4 V-120
Ph-N: 704
In Relay Control Panel, access Metering > ProLogic/Outputs
Observe: ProLogic 18 = Low
Output 12 = Low
3. Slowly ramp up the three phase voltage from 0.4V to 0.6V with 0.01V step
change
At 0.45 to 0.55V (expect 0.5V)
Observe: ProLogic 18 = High
Output 12 = High
End of V2 Minimum pickup test.
I2 Minimum Pickup Test Procedure

1. Apply 3 Phase voltage at 69V
Ph-A: 701, 69 V0
Ph-B: 702, 69 V120
Ph-C: 703, 69 V120
Ph-N: 704
2. Start three phase current at 0.01A
Ph-A: 711 – 712, 0.01 A0
Ph-B: 715 – 716, 0.01 A120
Ph-C: 719 – 720, 0.01 A120

Output 12 = Low
Slowly ramp up the three phase current from 0.01A to 0.15A with 0.01A step
change
At 0.08 to 0.12A (expect 0.1A)
Output 12 = High
End of I2 Minimum pickup test.
V0 Minimum Pickup Test Procedure

1. Apply 3 Phase current at 5A

Ph-A: 711 – 712, 5 A0

Ph-B: 715 – 716, 5 A0
Ph-C: 719 – 720, 5 A0
2. Start three phase voltage at 0.1V.

Ph-A: 701, 0.1V0
Ph-B: 702, 0.1 V0
Ph-C: 703, 0.1 V0
Ph-N: 704

Output 12 = Low
Slowly ramp up the three phase voltage from 0.1V to 0.4V with 0.01V step
change
At 0.3 to 0.36V (expect 0.333V)
Output 12 = High
End of V0 Minimum pickup test.
I0 Minimum Pickup Test Procedure

1. Apply 3 Phase voltage at 69V
Ph-A: 701, 69 V0
Ph-B: 702, 69 V0
Ph-C: 703, 69 V0
Ph-N: 704
2. Start three phase current at 0.01A
Ph-A: 711 – 712, 0.01 A0

Ph-B: 715 – 716, 0.01 A0
Ph-C: 719 – 720, 0.01 A0
3. In Relay Control Panel, access Metering > ProLogic/Outputs

Output 12 = Low
4. Slowly ramp up the three phase current from 0.01A to 0.15A with 0.01A
step change

At 0.04 to 0.09A (expect 0.067A)

Output 12 = High
End of I0 Minimum pickup test.
21P1 Phase (Zone 1 Single-Phase Under Impedance Test tested as 3-phase fault)
Distance Test
Settings
• Positive Sequence Secondary Line Impedance (100% of line)= 5.9 
• Positive Sequence Line Angle = 80
• 21P1 = 4.72  (Maximum Reach = 80% of line at maximum torque angle
of 80)
• Time Delay = 0 (expect 1.3 cycles, 22 ms or less)
• Delta Current Supervision = 7.0 A (minimum phasor difference between
any 2 phases to allow 21P Trip)
Figure 9.9: Phase Distance Logic (21P)

Preliminary Calculations
Since this is a balanced 3-phase test, there is no Zero Sequence Current, so Z
is calculated as:
V Phase (19)
Z = ----------------
-
I Phase
where
Z - Phase Impedance
VPhase - Phase Voltage
IPhase - Phase Current
The minimum 3-phase current required is:

(Remember: IDelta is the Phasor difference between any 2-phase currents; add
5% to ensure the Minimum IDeltaSupervision Logic is high for this test).
I DeltaSupervision  105 percent 7.0  1.05 (20)

I min = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- = ------------------------ = 4.24amps
3 3
where
Imin- Minimum Current setting
IDeltaSupervision - Phase difference between any 2-phase currents
21P1 Test Procedure

1. In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering > Logic 1.
Monitor 21P1 Zone 1Trip
2. Apply balanced 3-phase nominal voltages (66.4 V) to the relay terminals.
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V0
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V-120
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V+120
Ph N: 704
3. Connect 3-phase current sources (4.24 A lagging voltages by 80) to the
relay terminals:
Ph A: 711– 712, 4.24 A 0
Ph B: 715– 716, 4.24 A -200°
Ph C: 719– 720, 4.24 A +40°
Observe 21P1 Trip = Low
4. Simultaneously reduce 3-phase voltages.

At 21.0 to 19.0 V (expect 20.0 V)

21 Trip = High (Note that Contact 1 will probably close earlier than
21-1 Trip going high, because Z2 and Z3 trip elements are mapped to
the same output contact, and the length of time this fault will be ap-
plied.)
Testing the Zone 1 Phase Time Delay

1. Monitor (Timer Stop) on normally open Output Contact 9 (211 – 222).
2. Set timer to start from 3-phase amp current transition (i.e. current off to on).
3. Apply (keep on) balanced 3-phase voltages (20.0 V) to the relay terminals.
Ph A: 701, 20.0 V 
Ph B: 702, 20.0 V -120
Ph C: 703, 20.0 V +120
Ph N: 704
4. Apply 3-phase currents from 0 to 5.3 A to start the timer (this is 80% of
Zone 1 Reach = 64% of the line = 12.4 miles).
Ph A: 711 – 712, 5.3 A –-80
Ph B: 715 – 716, 5.3 A – -200
Ph C: 719 – 720, 5.3 A – +40
Expect operating time less than 1.3 cycles with CCVT algorithm dis-
abled.
End of 21P1 test.
21P2 Phase Zone 2 Phase Under Impedance tested as 2-phase fault

Distance Test
Settings
• Positive Sequence Secondary Line Impedance (100% of line) = 5.9  Pos-
itive Sequence Line Angle (Z1) = 80
• 21P2= 7.38  (Maximum Reach = 125% of line, 24.25 miles at maximum
torque angle of 80)
• Time Delay = 400 ms (expect 1.0 to 1.3 cycle additional delay due to in-
herent detection and contact times)
• Delta Current Supervision = 3.0 A (minimum phasor difference between
any 2 phases to allow 21P2 Trip)
This test example shows how to test for a phase-to-phase fault.
Determine the voltage and current quantities required to perform this test.
1. Determine the minimum current required (as per Idelta supervision setting).
2. Determine an appropriate fault voltage to use for the test.
3. Determine the 3-phase voltage phasors required to create the fault voltage.

1. Minimum current required for this test:

I delta Supervision Setting (the phasor difference of 2 phases) = 3.0 A. Cur-
rent is injected into polarity of B-phase and out of polarity of C-phase.
Therefore B-phase and C-phase currents are equal in magnitude but 180
out of phase.
The minimum delta current required = 3.0 A; add 5% to ensure supervision is
met:
3.0  105 percent = 3.2 A (21)
Since B-phase = C-phase, actual minimum current required is equal to
3.2 (22)
------- = 1.6 A
2
2. Use the minimum test current to determine what voltage would be appro-
priate for this test.
V FaultMin (23)
Z = ----------------------------
-
2  I TestMin
From Equation (23) we can derive the formula:
V FaultMin = Z  2  I TestMin (24)
And using appropriate values, the Minimum Fault Voltage is
V FaultMin = 7.38  2  1.6 A = 23.6V (25)
where
VFaultMin - Minimum Fault Voltage
ITestMin - Minimum Fault Test Current

3. Now determine the 3-phase voltage phasors.

Only B-C fault is shown here, but the same principle applies for A-B or C-
A faults.
Since neutral is not involved in this type of fault, the faulted voltage phasors
collapse toward each other along the phase-to-phase line.
C
120 deg
HEALTHY
VOLTS
FAULT N A
VOLTS
0 deg
-120 deg
B
Figure 9.10: Phasor Representation of an Ideal Phase-to-Phase Fault
The following tables show the voltages to inject for a variety of fault voltage
levels using 115 V secondary phase-to-phase nominal (66.4 V phase-to-neutral
nominal).
Table 9.18: A-B Fault Voltage Injections
A-B Fault
(C-phase voltage = 66.4 V +120) The resultant angle of A-B voltage always = +30
% Reduction 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%
Fault V 103.5 V 92.0 V 80.5 V 69.0 V 57.5 V 46.0 V 34.5 V 23.0 V 11.5 V
Fault Volt Angle 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
Voltage A=B 61.5 V 56.7 V 52.2 V 47.9 V 43.9 V 40.4 V 37.4 V 35.1 V 33.7 V
A Angle -2.7 -5.8 -9.5 -13.9 -19.1 -25.3 -32.5 -40.9 -50.2
B Angle -117.3 -114.2v -110.5 -106.1 -100.9 -94.7 -87.5 -79.1 -69.8

Table 9.19: B-C Fault Voltage Injections
B-C Fault
(A phase voltage = 66.4 V) The resultant angle of B-C voltage always = -90
% Reduction 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%
Fault Volt Angle -90 -90 -90 -90 -90 -90 -90 -90 -90
Voltage B=C 61.5 V 56.7 V 52.2 V 47.9 V 43.9 V 40.4 V 37.4 V 35.1 V 33.7 V
B Angle -122.7 -125.8 -129.5 -133.9 -139.1 -145.3 -152.5 -160.9 -170.2
C Angle 122.7 125.8 129.5 133.9 139.1 145.3 152.5 160.9 170.2
Table 9.20: C-A Fault Voltage Injections
C-A Fault
(B phase voltage = 66.4 V -120) The resultant angle of C-A voltage always = +150
% Reduction 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%
Fault Volt Angle 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Voltage C=A 61.5 V 56.7 V 52.2 V 47.9 V 43.9 V 40.4 V 37.4 V 35.1 V 33.7 V
C Angle 117.3 114.2 110.5 106.1 100.9 94.7 87.5 79.1 69.8
A Angle 2.7 5.8 9.5 13.9 19.1 25.3 32.5 40.9 50.2
For this B-C test a minimum fault voltage of 23.6 V is required as calculated
in “B-C Fault Voltage Injections, for details see Table 9.19: B-C Fault Voltage
Injections on page 9-19. Select the next highest voltage. In this case 34.5 V
(70% reduction) is used.

The following formulae were used to calculate the voltages for the tables (they
may be used for any other desired fault voltage):
2 2 (26)
Test voltage magnitude = V Fault V Nominal
- +  ----------------------
--------------- -
 2   2 
where
VFault - phase-to-phase fault voltage
VNominal - phase-to-neutral nominal voltage
Test Phase Angle

Offset the nominal phase angles toward the other faulted phase angle by:
V Fault  (27)
60 – atan  ----------------------
-
V 
Nominal
Example of this calculation using the 70% voltage reduction from the B-C
fault, for details see Table 9.19: B-C Fault Voltage Injections on page 9-19:
Phase B-C voltage angle = -90 with respect to A-N voltage phasor.
Fault Voltage = 70% reduction of phase-to-phase nominal
= 115V –  – 90  –  115V + – 90  70 percent  =  34.5V  – 90   (28)
2 2
Faulted Test Voltage Magnitudes =  34.5
---------- +  66.4
---------- = 1399.8 = 37.4V (29)
 2   2 
34.5
Faulted Phase Angle = 60 – atan  ---------- = 60 – 27.5 = 32.5
 66.4 (30)
For B-C fault adjust Phase B angle toward Phase C angle and adjust Phase C
angle toward Phase B angle:
B Phase Angle = -120 - 32.5 = -152.5
C Phase Angle = +120 +32.5 = 152.5

So,
A Phase Phasor = Unfaulted = 66.4 V 0
B Phase Phasor = Faulted = 37.4 V -152.5
C Phase Phasor = Faulted = 37.4 V +152.5
Connecting the Test Source for B-C Fault:
Figure 9.11: AC Connections to the relay for B-C (21P) Test
In summary for this example, inject Phase B to Phase C fault:

Line Impedance = 7.38 
Line Angle = 80
Fault Voltage = 34.5 V -90 using the calculated voltage phasors
Fault Current = greater than 1.6 A (-90- 80) = greater than 1.6 A -
170
21P2 Test Procedure

1. In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering > Logic1.
Monitor the following element for pickup: 21P2 Zone 2 Alarm.
2. Apply the following 3-phase voltages to the relay main ac V terminals:
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V 0
Ph B: 702, 37.4 V -152.5
Ph C: 703, 37.4 V +152.5
Ph N: 704
3. Connect variable single-phase current source (lagging phase-to-phase fault
voltage by 80) to the relay main line current terminals (Jumper Terminals
716 & 720):
Ph B-C: 715 – 719, 1.5 A -170
Observe 21P2 Alarm = Low

4. Increase current.
At 2.23 to 2.45 A (expect 2.34 A):
21P2 Alarm = High
5. Turn off voltage and current sources.
End of 21P2 test.
21N2 Ground Zone 2 Phase-to-Neutral Under Impedance

Distance Test
Settings
• Positive Sequence Secondary Line Impedance (100% of line) = 5.9 Ω
• Positive Sequence Line Angle (Z1) = 80o
• 21N2 = 8 Ω (Maximum Reach = 125% of line at maximum torque angle
of 80o) compensated as per 21N calculations to: 12.55Ω 76.5o
• Resistive Component compensated to: 9.41Ω 3.5o
• Time Delay = 0 (expect 1.3 cycles, 22 ms or less)
• 3I0 Current Supervision = 1.5 A (minimum zero sequence current to allow
21N2 to operate)
• I Phase Current Supervision = 1.5 A (minimum phase current to allow 21N2
to operate)
21N# - Zan
50 Ia
138
50N 3IO
Directional Element N - Zone #
21N# - Zbn
50 Ib
139 141 0 TN#
50N 3IO 142 Out 1
Directional Element 60 4ms 0
21N# - Zcn
21N
50 Ic Generic Phase Distance
140 Logic (# = any zone)
50N 3IO
Directional Element
Figure 9.12: Ground Distance Logic (21N)
This test demonstrates testing a single line (Phase A) to a ground fault.
Preliminary calculations
Since this is a single-phase test, use the compensated impedance value calcu-
lated above; the calculated fault impedance Zfault is:
V fault (31)
Z fault = --------------
-
I fault

The minimum single-phase current required is:

(Remember: Testing single-phase, so need to exceed the greater of Iphase and
3Io supervision settings; add 5% to ensure the minimum supervision logic is
high for this test):
(32)
IMin = (Greater of Iphase and 3Io Supervision)x105% = 1.5x1.05 = 1.58A
This element has been set for Quadrilateral characteristic.
21N2 Reactive Test Procedure

Monitor: 21N2 Zone 2 Alarm
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V 0
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V -120
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V +120
Ph N: 704
3. Connect single-phase current source to the relay terminals.
Ph A: 711 --- 712, 1.58 A -76.5
Observe 21N2 Alarm = Low
4. Reduce Phase A voltage.
At 18.8 to 20.8 V (expect 19.8 V):
21N Zone 2 Alarm = High (After 400 ms: 21N2 Trip = High)
21N2 Resistive Test Procedure

Monitor: 21N2 Zone 2 Alarm
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V 0
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V -120
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V +120
Ph N: 704
3. Connect single -phase current source to the relay terminals.
Ph A: 711 --- 712, 1.58 A +3.5
Observe 21N2 Alarm = Low
4. Reduce Phase A voltage.
At 15.6 to 14.2 V (expect 14.9 V).
21N2 Pickup = High
After 400 ms: 21N2 Alarm = High
Testing the Zone 2 Neutral Time Delay

1. Monitor (Timer Stop) on normally open Output Contact 10.

2. Set timer to start from single-phase current transition (i.e. current off to on).
3. Apply the following 3-phase voltages to the relay terminals.
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V 0
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V -120
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V +120
Ph N: 704
4. Apply single-phase current from 0 to 6.0 A to start the timer (95% of Zone
2 Reach = 119% of the line = 23.1 miles).
Ph A: 711 – 712, 6.0 A -76.5
Expected operate time = (400 ms + 1.0 to 1.3 cycle) = 417 ms (¬± 2.5%)
Note: The zone timer starts when the fault is detected; the detection time +
inherent contact time = approximately 1.0 to 1.3 cycles after fault inception.
Testing Other Zones

Test all other zones (21P3-5) and (21N1 and 21N3-5) using the same process
as the 21P1, 21P2 and 21N2 zones, except that the user needs to substitute the
impedance and timing settings for those zones.
End of 21 tests.
Load Load Encroachment function operates based on the fact that all phase-to-phase
Encroachment impedances (Zab, Zbc and Zca) are within the limited load angle area.
Test
Load Encroachment Test Procedure
1. Use the following load encroachment settings together with above 21P set-
ting.
Figure 9.13: Load Encroachment Settings
2. Apply the following 3-phase voltages to the relay main ac voltage terminals:
Ph A: 701, 62.0 V 0
Ph B: 702, 62.0 V 240
Ph C: 703, 62.0 V 120
Ph N: 704
3. Apply the following 3-phase currents to the relay main ac current terminals:

Ph A: 711 – 712, 5.4 A -30

Ph B: 715 – 716, 5.4 A 210
Ph C: 719 – 720, 5.4 A 90
4. Observe target Load Encroachment.
5. Disable Load Encroachment, repeat steps 2-3.
6. Observe 21P3 Alarm/Trip.
End of Load Encroachment test.
Switch-On-To- Switch-On-To-Fault can be configured to operate based on two methods.

Fault Test 1. Close Command (Circuit breaker close pulse)
2. Status Monitoring (Circuit breaker status)
SOTF Enable
Close Pulse Enable
Breaker Signal Close Pulse B1

B1 10ms
50 ILa RMS
<4% I nominal A1
50 ILb RMS B1
RMS fixed 50 ILc RMS
Status Montioring Enable

>4% I nominal 50 ILa RMS
50 ILb RMS
RMS fixed B1
50 ILc RMS
52A (Main) 10ms
Breaker Signal
52A (Aux) S SOTF
Enable Under Voltage Monitoring R TRIP
27 Under Voltage A1
50 ILa Trip
50 ILb Trip
C1
50 ILc Trip
50N Enable
50N Trip
21P2 Alarm
21N2 Alarm
21 Zone 2 Enable
21P3 Alarm
21N3 Alarm
21 Zone 3 Enable
From Back-up 50 Trip

Protection 50N Trip
IL2a / IL1a
2nd Harmonic
IL2b / IL1b
Block
IL2c / IL1c
2nd Harmonic Restraint Enable
Figure 9.14: Switch-On-To-Fault Logic

Switch-On-To-Fault Test Procedure for Close Command Method
Figure 9.15: Switch-On-To-Fault setting for Close Command (Offliner)
1. Objective of this test is to observe the basic operation of the logic. Disable
50, 50N, 21P2 and 21N2 functions.
2. Instantaneously, step three-phase current from 0 to 10.05 A to:
Ph-A: 711 – 712, 10.05 A30
Ph-B: 715 – 716, 10.05 A -90
Ph-C: 719 – 720, 10.05 A 150
AND
External Input- 1 from Low to High.
Analog inputs can be delayed by 1 – 3 cycles to simulate the delay in circuit
breaker operation.
3. Observe target Switch-On-To-Fault on ABC.
End of Switch-On-To-Fault Close Command test.

Switch-On-To-Fault Test Procedure for Status Monitoring Method
Figure 9.16: Switch-On-To-Fault setting for Status Monitoring (Offliner)
1. Objective of this test is to observe the basic operation of the logic. Disable
50, 50N, 21P2 and 21N2 functions.
2. During this test, the Main Breaker Status input (connected to EI-1) is used
activate the SOTF logic. Ring bus configuration shall be disabled to disa-
ble the Aux Breaker Status input.
3. Instantaneously, step three-phase current from 0 to 2.6 A to:
Ph-A: 711 – 712, 2.6 A30
AND
External Input- 1 from Low to High.
Analog inputs can be delayed by 1 – 3 cycles to simulate the delay in circuit
breaker operation.
4. Observe target Switch-On-To-Fault on ABC.
End of Switch-On-To-Fault Status Monitoring test.

68 Power Swing Settings

Set to trip for • Outer Right Blinder = 17 ohm
this test • Outer Left Blinder = -17 ohm
• Inner Right Blinder = 13 ohm
• Inner Left Blinder = -13 ohm
• Top Outer Blinder = 20 ohm
• Top Inner Blinder = 17 ohm
• Bottom Inner Blinder = -17 ohm
• Bottom Outer Blinder = - 20 ohm
• Swing timer = 1.0 second
• I1 Supervision (positive sequence current) = 3.0 A
• 3I0 Supervision = 1.0 A
Note: Out of Step Blinders are Positive Sequence Impedance Quantities.
Figure 9.17: Power Swing (68)
Because this is a Positive Sequence Impedance, perform this test as balanced
3-phase, since this is the easiest way to obtain positive sequence. The calculat-
ed Z is:
V Phase (33)
Z = ----------------
-
I Phase
where
Z - Fault Impedance
VPhase - Phase Voltage
IPhase - Phase Current
The minimum 3-phase current required must be greater than the I1Supervision
Setting (3.0 A). Add 5% to ensure that the supervision is met:

(34)
IMin = I1Supervision x 105% = 3.0 x 1.05 = 3.15A
where
IMin - Minimum Current
I1Supervision - Positive Sequence Supervision current setting
68 Outer Right Test Procedure

Monitor:
Outer Blinder Alarm Contact
14 with an ohmmeter
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V 0
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V -120
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V +120
Ph N: 704
3. Connect 3-phase current sources (3.15 A in phase with voltages) to the relay
terminals:
Ph A: 711 – 712, 3.15 A 0
Ph B: 715 – 716, 3.15 A -120
Ph C: 719 – 720, 3.15 A +120
Observe
Outer Blinder Alarm = Low
Contact 14 = Open
4. Simultaneously increase (ramp up) 3-phase currents.
At 3.72 to 4.10 A (expect 3.91A):
Outer Blinder Alarm = High
Contact 14 = Closed
End of 68 Outer test.
68 Inner Left Test Procedure

Monitor:
Inner Blinder Alarm.
Output Contact 15 with an ohmmeter.
2. Apply balanced 3-phase nominal voltages (66.4 V) to the relay terminals:
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V 0
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V -120
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V +120
Ph N: 704

3. Connect 3-phase current sources (3.15 A 180 from voltages) to the relay
terminals.
Ph A: 300 –301, 3.15 A 180
Ph B: 302 –303, 3.15 A +60
Ph C: 304 –305, 3.15 A -60
Observe 68 InnBlinder Alarm = Low
Contact 13 = Open
4. Simultaneously increase (ramp up) 3-phase currents.
At 4.86 to 5.36 A (expect 5.11 A):
Inner Blinder Alarm = High
Contact 15 = Closed
Testing the 68 Swing Timer Delay

1. Monitor (Timer Stop) on normally open Output Contact 13 (219 – 21A).
2. Test at impedance between Inner and Outer Right Blinders = 15 0
3. Apply balanced 3-phase voltages (66.4 V) to the relay terminals.
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V 0
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V -120
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V +120
Ph N: 704
4. Apply 3-phase currents from 0 to 5.43 A to start the timer.
Ph A: 711 – 712, 5.43 A 0
Ph B: 715 – 716, 5.43 A -120
Ph C: 719 – 720, 5.43 A120
Expect Observation:
68 Power Swing = Low
5. Turn off signal and repeat 3.
6. Apply 3-phase currents from 0 to 3.43A, then increase them by 1A to 4.43A,
this will start the timer.
Ph A: 711 – 712, 4.43 A0
Ph B: 715 – 716, 4.43 A-120
Ph C: 719 – 720, 4.43 A 120
Expect Observation:
Inner Blinder Alarm = Low
68 Power Swing = Low
7. Wait more than 1 second, then ramp all three phase currents by 1A to 5.43A.
Ph A: 711 – 712, 5.43 A 0
Ph B: 715 – 716, 5.43 A -120

Ph C: 719 – 720, 5.43 A 120

Expect Observation:
68 Power Swing = High
End of 68 Swing Timer test.
50N/51N Neutral Neutral Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Test

Overcurrent
Settings
Test
• Both Non-directional
• 50N Pickup = 10.0 A
• 51N Pickup = 1.0 A
• Time Curve = IEEE Moderately Inverse
A = 0.0103
B = 0.0228
p = 0.02
TMS = 3.0
Figure 9.18: Neutral Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Logic (50N/51N)
50N and 51N Test Procedure

Monitor:
51N Alarm
Output Contact 11 (50N Trip)
2. Apply single-phase current to the relay terminals as follows:
Ph A: 711 - 712, 0.5 A
3. Slowly ramp the current up.
At 0.95 to 1.05 A (expect 1.0 A):

51N Alarm = High

4. Continue to raise current.
At 9.5 to 10.5 A (expect 10.0 A):
50N Trip = High
Contact 11 = Closed
5. Turn current off.
51N Alarm = Low
50N Trip = Low
Timing Test
1. Monitor (Timer Stop) on Output Contact 11.
2. Set timer start from single-phase 0.0 A to 4.00 A transition (this equates to
4x pickup).
Time Delay (35)

A
= TMS  B + --------------------------------------
p
 I Multiple  – 1
0.0103 0.0103
= 3  0.0228 + -------------------- = 3  0.0228 + ---------------- = 1.168s
4
0.02
–1 0.0281
where
TMS - 3.0
IMultiple - 4.0
3. Inject fault.
Observe Relay Target: “51N Trip”
End of 50N/51N test.
To test the 50G/51G element, perform the same test as the 50N/51N
test. Instead of injecting current on 711-712 (Ph A), inject current on
723-724 (I1G). Before testing, ensure the 50G/51G settings and out-
put matrix mapping are the same as the 50N/51N.

50/51 Phase Phase Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Test

Overcurrent
Test Settings
• Only 51 Non-directional
• 50 Pickup = 15.0 A
• 51 Pickup = 1.5 A
• Time Curve = IEC Very Inverse
A = 13.5
B = 0.00
p = 1.0
TMS = 0.5
Figure 9.19: Phase Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Logic (50/51)
50 and 51 Test Procedure

Monitor:
51 Alarm.
Output Contact 11 (50 Trip).
2. Apply single-phase current to the relay terminals.
Ph A: 711 --- 712, 0.5 A
3. Slowly ramp up the current.
At 1.43 to 1.58 A (expect 1.5 A):
51 Alarm = High
4. Continue to raise current.
At 14.3 to 15.8 A (expect 15 A):
50 Trip = High
Contact 11 = Closed
51 Alarm = Low
50 Trip = Low

51 Timing Test
4x pickup).
3. Inject fault.
A
Time Delay = TMS  B + -------------------------------------
p
 I multiple  – 1
13.5 13.5
= 0.5  0.00 + -------------- = 0.5  0.00 + ---------- = 2.25s (36)
1
4 –1 3
Observe Relay Target: “51 Trip on A”
51 Directional Test
Settings
• 51 Settings: directional/forward (if directional α = -170º, β = 180º)
• Line Angle = 80 (i.e. current lags voltage by 80)
Note: Operating Range = ± 90 from line angle
51P Forward
266
51P Reverse
278 51P directional control
267
Non-directional
50P Forward
268
279 50P directional control
50P Reverse
269
Non-directional
Vpos Memory 51N Forward

FORWARD
270
ILpos REVERSE 280 51N directional control
51N Reverse
264 271
59 Vpos Main (2 volts RMS fixed)
Non-directional
50N Forward
265 Non-directional 272
50 ILpos (4% I nominal RMS fixed)
50N Reverse
281 50N directional control
273
Non-directional
46-51 Forward
274
282 46-51 directional control
46-51 Reverse
275
Non-directional
46-50 Forward
276
46-50 Reverse
283 46-50 directional control
277
Non-directional
Figure 9.20: Directional Element Logic

51 Directional Test Procedure

Monitor: 51 Pickup Alarm
2. Apply single-phase polarizing voltage to:
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V  0º
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V  -120º
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V  120º
Ph N: 704
3. Apply single-phase current at line angle to:
Ph A: 711 --- 712, 2.0 A -80
Observe 51 Pickup Alarm = High
4. Slowly ramp the current phase angle in negative direction (i.e. more lag):
At -165 to -175 (expect -170):
51 Pickup Alarm = Low
5. Restore current to line angle (-80):
Observe 51 Pickup Alarm = High
6. Slowly ramp the current phase angle in positive direction (i.e. less lag):
At +5 to +15 (expect +10):
51 Pickup Alarm = Low
7. Turn off voltage and current sources.
End of 50/51 test.
51 Reset Time Test

The Reset Time is the equivalent of the electro-mechanical disk reset time.
Settings
• Non-Directional
• Pickup = 1.5A
• IEC Very Inverse:
A = 13.5
B=0
p = 1.0
• TMS = 0.50
• TR = 0.10
For the initial fault, use equation (36) to calculate the trip time.
When the magnitude of current drops below the pickup value, it has a disk reset
time following the formula (37):

TR
Reset Time = TMS  -----------------------------------
I 2
1 – --   (37)
 I Pickup
If second fault occurs during the resetting interval (ie. before the “disk” has re-
set), it has a shorter time to trip, calculated as follows:
Trip Time during PartialResetTime-  TripTime

= ---------------------------------------------- (38)
reset period ResetTime
Use a fault magnitude of 2A. Using formula (36), the initial time delay is cal-
culated as:
 
 13.5 
Trip Time #1 = 0.50 0 +  --------------- – 1 = 20.25s
  ------
2 1 
  1.5- 
Use a reset magnitude of 1.3A. Using formula (37), the reset time is calculated
as:
0.1
Reset Time = 0.5  ------------------------ = 0.20089s
1.3 2
1 –  -------
 1.5
Use a partial reset time of 130ms and then a second fault with same magnitude
of 2A:
0.130s
Trip Time #2 = 20.25s  ---------------------- = 13.10s
 0.20089s

Test Procedure
Use a state-simulation (shown in timing diagram below), based on the prelim-
inary calculations, with four states to test the 51 Reset time:
• Pre-fault of 1A
• Fault #1 with magnitude 2A and expected trip time of 20.25s
• Partial reset time of 130ms
• Fault #2 with magnitude 2A and expected trip time of 13.10s
Partial Reset Time = 0.130s

Current (Amps)
Trip Time #1 = 20.25s Trip Time #2 = 13.10s

2
1.3
1
0.167 20.267 20.397 33.497
Time (seconds)
Figure 9.21: 51 Reset Time test timing diagram
1. Monitor:
In RCP monitor Metering > Logic 2
Output Contact 11
2. Apply polarizing voltage:
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V  0º
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V  -120º
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V  120º
Ph N: 704
3. Use a state simulation to transition through the following four states:
a) Inject the following single phase pre-fault for 16.7ms:

Ph A: 711 --- 712, 1.0 A 0
b) Inject the following fault. Begin timer at fault inception and stop timer
on OC11 close:
Ph A: 711 --- 712, 2.0 A 0
Expected trip time = 20.25s
c) Using the OC11 close signal, transition to the following injection for du-
ration of 130ms:
Ph A: 711 --- 712, 1.3 A 0

d) Transition to the following fault. Set timer to start at fault inception and
stop timer on OC11 close:
Ph A: 711 --- 712, 2.0 A 0
Expected trip time = 13.10s
End of 51 Reset Time Test.
A similar test procedure may be used for the 51N, 51G, 46-51 and 59N Re-
set times

46-50/46-51 Settings
Negative • Non-directional
Sequence • 46-51 Pickup = 1.0 A
Overcurrent • Time Curve = IEEE Extremely Inverse
Test
A = 5.64
B = 0.02434
p=2
TMS = 3.0
Figure 9.22: Negative Sequence Instantaneous and Time OverCurrent Logic (46-50/
46-51)
Note that positive sequence current (50ILpos), 4% of nominal current is nec-

essary to enable the directional element. This supervision can be seen on OR
265, for details see Figure 9.20: Directional Element Logic on page 9-34.
For this test inject only single-phase current. This method introduces an equal
proportion of positive and negative sequence current. This assures that there is
sufficient positive sequence current to enable directional control of the nega-
tive sequence element, if a polarizing voltage is also applied.
Positive sequence (I1), Negative Sequence (I2), Zero Sequence (3I0) are cal-
culated by using the following equations:
2 (39)
I A + aI B + a I C
- where a = 1 120
I 1 = --------------------------------------
3
2 (40)
I A + a I B + aI C
I 2 = --------------------------------------- where a = 1 120
3
3I o = I A + I B + I C (41)

where
IA - Phase A Current
IB - Phase B Current
IC - Phase C Current
Using Equation 39 notice that there is a need to triple the pickup setting current
on one phase to obtain the pickup value of negative sequence current.
For example injecting 1.0 A on Phase A only (Phase B = Phase C = 0), and with
no voltage applied, the 46-51 element becomes non-directional even though
the setting is directional:
2 (42)
1 + a 0 + a0 1
I 2 = ------------------------------- = --- = 0.33 A
3 3
46-51 Test Procedure

Monitor: 46-51 Alarm
Ph A: 711 - 712, 2.5 A
3. Slowly ramp the current up:
At 2.9 to 3.1 A (expect 3.0 A):
46-51 Pickup Alarm = High
4. Turn current source off.
46-51 Timing Test

4x pickup).
A
Time Delay = TMS  B + --------------------------------------
p
 I Multiple  – 1
5.64- = 3.0  0.02434 + 5.64

= 3.0  0.02434 + ------------- ---------- = 1.201s
2 15 (42)
4 –1
3. Inject fault.
Observe Relay Target: “46-51 Trip”
End of 46-51 test.

46 Broken Settings
Conductor Test • I2/I1 Pickup = 25%
• Under Current = 0.50 A
• Pickup Delay = 5.00 s
46BC Test Procedure

Monitor:
46BC Trip.
Output Contact 12 (46BC Trip).
2. Apply the following balanced three phase currents to the relay terminals:
Ph A: 711 --- 712, 0.75 A 0°
Ph B: 715 --- 716, 0.75 A -120°
Ph C: 719 --- 720, 0.75 A 120°
3. Reduce Phase A current to 0 A.
Observe Relay Target, “46BC Trip”.
4. Return Phase A current to 0.75A 0°.
5. Apply the following unbalanced three phase currents to the relay terminals:
Ph A: 711 --- 712, 0.58 A 0°
Ph B: 715 --- 716, 0.41 A -136°
Ph C: 719 --- 720, 0.51 A 135°
I2 = 0.120 A
I1 = 0.489 A
I2/I1 = 24.5%
6. Monitor the 46BC Trip on the Metering screen. 46BC should not trip since
I2/I1 does not exceed 25%.
46BC Timing Test

2. Apply the following balanced three phase currents to the relay terminals:
Ph A: 711 --- 712, 0.75 A 0°
Ph B: 715 --- 716, 0.75 A -120°
Ph C: 719 --- 720, 0.75 A 120°
3. Set the timer to start on Phase A current transition from 0.75A to 0A.
4. Reduce Phase A current to 0 A.
Observe Relay Target, “46BC Trip” after 5.00s pickup delay.
End of 46BC Test.

Change Setting For the next group of tests using the Acceptance Test file change to Setting
Group to 2 Group 2.
1. In Relay Control Panel access Utilities > Settings Group.
2. Select New Settings Group: 2 in the picklist and then save
3. The Current Settings Group will change to 2.
60 Loss of Settings
Potential (LOP) • Voltage = 0.75 per unit phase-to-neutral fixed (In this case minimum op-
Test erate = 0.75 per unit = 0.75 * Vnominal = 0.75 * 66.4 V = 49.8 V)
• I1 Blocking = 10.0 A (positive sequence current that blocks LOP if exceed-
ed)
• 3I0 Blocking = 1.0 A (zero sequence current that blocks LOP if exceeded)
• Neg. Seq. Monitoring = disabled
27 VLc (0.75 pu fixed)

59 VLc (0.1 pu fixed) 0 60 LOP
dVpos/dt > 3V/cycle 17ms
dVpos/dt < -3V/cycle
ABS | dIpos/dt | > 0.1A/cycle 0 5ms

20ms 12ms
Negative Sequence Monitoring
V2 > Vnps
I2 < Inps
50 Ipos
50 3I0
50 ILA (4% I nominal)

50 ILB (4% I nominal)
50 ILC (4% I nominal)
Figure 9.23: Loss of Potential Logic (60)
60 Test Procedure
1. In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering > Logic 3
Monitor: 60 LOP
2. Apply balanced 3-phase nominal voltages (66.4 V) to the relay terminals:
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V 0o
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V -120o
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V +120o
Ph N: 704
3. Connect 3-phase current sources (0.5 A) to the relay terminals (must be
greater than 0.2 A (4% I nominal) to enable due to low set supervision, for
details see Figure 9.23: Loss of Potential Logic (60) on page 9-42).
Ph A: 711– 712, 0.5 A 0o
Ph B: 715 – 716, 0.5 A -120o
Ph C: 719 – 720, 0.5 A +120o
Observe: 60 Alarm = Low

4. Instantaneously reduce single-phase voltage to 48 V or less.

60 LOP = High
Contact 24 Closed
Testing the LOP I1 Supervision:

1. Restore 3-phase voltages to 66.4 V.
Observe 60 Alarm = Low
Contact 2 = Open
2. Increase balanced 3-phase currents to 10.1 A per phase.
3. Reduce single-phase voltage to 0.
Observe 60 Alarm remains low
Observe Contact 2 remains open
4. Reduce currents to 0.
Testing the LOP 3IO Supervision

1. Restore 3-phase voltages to 66.4 V.
Contact 2 = Open
2. Increase any single-phase current to 1.1 A.
3. Reduce single-phase voltage to 0.
Observe 60 Alarm remains low.
Observe Contact 2 remains open.
4. Reduce all sources to 0.
Testing Negative Seq. Supervision

1. Instantaneously, apply following signals
Voltages:
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V  0
Ph B: 702, 0 V
Ph C: 703, 0 V
Ph N:704
Currents:
Ph A: 711 – 712, 0.5A  0
Ph B: 715 – 716, 0.5A  -120
Ph C: 719 – 720, 0.5A  +120
3. Change settings as given below.
Enable Neg. Seq. Monitoring
Vnps = 10.0 V
Inps = 0.5 A

4. Repeat, step 1.
Observe 60 Alarm = High
End of 60 test.
27 Settings
Undervoltage • Main: AND (3-Phase Undervoltage)
Test • Auxiliary: AND (Aux. Voltage Input in System Parameters is set to 1
Phase)
• Main and Aux Pickup: 30 V
• Time Delay: 0.01 second Undervoltage Logic (27)
27 Test Procedure
Monitor:
27 Main Trip (Output 22)
27 Aux Trip (Output 23)
Main Ph A: 701, 66.4 V 0o
Main Ph B: 702, 66.4 V -120o
Main Ph C: 703, 66.4 V 120o
Main Ph N: 704
Aux Ph A: 601, 66.4 V 0o
Aux Ph N: 604
Observe:
27 Main Trip = Low
27 Aux Trip = Low
3. Reduce A Phase voltage.
At 31.0 to 29.0 V (expect 30 V):
27 Aux Trip = High
Output 23 closed
27 Main Trip remains Low Output 22 open

4.With A Phase voltage still reduced, reduce B and C phase V:

At 31 to 29 V (expect 30 V):
27 Aux Trip = High
27 Main Trip = High
Output 23 closed
End of 27 test.
59 Overvoltage Settings
Test • Main 1 & 2: AND (3-Phase Overvoltage)
• Auxiliary 1&2: OR (Single-Phase Overvoltage - 1 phase connected)
• Main-1 & 2 and Aux-1 & 2 Pickup: 72 V
• Time Delay: 0.05 second
Figure 9.24: Overvoltage Logic (59)
59 Test Procedure
1. In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering> Logic2.
Monitor:
59-1 Main Trip
59-2 Main Trip
59-1 Aux Trip
59-2 Aux Trip

Monitor contacts:
Output 16 (59-1 Main Trip)
Output 17 (59-2 Main Trip)
Output 18 (59-1 Aux Trip)
Output 19 (59-2 Aux Trip)
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V 0o
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V 120o
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V 120o
Ph N: 704
Observe:
59-1 Main Trip = Low
59-2 Main Trip = Low
59-1 Aux Trip = Low
59-2 Aux Trip = Low
3. Increase A Phase voltage:
At 70.0 to 74.0 V (expect 72 V):
59-1&2 Aux Trip = High
Output 18 &19 = Closed
59-1&2 Main Trip remains Low
Contact 16 & 17 = Open
4. With A Phase voltage still increased, increase B and C phase Voltage. At
70 to 74 V (expect 72 V):
59-1&2 Aux Trip = High
59-1&2 Main Trip = High
Contact 16 & 17 = Closed
End of 59 test.
50BF (Breaker Settings - change to Settings group 4

Fail) and 50LS
Main:
(Low Set
Overcurrent) • 50LS Pickup: 1.0 A
Tests • Time Delay: 0.00 seconds
• Breaker Current Pickup: 5.0A
• 50BF Time Delay 1: 1.0 seconds
• Breaker Failure Initiate:
• Internal: Output Matrix BFI mapped to 50LS Main
• External: VI2 is enabled on 3 Phase Main
• Output Matrix:

• Assign Output 22 to 50BF Main-1 Trip

• Assign Output 23 to 50BF Main-2 Trip
Auxiliary:
• 50LS Pickup: 1.0 A
• Time Delay: 0.00 seconds
• Breaker Current Pickup: 2.0A
• Breaker Failure Initiate:
• Internal: Output Matrix BFI mapped to 50LS Aux
• External: VI3 is enabled on 3 Phase Auxiliary
• Output Matrix:
• Assign Output 24 to 50BF Aux-1 Trip
• Assign Output 25 to 50BF Aux-2 Trip
Pro tec tion Sch e me = 1 Ph as e
Pro tec tion Sch e me = 1 /3 Ph ase M ain Ext erna l

3 Ph ase In itiat e 5 0 I 1a > B re ake r
M ain Ext erna l C urren t P ickup

A P ha se Initia te
5 0B F In it ia tio n (Ou tp ut m atrix)
Sin gle Ph as e
T rip Picku p D elay 1
A P ha se 5 0 I 1b > B re ake r
T rip M ain Ext erna l 50BF-1 Main Trip
C urren t P ickup
B Ph ase In itiat e
Picku p D elay 2
B Ph ase 5 0 I 1c > Brea ke r 50BF-2 Main Trip

T rip M ain Ext erna l C urren t P ickup
C P ha se Initia te
C P ha se
T rip
Figure 9.25: Main Breaker Fail Logic (50BF)
50BF and 50LS Test Procedure

1. In Relay Control Panel access relay Metering > Logic2/Logic3
Monitor:
50LS Main / 50LS Aux
50BF-1 / 2 Main Trip
50BF-1 / 2 Aux Trip
Ph A: 711 - 712, 1.8 A
Ph A: 611 - 612,1.8 A
Observe:
50LS Main = High
50LS Aux = High

3. Slowly ramp the Main and Aux currents up, at a rate of about 0.1 A per sec-
ond:
At 1.9 to 2.1 A (expect 2.0 A):
5 seconds later, Output Contact 24 = Closed (50BF-1 Aux Trip)
After an additional 5 seconds Output Contact 25 = Closed
(50BF-2 Aux Trip)
At 4.9 to 5.1 A (expect 5.0 A):
1 second later, Output Contact 22 = Closed (50BF-1 Main Trip)
After an additional 1 seconds Output Contact 23 = Closed
(50BF-2 Main Trip)
50LS Main = Low
50LS Aux = Low
Contacts 24 and 25 = Open
Contacts 22 and 23 = Open
5. Breaker Failure can also be initiated by the external signal. For testing pur-
pose, Virtual Input 2 and Virtual Input 3 can be used in 50BF setting to
simulate external BFI signal instead of using the BFI bit in the output ma-
trix. The test procedure is similar comparing with initiating the breaker
failure by 50LS. 50LS can be disabled in this test and manually latch Vir-
tual Input 2 and Virtual Input 3 using RCP before injecting current above
breaker failure pickup level.
81 Settings - change to Settings group 3

Overfrequency • 81-1 Pickup = 60.5 Hz Fixed Rate (50.5 Hz for 50 Hz Relay)
and • 81-1 Time Delay = 0.5 second
Underfrequency • 81-2 Pickup = 59.5 Hz Fixed Rate (49.5 Hz for 50 Hz Relay)
Test
• 81-2 Time Delay = 0.5 second
• 81-3 Pickup = +1.0 Hz/second
• 81-4 Pickup = -1.0 Hz/second

Requires minimum of 0.25 per unit positive sequence voltage (fixed setting) to
enable the 81 element.
Figure 9.26: Over/Under/Rate of Change of Frequency Logic (81)
81 Fixed Rate Test Procedure

Monitor:
81-1 Trip
Output Contact: 20
2. Apply single-phase nominal voltage to:
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V @ 60 Hz (@ 50 Hz for 50 Hz Relay)
81-1 = Low
81-2 = Low
3. Ramp up the voltage frequency.
At 60.499 to 60.501 Hz (50.499 to 50.501 Hz for 50 Hz relay):
81-1 = High
81-2 = Low
Contact 20 = Closed
4. Ramp down the voltage frequency.
At 59.501 to 59.499 Hz (49.501 to 49.499 Hz for 50 Hz Relay):
81-1 = Low
81-2 = High
Contact 8 = Closed
5. Turn voltage source off.
81 Rate of Change (df/dt) Test Procedure

Monitor:

81-3 Trip
Contact: 21
2. Apply single-phase nominal voltage to the relay terminals.
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V @ 60 Hz (50 Hz for 50 Hz Relay)
81-3 = Low
81-4 = Low
3. Ramp the frequency at a rate of +0.99 Hz/s for a duration of 2 seconds.
Observe:
81-3 = Low
81-4 = Low
Contact 21 = Open
4. Restore nominal frequency.
5. Ramp the frequency at a rate of +1.01 Hz/s for a duration of 2 seconds.
Observe:
81-3 = High
81-4 = Low
Contact 21 = Closed
7. Ramp the frequency at a rate of -0.99 Hz/s of a duration of 2 seconds.
Observe:
81-3 = Low
81-4 = Low
Contact 21 = Open
9. Ramp the frequency at a rate of -1.01 Hz/s for a duration of 2 seconds.
Observe:
81-3 = Low
81-4 = High
Contact 21 = Closed
81 Timing Test Procedure

1. Monitor (Timer Stop) on Output Contact 20 (81-1).
2. Set timer start on instantaneous frequency shift 66.4 V @ 60 Hz to 60.6 Hz
transition.
Expect time delay of 500 ms + approximately 1.5 cycle detection time.
3. Apply the frequency shift.
Confirm the expected time delay.
Target “81-1”
4. Move (Timer Stop) to Output Contact 20 (81-2).
5. Set timer start on instantaneous frequency shift 66.4 V @ 60 Hz to 59.4 Hz
transition.

Expect time delay of 500 ms + approximately 1.5 cycle detection time.

6. Apply the frequency shift.
Confirm the expected time delay.
Target “81-2”
End of 81 test.
25/27/59 Sync Note: Three or four voltage sources are required for this test.
Check Test The relay will create the positive sequence sync check voltage out of the sin-
gle-phase auxiliary voltage input depending on which phase is injected.
Settings - change to Settings group 5

• Maximum voltage: 70 V sec. (Maximum Positive Sequence voltage)
• Minimum voltage: 40 V sec. (Minimum Positive Sequence voltage)
• Angle Difference: 20 degrees
• Time Delay: 200 milliseconds
• Dead Main Live Aux. (DMLA): Enable
• Live Main Dead Aux. (LMDA): Enable
• Dead Main Dead Aux. (DMDA): Enable
• System Parameters: Aux. Voltage Input = 1 Phase
Figure 9.27: Synchronism Check Logic (25/27/59)
Sync Check Test Procedure

Monitor:
25/27/59 Sync Check
Output Contact: 26
Observe 25/27/59 Sync Check = High (Proves DMDA with no voltage
applied)

2. Apply voltages to the relay main voltage input terminals sufficient to create
Vpos of 66.4 V.
If only 3 voltage sources are available:
Ph A: 701, 99.6 V 0o
Ph B: 702, 99.6 V 120o
Ph C: 703, not applicable
Ph N: 704
OR
If 4 voltage sources are available:
Ph A: 701, 66.4 V 0o
Ph B: 702, 66.4 V 120o
Ph C: 703, 66.4 V 120o
Ph N: 704
Observe 25/27/59 Sync Check = High (Proves Live Main Dead Aux (LM-
DA) with only line voltage applied)
3. Turn voltage off.
4. Apply single-phase nominal voltage (66.4 V) to the relay auxiliary voltage
input terminals.
Ph A: 601, 66.4V 25o
Ph N: 604
(Short and ground unused Terminals)
Observe 25/27/59 Sync Check = High (Proves DMLA with only bus-
voltage applied)
5. Apply both sets of voltages to main and auxiliary inputs as detailed above.
Observe:
25/27/59 Sync Check = Low
6. Simultaneously rotate the auxiliary voltage phase angle in lagging direction
(i.e. toward 0).
At 21 to 19 difference (expect 20):
25/27/59 = High
Contact 26 = Closed (after 200 ms)
7. Slowly ramp down the auxiliary voltage magnitude.
At 41.0 to 39.0 V (expect 40 V):
25/27/59 = Low
Contact 26 = Open
8. Slowly ramp up the auxiliary voltage magnitude.
At 69.0 to 71.0 V (expect 70 V):
25/27/59 = Low
Contact 26 = Open
8. Turn all voltage sources off.
End of Sync Check test.

79 Recloser Settings - change to Settings group 5

Test • Number of Shots: 4
• First Reclose (T1): 1.0 seconds
• Second Reclose (T2): 5.0 seconds
• Third Reclose (T3): 10.0 seconds
• Fourth Reclose (T4): 20.0 seconds
• Close time (Tp): 0.2 second
• Lockout Reset (TD): 25 seconds
• Initiate Reset (TDI): 0.1 second
• Sync Control: Enable
• Mode: Main Only.
• Block Reset (TDB): 0.1 seconds
• Follower Time (TF): 5.0 seconds
• Breaker Out Of Service (TC): 500 seconds
• Follower Sequencer: Close after Recloser Follower Time
• Main Breaker: EI1 [52A-Main]
• Protection Scheme: 3 Phase
21P1 is set to initiate 79 in the output matrix and close output contact 9
79-3ph Main Reclose is set to close output contact 29.
Simulate a permanent 60% AB fault at the following using test set state
simulation
LN1(Binary input 1) is the trip signal sending from 21P1, it will be connected
to output 9 from relay. LN2 (Binary input 2) is the reclose signal sending from
79-3Ph Main Reclose, it will be connected to output 29 from relay.
Out1 simulates the breaker status from the test set.
State No. 1 2 3 4
State Name Prefault 1 AB Fault @ 60% Wait Breaker to Breaker Open

open
Source Ampl. Ph.Ang Freq. Ampl. Ph.Ang Ampl. Ph.Ang Ampl. Ph.Ang
VA 66.4 0 60 35.13 -40.89 35.13 40.89 66.4 0
VB 66.4 -120 60 35.13 -79.11 35.13 79.11 66.4 -120
VC 66.4 120 60 66.40 120.00 66.40 120.00 66.4 120
IA 1 -30 60 3.25 50.00 3.25 -50.00 0 0
IB 1 -150 60 3.25 130.00 3.25 130.00 0 -180
IC 1 90 60 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 120
Max. Duration 26 s 2 s 0.05 s 2 s

Trig. LN1(21P1 Trip) LN2(79 Main

Transition Reclose – 1 shot)
Digital Outputs Out 1 Out 1 Out 1
5 6 7 8
Breaker reclose to Wait breaker to Breaker open Breaker reclose to

the same fault open the same fault
Ampl. Ph.Ang. Ampl. Ph.Ang Ampl. Ph.Ang Ampl. Ph.Ang
35.13 -40.89 35.13 -40.89 66.4 0 35.13 -40.89
35.13 -79.11 35.13 -79.11 66.4 -120 35.13 -79.11
66.40 120.00 66.40 120.00 66.40 120.00 66.40 120
3.25 -50.00 3.25 -50.00 0 0 3.25 -50.00
3.25 130.00 3.25 130.00 0 -180 3.25 130.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 120 0.00 0.00
1 s 0.05 s 7s 1s
LN1(21P1 Trip) LN2(79 Main reclose LN1(21P1 Trip)

– 2 shot)
Out 1 Out 1 Out 1
9 10 11 12
Wait breaker to Breaker open Breaker reclose to Wait breaker to

open the same fault open
35.13 -40.89 66.4 0 35.13 -40.89 35.13 -40.89
35.13 -79.11 66.4 -120 35.13 -79.11 35.13 -79.11
66.40 120 66.4 120 66.40 120.00 66.40 120.00
3.25 -50.00 0 0 3.25 -50.00 3.25 -50.00
3.25 130.00 0 -180 3.25 130.00 3.25 130.00
0.00 0.00 0 120 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.05s 12s 1s 0.05s
LN2(79 Main reclose LN1(21P1 Trip)

– 3 shot)
Out 1 Out 1 Out 1

13 14 15 16
Breaker open Breaker reclose to Wait breaker to open Breaker open

the same fault
66.4 0 35.13 -40.89 35.13 -40.89 66.4 0
66.4 -120 35.13 -79.11 35.13 -79.11 66.4 -120
66.4 120 66.40 120.00 66.40 120.00 66.4 120
0 0 3.25 -50.00 3.25 -50.00 0 0
0 -180 3.25 130.00 3.25 130.00 0 -180
0 120 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 120
22s 1s 0.05s 20s
LN2(79 Main reclose LN1(21P1 Trip)

– 4shot)
Out 1 Out1 Out 1
Expected Observation
• 79 recloses (1 shot) = 1 second after the fault
• 79 Lockout at the end of the simulation

DCB Scheme The object is to evaluate whether the relay will send DCB carrier to remote
when its local is detecting the reverse fault and therefore blocks the remote end
from tripping. The overall logic diagram of DCB scheme is at the follows:
Figure 9.28: DCB Logic
Settings - change to Setting Group 7

Distance Scheme selection= DCB
Receiver 1 = EI5 (Carrier Received)
Scheme Send Pickup delay TL3 = 0
Scheme Send Dropout delay TD3 = 0.01
DCB Scheme Zone 2 Pickup delay TL2 = 0.05
DCB Scheme Receiver Dropout delay TD2 = 0.01
Keep the same line parameters and 21 setting as previously mentioned.
Output 27 mapped to Dist. Scheme Trip in output matrix and mapped to Binary
input 1 of test set to stop the sequence.
Output 28 mapped to Dist. Scheme Send in output matrix

Test case 1: Forward AB Fault @ 90% of the line

Simulate a forward fault at 90% of the line with prefault.
Fault sequence
State 1: Prefault State 2: At Fault
Va = 69.280 Va = 63.4-3.12
Vb = 69.28-120 Vb = 63.4-116.88
Vc = 69.28120 Vc = 69.28120
Ia = 50 Ia = 10-50
Ib = 5-120 Ib = 10-230
Ic = 5120 Ic = 00
1 second 0.2 second
Distance Scheme Trip (Output 27)
• 21P2 AB Alarm = High
• After around 0.05 second DCB AB Trip = High
Test case 2: Reverse AB Fault @ -20% of the line

Simulate a reverse fault at -20% of the line with prefault.
Fault sequence
State 1: Prefault State 2: At Fault
Va = 69.280 Va = 36.6-41.19
Vb = 69.28-120 Vb = 36.6-78.81
Vc = 69.28120 Vc = 69.28120
Ia = 50 Ia = 10140
Ib = 5-120 Ib = 10-40
Ic = 5120 Ic = 00
1 second 0.2 second
• DCB AB: Send = High around the same time

Test case 3: Forward Fault @ 110% of the line

Simulate a forward fault at 110% of the line with prefault, use Binary out 1
from test set to simulate carrier received signal to EI5.
Fault sequence
State 1: Prefault State 2: at fault + 20ms delay State 3: assert binary out 1
Va = 69.280 Va = 73.571.91 Va = 73.571.91

Vb = 69.28-120 Vb = 73.57-121.91 Vb = 73.57-121.91
Vc = 69.28120 Vc = 69.28120 Vc = 69.28120
Ia = 50 Ia = 10-50 Ia = 10-50
Ib = 5-120 Ib = 10-230 Ib = 10-230
Ic = 5120 Ic = 00 Ic = 00
1 second 0.02 second 0.2 second
Binary output 1 = active
Expect Observation
• Carrier Received= High
• DCB Trip = Low
Change previous state 3’s binary output 1 = low

Expect Observation
• After around 0.05 second DCB AB Trip = High
End of DCB Scheme test.
POTT Scheme POTT Scheme operation logic diagram
Figure 9.29: POTT Logic

Settings - change to Setting Group 5

Distance Scheme selection= POTT
Receiver 1 = EI5 (Carrier Received)
Scheme Send Pickup delay TL3 = 0
Scheme Send Dropout delay TD3 = 0.01
POTT Current Reversal Pickup delay TL1 = 0.05
POTT Current Reversal Dropout delay TD1 = 0.08
Test case 1: Forward AB fault at 90% of the line

Simulate a forward fault at 90% of the line with prefault, use Binary out 1 from
test set to simulate carrier received signal to EI5.
Fault sequence
State 3: at fault with binary

State 1: Prefault State 2: at fault + 20ms delay
output
Va = 69.280 Va = 63.4-3.12 Va = 63.4-3.12

Vb = 69.28-120 Vb = 63.4-116.88 Vb = 63.4-116.88
Vc = 69.28120 Vc = 69.28120 Vc = 69.28120
Ia = 50 Ia = 10-50 Ia = 1050
Ib = 5-120 Ib = 10-230 Ib = 10-230
Ic = 5120 Ic = 00 Ic = 00
1 second 0.02 second 0.2 second
Binary output 1 = active
• POTT AB: Send = High
• Carrier Received = High
• POTT AB: Trip = High
Test case 2: Current Reversal – Reverse AG fault @ -20% of the line (20%
forward on the parallel line)
Fault logic: local reverse fault will change to forward due to the parallel line’s
local breaker is open and remote breaker remains in close and feed the fault.
Fault simulation logic and relay detector setting:
In order to validate current reversal case, 50N-67F/ 50N-67R setting in the
scheme selector are used on purpose to simulate the worst case scenario.
Overcurrent carrier setting:
50N-67F: Dist.& ProLogic, 3IO=1A, Pickup delay = 0.02s
50N-67R: Dist.& ProLogic, 3IO= 1A, Pickup delay = 0.02s

Fault sequence:
State 4:
State 3:
180% forward fault
20% reverse
with binary output
State 2: fault+60ms delay
(parallel line’s
State 1: Prefault 20% reverse (waiting parallel line’s
remote end has to
fault+20ms delay local relay to trip its
wait the permissive
breaker), carrier
signal to trip its
received
breaker)
Va = 69.280 Va = 18.470 Va = 18.470 Va = 69.280

Vb = 69.28-120 Vb = 69.28-120 Vb = 69.28-120 Vb = 69.28-120
Vc = 69.28120 Vc = 69.28120 Vc = 69.28120 Vc = 69.28120
Ia = 50 Ia = 10113.45 Ia = 10113.45 Ia = 4.168-76.55
Ib = 5-120 Ib = 00 Ib = 00 Ib = 00
Ic = 5120 Ic = 00 Ic = 00 Ic = 00
1 second 0.02 second 0.06 second 0.05 second
Binary output1 = Active Binary output 1 =
active
Expected Obser- 21N4 AG Alarm = High 50N-67F=High

vation 50N-67R = High Carrier received =
Carrier received = High High
POTT send = Low POTT send = Low
POTT Trip = Low POTT Trip = Low
End of POTT test.
Weak Infeed Weak Infeed tripping operates on 4 basic conditions:

Test 1. Low Positive Sequence Voltage (27V1) or High Neutral Voltage (59V0)
2. No Zone 2 or Zone 4 reverse element picked up.
3. Loss of Potential (60) element dropped out
4. Permissive trip received from the remote end
Figure 9.30: Weak Infeed Logic
For this test apply 0 voltage and 0 current to the relay with no prefault. This
causes the first 3 conditions to be met: (27V1, NOT (Zone 2 OR Zone 4R),
NOT Loss of Potential).

In this case a Virtual Input is set up to simulate the Permissive Trip Receive.
Figure 9.31: Scheme Selector Settings (Offliner)

Weak Infeed Test Procedure

1. Activate this Virtual Input by accessing the Relay Control Panel’s Utilities
>Virtual Inputs.
2. Select Virtual Input 13 in the Virtual Input drop down list.
3. Click on the Pulse On button to execute the “PerTripRec Simulate” as
shown in the following screen shot.
Figure 9.32: Virtual Input Control
Observe Relay Target: “POTT Trip (WI): 0.0 mi.

Note: The 0.0 mi indicates that there was 0 impedance measured due to 0 line
voltage being applied.
End of Weak Infeed test.

Appendix A IED Specifications
L-PRO Model 4500 Specifications

Item Quantity/Specs Note
General
Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category III
Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2
Insulation Class Class 1
Ingress Protection IP 5X (Front Side)
Nominal Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Operate Time 1.0 to 1.3 cycles at 80% reach Including output relay operation
Power Supply Nominal Voltage:

High Range Supply Option:
110 - 250 Vdc, 100 - 240 Vac
Low Range Supply Option:
24 - 48 Vdc
Voltage Tolerance:
High Range Supply Option:
±20% for Vdc, -10%/+5% for Vac
Low Range Supply Option:
-15%/+20%
Power Consumption:
25 – 30 VA (ac)
25 – 30 W (dc)
Memory Settings and records are stored in non-volatile Records are stored in a circular buffer
memory
Sampling Rate - Analog and Digital 128 samples/cycle for recording Records up to 33rd harmonic
Inputs 8 samples/cycle for protection
Amplitude measurement accuracy +/-0.5% for 54 to 66 Hz

+/-0.5% for 44 to 56 Hz
A/D Resolution 16 bits, 65536 counts full scale
Operating Temperature -25°C to +55°C operational

-40°C to 70°C storage
Operating Humidity Up to 95% without condensation
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix A-1


IEEE Dev. 21P-1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 21N-1, For 10CT, 6PT hardware configuration: 10CT, 6PT configuration suitable for
2, 3, 4, 5, 27, 50BF, 50LS, 50/51/67, 2 x 3-phase voltage inputs for synchronizing ring bus configurations and integrated
50N/51N/67, 50G/51G/67, during re-closing HV breaker auto-recloser
46/50/51/67, 59, 59N, 60, 68, 79-1, 10 current inputs for protection
3, Sync Check, 81, Switch-On-To-
Fault, 60CTS, 46 Broken Conductor, For 5CT, 4PT hardware configuration:
Weak Infeed, Mutual Compensa- 3-phase main voltage input, 1-phase aux. volt-
tion, Virtual Inputs age input
5 current inputs for protection
ProLogicTM 24 statements per setting group 5 inputs per ProLogicTM statement
Setting Groups 8 Setting Groups 5 inputs per Group Logic statement

16 Group Logic statements per setting group
Recording
Transient (Fault) 128 s/c oscillography of all analog and User-configurable 0.2 to 10.0 seconds
external input channels Record length and 0.1 to 2 seconds
pre-fault length
Dynamic Swing 1 s/c phasor measurements of line positive User-configurable 60 – 120 seconds
sequence V and I plus frequency Pre trigger time fixed at 30 seconds
Events 250 events circular log with 1ms resolution When event auto save is enabled, a
compressed event record is created
every 250 events.
Record Capacity 80 Fault Records with 10 second length Maximum of 150 total records (Fault,
Swing and Event) is possible with
reduced record length. Fault Records
with 10 second duration are the largest
records.
Input & Output
Analog Voltage Inputs Nominal Voltage - across input channel:

2 sets of 3-phase voltage inputs Vn = 69 Vrms (120 Vrms L-L)
(6 voltage channels total)
Full Scale/Continuous:
2x Vn = 138 Vrms (240 Vrms L-L)
Maximum Over-scale Thermal Rating:

4x Vn = 276 Vrms (480 Vrms L-L) for 3
seconds
3x Vn = 207 Vrms (360 Vrms L-L) for 10
seconds
Burden:
<0.15VA @ 63.5V ac
Appendix A-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20


Analog Current Inputs Nominal Current:

10 current inputs In = 1 Arms or 5 Arms
Full Scale/Continuous:
4x In = 4 Arms or 20 Arms
Maximum full-scale rating:

40x In for 1 second symmetrical
Thermal rating:
100x In for 1 second
Burden:
<0.25 VA @ 5 Arms
<0.10 VA @ 1Arms
External Inputs 24, 16 or 8 isolated inputs 24/48/110/220 Vdc nominal options,

(depending on hardware configuration) externally wetted. All inputs can be on
continuously.
Burden:
0.02W @ 24Vdc Specified voltages are over
0.03W @ 48Vdc full ambient temperature range.
0.07W @ 125Vdc
0.14W @ 250Vdc
Isolation:
Optically isolated
Turn-on Voltage:
24 Vdc range = 19 to 20 Vdc
48 Vdc range = 38 to 40 Vdc
110/125 Vdc range = 80 to 90 Vdc
220/250 Vdc range = 165 to 180 Vdc
Output Relays (contacts) 31, 23, 15, or 7 (depending on hardware con- Externally wetted
figuration) programmable normally open out-
puts and 1 relay inoperative normally closed
output.
Make:
30 A as per IEEE C37.90
Carry (all outputs active):

8A
Break:
0.9 A at 125 Vdc resistive
0.35 A at 250 Vdc resistive
Virtual Inputs 30 Virtual Inputs
Interface & Communication
Front Display 128 x 64 pixels graphics LCD
Front Panel Indicators 22 LEDs: 17 programmable, 5 fixed Fixed: Relay Functional, Time Sync
Functional, Service Required, Test
Mode, Alarm Target
Front User Interface USB port Full Speed USB 2.0


Rear User Interface LAN Port 1: 100BASE Copper or Optical Copper: RJ-45, 100BASE-T
LAN Port 2: 100BASE Copper or Optical Optical: 100BASE-FX, Multimode ST
style connector, 1300nm
One Serial RS-485 port
SCADA Interface IEC61850 (Ethernet) or DNP3 (RS-485 or Rear port

Ethernet) or Modbus (RS-485)
IRIG-B Sync 2 IRIG-B, BNC connectors (mutually exclusive Modulated or unmodulated. Separate
use) ports.
Supported IRIG Formats: 1

The year must be set manually before
connecting IRIG source. Check the “Do
B000/B001/B002/B003/B120/B121/ not use IEEE 1344” box on Utilities >
B122/B123 Time screen in Relay Control Panel
IRIG Standard 200-041
2
IEEE 1344:1995 is only supported if
B004/B005/B124/B125 the IRIG source is configured for time
IEEE Std C37.118:2005 & 2011 offset = 0 (ie. UTC time)
IEEE Std 1344:19952
Self Checking/Relay Inoperative 1 contact Closed when relay inoperative
Physical
Weight 16 kg (approximate)
17.7 cm (6.97 in.) height x 33.95 cm (13.37 in.)

Dimensions
weight x 26.2 cm (10.31 in.) depth
Mounting Horizontal Rack Mount
Time Synchronization
External Time Source Synchronized using IRIG-B input (modulated Upon the loss of an external time
or unmodulated) or SNTP, auto detect source, the relay maintains time with a
maximum 160 seconds drift per year at
a constant temperature of 25°C. The
relay can detect loss of re-establish-
ment of external time source and auto-
matically switch between internal and
external time.
Overall L-PRO Accuracies
Current ±2.5% of inputs from 0.1 to 1.0 x nominal current (In)
± 1.0% of inputs from 1.0 to 40.0 x nominal current (In)
Voltage ± 1.0% of inputs from 0.01 to 2.0 x nominal voltage (Vn)
Impedance ±5.0% or 5 m of set value from 0.05 to 66.00 ohms secondary (0.25 to 330.00 ohms
secondary, 1 A nominal)
Directional Phase Angle ±2.0° of set value of Positive Sequence Line Angle value from 25.0° to 89.0°


Frequency Elements ±0.001 Hz (fixed level)
±0.05 Hz (df/dt)
Sync Check Elements ±0.2 degrees
Timers ±3 ms of set value
Inverse Overcurrent Timers ±2.5% or ±1 cycle of selected curve
Definite Overcurrent Timers ±2.5% or ±1 cycle non-directional
±2.5% or ±1.5 cycle directional
Frequency Timer ±2.5% of set value plus 1.25 cycles to 1.75 cycles of inherent delay (fixed level)
at 2x pickup, error <40 ms (df/dt)
at 0.1 Hz/s above pickup, error <100 ms

Type Tests
Description
Test Test Level
Type Test Test Points
Electromagnetic Compatibility
IEC 60255-26:2013 RF emissions Enclosure ports 30 - 1000 MHz, 1000MHz - 6000 MHz
Cl.No. 7.1.2
Cl.No. 7.1.3 Conducted emissions Power supply ports Class A: 0.15 - 30 MHz
IEC 60255-26:2013 ESD Enclosure contact +/- 6 kV

Cl.No. 7.2.3
Enclosure air +/- 8 kV
IEC60255-26:2013 Radiated RFI Enclosure ports 10 V/m modulated: 80 - 1000 MHz &
Cl.No. 7.2.4 1.4 - 2.7 GHz
IEC 60255-26:2013 Burst (fast transient) Signal ports +/- 4 kV @ 5 kHz

Cl.No. 7.2.5
Power Supply Ports +/- 4 kV @ 5 kHz
Earth ground ports +/- 4 kV@ 5 kHz
Communication ports +/- 2 kV @ 5 kHz
IEC 60255-26:2013 Induced (conducted) RFI Signal ports 10 Vrms: 0.150 - 80 MHz
Cl.No. 7.2.8
Power supply ports 10 Vrms: 0.150 - 80 MHz
IEC 60255-26:2013 Power frequency magnetic Enclosure 30A/m for each axis for 60s
Cl.No. 7.2.10 field 300A/m for each axis for 3s
IEC 60255-26:2013 Power frequency Binary input ports: Class A Differential = 150 Vrms
Cl.No. 7.2.10
Common = 300 Vrms
IEC 60255-26:2013 Voltage dips & interrupts ac power port 100% for 2.5 cycles, 60% for 10
Cl.No. 7.2.11 cycles, 30% for 25 cycles
100% for 250 cycles
dc power port 100% for 250 cycles
IEC 60255-26:2013 Slow Damped oscillatory Communication ports 1.0 kV Common

Cl.No. 7.2.6 wave immunity test
Signal ports 2.5 kV Common, 1 kV Diff
Power supply ports 2.5 kV Common, 1 kV Diff
Safety
IEC 60255-27:2013, HV Impulse Signal ports ±5 kV

Cl. No. 10.6.4.2
I/O ports ±5 kV
Power supply ports ±5 kV
Earth (Case ground) ±5 kV

Type Tests
Description
Test Test Level
IEC 60255-27:2013, Dielectric / HiPot Power supply ports 2 kV

Cl. No. 10.6.4.3
Signal ports 2 kV
I/O ports 2 kV
Earth (case ground) 2 kV
Output contact terminals 1 kV
IEC 60255-27:2013, Insulation Resistance Power supply ports 500 Vdc

Cl. No. 10.6.4.4
Signal ports 500 Vdc
I/O ports 500 Vdc
Earth (case ground) 500 Vdc
Environmental Tests
IEC 60068-2-30 Humidity Enclosure
IEC 60068-2-78 Damp heat steady state Enclosure 10 days

IEC 60255-1
CI. No. 10.6.5.3
IEC 60068-2-30 Cyclic temperature with Enclosure 6 days of cycles from 25oC to 55oC
IEC 60255-1 humidity at 90 to 100% Relative Humidity
CI. No. 6.12.3.7
IEC 60068-2-2 Dry Heat Storage Test Enclosure 70oC for 16 hours
IEC 60255-1
CI. No. 6.12.3.3
IEC 60068-2-2 Dry Heat Operational Test Enclosure 55oC for 16 hours
IEC 60255-1
CI. No. 6.12.3.1
IEC 60068-2-1 Cold Storage Test Enclosure -40oC for 16 hours

IEC 60255-1
CI. No. 6.12.3.4
IEC 60068-2-1 Cold Operational Test Enclosure -25oC for 16 hours

IEC 60255-1
CI. No. 6.12.3.2
IEC 60068-2-14 Change of Temperature Enclosure 5 cycles of change of temperature

IEC 60255-1 from -25oC to 55oC.
CI. No. 6.12.3.5

Type Tests
Description
Test Test Level
Mechanical
IEC 60255-21-2 Shock and Bump Enclosure Shock Response:

IEC/EN 60068-2-27 5g, 11ms pulse width, 1/2 sine wave,
3 shocks/direction, 2 directions/axis,
36 shocks total
Shock Withstand:
15g, 11ms pulse width, 1/2 sine wave,
3 shocks/direction, 2 directions/axis,
18 shocks total
Bump:
10g, 16ms pulse width, 1/2 sine wave,
1000 bumps/direction, 2 directions/
axis, 6000 bumps total
IEC/EN 60255-21-1 Vibration Enclosure Vibration Response Class 1:

IEC/EN 60068-26 0.5 g, 10 Hz to 150 Hz, 1.0 octave/
min, 1 sweep/axis
Vibration Endurance Class 1:

1.0 g, 10 Hz to 150 Hz, 1.0 octave/
min, 20 sweep/axis
IEC 60255-21-3 Seismic Enclosure Class 1:

5-35 Hz, 1 sweep cycle/axis

A.1 Distance Element Operating Time Curves at

Nominal Frequency
Figure A.1 through A.6 show operating times for the relay distance elements.
The diagrams show operating times at each test point including output contact
operate time.
Faults were applied at a location representing a percentage of the Zone 1 relay
reach setting.
Tests were performed for source impedance ratios (SIR) of 0.1, 1.0, 10.0, and
30.0.
No pre-trigger load current or fault resistance was included. Operating times
are the same for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
L-PRO Phase Mho Operating Times

Phase-to-Phase Faults
1.6
1.4
1.2
1 SIR 30
Time (cycles)
SIR 10
0.8
SIR 1
0.6 SIR 0.1
0.4
0.2
0
0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
Fault Location (%of Z1 Reach)
Figure A.1: Phase Mho Operating Times Phase-to-Phase Faults

L-PRO Ground Mho Operating Times

Single Line-to-Ground Faults
1.6
1.4
1.2
1 SIR 30
Time (cycles)
SIR 10
0.8
SIR 1
0.6 SIR 0.1
0.4
0.2
0
0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
Figure A.2: Ground Mho Operating Times Single Line -to-Ground Faults
L-PRO Quadrilateral Operating Times

Single Line-to-Ground Faults
1.6
1.4
1.2
1 SIR 30
Time (cycles)
SIR 10
0.8
SIR 1
0.6 SIR 0.1
0.4
0.2
0
0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
Figure A.3: Quadrilateral Operating Times Single Line-to-Ground Faults

A.2 Frequency Element Operating Time Curves

Figure A.4: Time delay Error at 0.2 seconds, Figure A.5: Time Delay Error at
1 second and Figure A.6: Time Delay Error at 10 seconds show operating times
for the relay frequency rate of change elements at different time delay settings
and rate of change settings.
The diagrams show operating times at each test point including output contact
operate time. Operating times are the same for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Time Delay Error @ 0.2s
195
180
165
150
135
120
Delay error (ms)
105 0.1 Hz/s

1 Hz/s
90 10 Hz/s
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Hz/s Pickup Multiple
Figure A.4: Time delay Error at 0.2 seconds
Time Delay Error @ 1s
195
180
165
150
135
120
Time Delay Error (ms)
105 0.1 Hz/s

1 Hz/s
90 10 Hz/s
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Multiple of Hz/s Pickup
Figure A.5: Time Delay Error at 1 second

Time Delay Error @ 10s
195
180
165
150
135
120
Time Delay Error (ms)

105
0.1 Hz/s
1 Hz/s
90
75
60
45
30
15
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Multiple of Hz/s Pickup
Figure A.6: Time Delay Error at 10 seconds

A.3 External Input Pickup Filter

To guarantee security from spurious voltage pulses an external input pickup
filter setting has been introduced. This setting is made in Relay Control Panel
under, Utilities>Setup>External Inputs. The setting is an integer number rep-
resenting the number of samples in a packet of 16 that must be recognized by
the DSP as high before an External Input status is changed from low to high.
This will affect the pulse width required for the External Inputs to be detected.
Below is a table describing the pulse widths for possible and definite defection
for each setting.
Input Pulse Width required

Pickup Filter Input Pulse Width required for
for EI to be definitely
Count EI to be possibly detected
detected
4 0.521 ms 0.911 ms
5 0.651 ms 1.1172 ms
6 0.781 ms 1.432 ms
7 0.911 ms 1.693 ms
8 1.042 ms 1.953 ms
9 1.172 ms 2.214 ms
10 1.302 ms 2.474 ms
11 1.432 ms 2.734 ms
12 1.563 ms 2.995 ms
13 1.693 ms 3.255 ms
14 1.823 ms 3.516 ms
15 1.953 ms 3.776 ms
16 2.083 ms 4.036 ms
For a setting of 6, it will take between 0.781 and 1.432 ms for an External Input
to be declared as high. The default setting is 4.

Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges
B.1 Settings and Ranges
The Offliner software provides a means for the user to view and print a com-
pact summary of the settings defined in each Setting Group, for a given device.
The user can view the summary by selecting the Settings Summary option (last
item) under each Setting Group listed in the Offliner application.
The summary includes general data from the Relay Identification screen, as
well as all the user-defined names of inputs (e.g. current, voltage, virtual) and
control outputs, and Group Logic definitions. It also includes all the user-de-
fined settings along with their respective units and permissible value range.
The following pages illustrate the Default Settings Summary for Settings
Group 1.
L-PRO Settings Summary - Setting Group 1 [Setting Group 1]
Name Symbol/Value Unit Range
Relay Identification
Settings Version 604
Ignore Serial Number No
Serial Number LPRO-4500-000000-01
Unit ID UnitID
Setting Name Default Settings
Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz
Analog Input 10CT and 6PT
Digital I/O 24DI and 32DO
Comments Comments
Date Created-Modified 2017-09-07 13:30:50
Station Name Station Name
Station Number 1
Location Location
Line D245
Analog Input Names
V1A Main Voltage A
V1B Main Voltage B
V1C Main Voltage C
V2A Auxiliary Voltage A
V2B Auxiliary Voltage B
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix B-1

V2C Auxiliary Voltage C
I1A Main Line Current A
I1B Main Line Current B
I1C Main Line Current C
I1G Main Neutral Current
I2A Aux. Line Current A
I2B Aux. Line Current B
I2C Aux. Line Current C
I2G Aux. Neutral Current
3I01 3I0 Current 1
3I02 3I0 Current 2
External Input Names
1 EI Spare 1
2 EI Spare 2
3 EI Spare 3
4 EI Spare 4
5 EI Spare 5
6 EI Spare 6
7 EI Spare 7
8 EI Spare 8
9 EI Spare 9
10 EI Spare 10
11 EI Spare 11
12 EI Spare 12
13 EI Spare 13
14 EI Spare 14
15 EI Spare 15
16 EI Spare 16
17 EI Spare 17
18 EI Spare 18
19 EI Spare 19
20 EI Spare 20
21 EI Spare 21
22 EI Spare 22
23 EI Spare 23
24 EI Spare 24
Output Contact Names
Output 1 Relay Inoperative
Appendix B-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

Output 2 Out Spare 2
Output Contact Dropout Timers
Output1 (Relay Inoperative) 0.10 s 0.00 to 20.00
Output2 (Out Spare 2) 0.10 s 0.00 to 20.00

Output Contact Reset Type
Output 1 Self Reset
Output 2 Self Reset
Output 3 Self Reset
Output 4 Self Reset
Output 5 Self Reset
Output 6 Self Reset
Output 7 Self Reset
Output 8 Self Reset
Output 9 Self Reset
Output 10 Self Reset

Output Contact Reset
Reset <Unused = 0>
Control Command Names
SPC 1 SPC 1
SPC 2 SPC 2
SPC 3 SPC 3
SPC 4 SPC 4
SPC 5 SPC 5
SPC 6 SPC 6
SPC 7 SPC 7
SPC 8 SPC 8
SPC 9 SPC 9
SPC 10 SPC 10
SPC 11 SPC 11
SPC 12 SPC 12
Virtual Input Names
VI 1 Virtual Input 1

Target Reset
Reset <Unused=0>
Target
Target LED 1 Latched

Setting Group Names
Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1
System Parameters
Base MVA 100.00 MVA 1.00 to 2000.00
Phase Rotation ABC
Aux Voltage Input Three Phase
Target Latching Enabled
Fault Location Display Enabled
Fault Location Initiated by 21 Disabled

Alarm
Ring Bus/One and Half Breaker Disabled

Configuration (Aux CT Line Input)
CT Secondary 5 A 5A or 1A
Main Phase CT Primary 1200.00 A 1.00 to 30000.00
Main Phase CT Turns Ratio 240.00 :1 1.00 to 30000.00
Auxiliary Phase CT Primary 1200.00 A 1.00 to 30000.00
Auxiliary Phase CT Turns Ratio 240.00 :1 1.00 to 10000.00
Main Neutral CT Primary 1200.00 A 1.00 to 30000.00
Main Neutral CT Turns Ratio 240.00 :1 1.00 to 30000.00
Auxiliary Neutral CT Primary 1200.00 A 1.00 to 30000.00
Auxiliary Neutral CT Turns Ratio 240.00 :1 1.00 to 30000.00

3I0 Input #1 CT Primary 1200.00 A 1.00 to 30000.00
3I0 Input #1 CT Ratio 240.00 :1 1.00 to 30000.00
3I0 Input#2 CT Primary 1200.00 A 1.00 to 30000.00
3I0 Input#2 CT Ratio 240.00 :1 1.00 to 30000.00
CCVT Transient Compensation on Disabled

All 21 Devices
Main PT Primary 230.00 kV (Ph-Ph) 1.00 to 2000.00
Main PT Secondary 115.00 V (Ph-Ph) 100.00 to 150.00
Main PT Turns Ratio 2000.00 :1 1.00 to 20000.00
Auxiliary PT Primary 230.00 kV (Ph-Ph) 1.00 to 2000.00
Auxiliary PT Secondary 115.00 V (Ph-Ph) 100.00 to 150.00
Auxiliary PT Turns Ratio 2000.00 :1 1.00 to 20000.00
Line to Line Voltage 230.00 kV Pri 1.00 to 2000.00
Distance Unit Selection km
Record Length
Fault Record Length 0.5 s 0.2 to 10.0
Prefault Time 0.20 s 0.10 to 0.40
Swing Rcd. Length 120 s 60 to 120
Event Auto Save Disabled
Setting Group 1 [Setting Group 1]
Setting Group Comments: Default settings
Line Parameters
Line Length 100.00 km 0.50 to 2000.00
Positive Sequence Impedance 10.00 ohm 0.01 to 66.00

(Z1)
Positive Sequence Angle (Z1) 80.0 deg 5.0 to 89.0
Zero Sequence Impedance (Z0) 30.00 ohm 0.01 to 300.00
Zero Sequence Angle (Z0) 80.0 deg 5.0 to 89.0
Series Compensation Disabled
% Compensation 40.0 % 0.0 to 70.0
K0 Override Disabled
K0 Magnitude 0.67 - 0.00 to 10.00
K0 Angle 0.0 deg -180.0 to 180.0
KM1 Mutual Line 1 Disabled
KM1 Magnitude 1.00 - 0.10 to 2.00
KM1 Angle 0.0 deg -25.0 to 25.0
KM2 Mutual Line 2 Disabled
KM2 Magnitude 1.00 - 0.10 to 2.00
KM2 Angle 0.0 deg -25.0 to 25.0

Scheme Selector
Protection Scheme 3 Phase
Distance Scheme Selection Basic
Use Zone 2 Starter
Communication Receiver1 EI 1 [EI Spare 1]
Communication Receiver2 <disabled>
Scheme Send Pickup Delay (TL3) 0.000 s 0.000 to 1.000
Scheme Send Dropout Delay 0.100 s 0.000 to 1.000

(TD3)
POTT Current Reversal Pickup 0.000 s 0.000 to 0.500

Delay (TL1)
POTT Current Reversal Dropout 0.100 s 0.000 to 0.500

Delay (TD1)
DCB Scheme Zone 2 Pickup 0.050 s 0.005 to 0.500

Delay (TL2)
DCB Scheme Receiver Dropout 0.100 s 0.000 to 0.500

Delay (TD2)
DEF Scheme Selection Disabled
Communication Receiver3 <disabled>
DEF Scheme Send Pickup Delay 0.100 s 0.000 to 1.000

(TL6)
DEF Scheme Send Dropout Delay 0.200 s 0.000 to 1.000

(TD6)
50N-67F - Overcurrent Carrier Trip
Action <disabled>
Direction Forward
3I0 Pickup 1.0 A 0.2 to 50.0
Pickup Delay 0.020 s 0.005 to 99.990
50N-67R - Overcurrent Carrier Block
Action <disabled>
Direction Reverse
3I0 Pickup 1.0 A 0.2 to 50.0
Pickup Delay 0.020 s 0.005 to 99.990
52 - Breaker Status
Main Breaker EI 3 [EI Spare 3]
Aux. Breaker <disabled>
Main Breaker Pole A <Unused = 0>
Main Breaker Pole B <Unused = 0>
Main Breaker Pole C <Unused = 0>
Aux. Breaker Pole A <Unused = 0>
Aux. Breaker Pole B <Unused = 0>
Aux. Breaker Pole C <Unused = 0>

Directional Element
Directional Element Override Disabled
Negative Seq. Directional Element Enabled
V2 Sensitivity Level 0.5 V 0.5 to 5.0
I2 Sensitivity Level 0.2 A 0.1 to 1.0
Zero Seq. Directional Element Enabled
3V0 Sensitivity Level 1.0 V 1.0 to 10.0
3I0 Sensitivity Level 0.2 A 0.2 to 2.0
Protection Summary
21P, Zone 1 Disabled
Load Encroachment Disabled
21N, Zone 1 Disabled
68 Off
Switch-On-To-Fault (SOTF) Disabled
Weak Infeed Disabled
25 Sync Check Disabled
Dead Main Live Aux (DMLA) Disabled
Live Main Dead Aux (LMDA) Disabled
Dead Main Dead Aux (DMDA) Disabled
79-3Ph Disabled
79-1Ph Disabled
59-1 Main Disabled
59-2 Main Disabled
59-1 Aux Disabled
59-2 Aux Disabled
59N Definite Time Delay Disabled
59N Inverse Time Delay Disabled
27 Main Disabled
27 Aux Disabled
60 Disabled

60 CTS Main Disabled
60 CTS Aux Disabled
81-1 Disabled
81-2 Disabled
81-3 Disabled
81-4 Disabled
50LS Main (Input 1) Disabled
50LS Aux (Input 2) Disabled
50BF Main Disabled
50BF Aux Disabled
50 Disabled
51 Disabled
50N Disabled
51N Disabled
50G Disabled
51G Disabled
46-50 Disabled
46-51 Disabled
46-BC Disabled
21P - Phase Distance: Zone 1
21P - Zone 1 Disabled
Type Quadrilateral
Forward Reach 8.00 ohm 0.00 to 66.00
Left Reach (R1) 10.00 ohm 0.05 to 66.00
Right Reach (R2) 10.00 ohm 0.05 to 66.00
Mho Char. Angle 90.0 deg 70.0 to 140.0
Pickup Delay 0.00 s 0.00 to 99.99
Id Supervision 1.0 A 0.2 to 50.0
Type Quadrilateral

Type Quadrilateral
Reverse Reach 0.00 ohm 0.00 to 66.00
Type Quadrilateral
Type Quadrilateral
Load Impedance (common for 21N, 21P, and 68)
Load Resistance (R) 20.0 ohm -150.0 to 150.0
Load Reactance (X) 15.0 ohm -150.0 to 150.0
Load Encroachment (common for 21P and 68)
Load Encroachment Disabled
Impedance LHS 12.00 ohms secondary 0.01 to 66.00
Impedance RHS 12.00 ohms secondary 0.01 to 66.00
Upper Angle LHS 150.0 degrees 90.1 to 179.9
Upper Angle RHS 30.0 degrees 0.1 to 89.9

Lower Angle LHS 210.0 degrees 180.1 to 269.9
Lower Angle RHS -30.0 degrees -89.9 to -0.1
Tilt Angle (21P and 21N)
21P - Phase Reactance Tilt Angle -3.0 deg -10.0 to 10.0
21N - Ground Reactance Tilt -3.0 deg -10.0 to 10.0

Angle
21N - Ground Distance: Zone 1
21N - Zone 1 Disabled
Type Quadrilateral
Ip Supervision 1.0 A 0.2 to 50.0
3I0 Supervision 1.0 A 0.2 to 50.0
Type Quadrilateral
Type Quadrilateral

Type Quadrilateral
Type Quadrilateral
68 - Power Swing Block/Trip
Mode Off
Zone 1 Blocking Disabled
Out of step Swing Timer 0.05 s 0.00 to 1.00
I1 Supervision 10.0 A 0.5 to 50.0
3Io Blocking 2.5 A 0.5 to 50.0
Blocking Reset Time 2.00 s 0.25 to 2.00
Top Blinder - Outer (X4) 27.0 ohm 18.0 to 100.0
Top Blinder - Inner (X3) 18.0 ohm -18.0 to 27.0
Bottom Blinder - Inner (X2) -18.0 ohm -27.0 to 18.0
Bottom Blinder - Outer (X1) -27.0 ohm -100.0 to -18.0
LHS Blinder - Outer (R1) -27.0 ohm -100.0 to -18.0
LHS Blinder - Inner (R2) -18.0 ohm -27.0 to 18.0

RHS Blinder - Inner(R3) 18.0 ohm -18.0 to 27.0
RHS Blinder - Outer(R4) 27.0 ohm 18.0 to 100.0
Switch-On-To-Fault (SOTF)
Switch-On-To-Fault Disabled
Breaker Signal Close Command
Close Command Pulse EI 1 [EI Spare 1]
Main Breaker Status EI 3 [EI Spare 3]
Aux Breaker Status <disabled>
Pole Dead Pickup Timer 0.2 s 0.0 to 999.9
Enable Duration 0.2 s 0.0 to 999.9
Device 50 Pickup 10.0 A 0.5 to 50.0
Device 50N Enabled Disabled
Device 50N Pickup 2.5 A 0.1 to 50.0
Device 50/50N Pickup Delay C1 0.00 s 0.00 to 0.20
Device 21 Zone-2 Disabled
Device 21 Zone-3 Disabled
Undervoltage (27) Supervision Disabled
Device 27 Pickup 25.00 V 1.00 to 120.00
Second Harmonic Restraint Enabled
I2/I1 Ratio 0.2 - 0.0 to 10.0
Weak Infeed
Weak Infeed Disabled
Device 27 V1 Pickup 51.0 V 0.0 to 69.0
Device 59 3V0 Pickup 5.0 V 0.0 to 100.0
Zone2/Zone4 Reset Delay 0.10 s 0.02 to 0.20

(TWD1)
Comm. Cycle Reset Delay 0.05 s 0.02 to 0.20

(TWD2)
Comm. Reset Time Delay (TWD3) 0.15 s 0.02 to 1.00
25/27/59 - Sync Check
25 Sync Check Disabled
Maximum Voltage 70.0 V 60.0 to 138.0
Minimum Voltage 40.0 V 40.0 to 69.9
Angle Difference 20.0 deg 1.0 to 50.0
Frequency Difference Disabled
Frequency Difference 0.000 Hz 0.010 to 2.000
Dead Main Live Aux. (DMLA) Disabled
Live Main Dead Aux. (LMDA) Disabled

Dead Main Dead Aux. (DMDA) Disabled
79-Recloser
Main Breaker Pole Dead/Live Phase Current

Detection
Aux Breaker Pole Dead/Live Phase Current

Detection
CB AR External Initiation Pole A <Unused = 0>
CB AR External Initiation Pole B <Unused = 0>
CB AR External Initiation Pole C <Unused = 0>
Protection Scheme
1Ph Max Open Pickup Delay (TM) 2.500 s 0.100 to 5.000
1Ph/3Ph for 3Ph Dropout Delay 25.000 s 0.100 to 999.000

(TD4)
1Ph/3Ph for 1Ph Pickup Delay 0.100 s 0.100 to 5.000

(TL5)
1Ph/3Ph for 1Ph Dropout Delay 25.000 s 0.100 to 999.000

(TD5)
Fault Timer Disabled
Fault Timer Pickup 0.20 s 0.05 to 10.00
79-3Ph-Recloser
79-3Ph Disabled
Number of Shots 1
First Reclose (T1) 1.0 s 0.1 to 999.9
Second Reclose (T2) 5.0 s 1.0 to 999.9
Third Reclose (T3) 10.0 s 1.0 to 999.9
Fourth Reclose (T4) 20.0 s 1.0 to 999.9
Close Time (Tp) 0.2 s 0.1 to 1.0
Lockout Reset (TD) 25.0 s 0.1 to 999.9
Initiate Reset (TDI) 0.1 s 0.0 to 999.9
Sync Control Disabled
Recloser Mode Main Only
Block Reset (TDB) 0.1 s 0.0 to 999.9
Follower Time (TF) 5.0 s 0.0 to 24.9
Breaker Out of Service (TC) 50.0 s 0.0 to 999.9
Follower Sequencer Switch Close after the Recloser Fol-

lower Time (TF)
79-1Ph - Recloser
79-1Ph Disabled
Number of Shots 1
Reclose (T1) 1.0 s 0.1 to 999.9
Close Time (Tp) 0.2 s 0.1 to 1.0

Lockout Reset (TD) 25.0 s 0.1 to 999.9
Initiate Reset (TDI) 0.1 s 0.0 to 999.9
Recloser Mode Main Only
Block Reset (TDB) 0.1 s 0.0 to 999.9
Follower Time (TF) 5.0 s 0.0 to 24.9
Breaker Out of Service (TC) 50.0 s 0.0 to 999.9
Follower Sequencer Switch Close after the Recloser Fol-

lower Time (TF)
59 - Overvoltage
59-1 Main Disabled
Gate Switch OR
Pickup 70.0 V 1.0 to 138.0
59-2 Main Disabled
Gate Switch OR
Pickup 70.0 V 1.0 to 138.0
59-1 Aux Disabled
Gate Switch OR
Pickup 70.0 V 1.0 to 138.0
59-2 Aux Disabled
Gate Switch OR
Pickup 70.0 V 1.0 to 138.0
59N - Zero Sequence OverVoltage
59N Inverse Time Delay Disabled
3V0 Pickup 10.00 V 5.00 to 150.00
Curve Type IEC standard inverse
TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.14 - -
B 0.0 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - -
59N Definite Time Delay Disabled
Pickup 10.00 V 5.00 to 150.00
27 - Undervoltage

27 Main Disabled
Gate Switch AND
Pickup 25.0 V 1.0 to 120.0
27 Auxiliary Disabled
Gate Switch AND
Pickup 25.0 V 1.0 to 120.0
60 - Loss Of Potential Alarm
60 Disabled
I1 Blocking 7.5 A 0.5 to 50.0
3I0 Blocking 1.0 A 0.5 to 50.0
Negative Sequence Monitoring Disabled
Vnps 10.0 V 7.0 to 110.0
Inps 0.50 A 0.25 to 5.00
60 CT Supervision
60CTS Main Disabled
Inps Pickup 1.00 A 0.25 to 5.00
Vnps Pickup 7.00 V 7.00 to 110.00
60CTS Aux Disabled
Inps Pickup 1.00 A 0.25 to 5.00
Vnps Pickup 7.00 V 7.00 to 110.00
81 - Over/Under Frequency
81-1 Disabled
Pickup 57.600 Hz [50.000, 59.995] or

[60.005, 70.000]
81-2 Disabled
Pickup 57.000 Hz [50.000, 59.995] or

[60.005, 70.000]
81-3 Disabled
Pickup 61.800 Hz [50.000, 59.995] or

[60.005, 70.000]
81-4 Disabled
Pickup 62.400 Hz [50.000, 59.995] or

[60.005, 70.000]

50LS - Low Set Overcurrent
50LS Main (Input 1) Disabled
Pickup 50.00 A 0.10 to 50.00
50LS Auxiliary (Input 2) Disabled
Pickup 50.00 A 0.10 to 50.00
50BF - Breaker Failure
50BF Main Disabled
Pickup Delay 1 0.20 s 0.01 to 99.99
Breaker Current Pickup 1.00 A 0.10 to 50.00
50BF Auxiliary Disabled
Breaker Current Pickup 1.00 A 0.10 to 50.00
External Single Phase - Main A Disabled

Phase
External Single Phase - Main B Disabled

Phase
External Single Phase - Main C Disabled

Phase
External Three Phase - Main 3 Disabled

Phase
External Single Phase - Aux. A Disabled

Phase
External Single Phase - Aux. B Disabled

Phase
External Single Phase - Aux. C Disabled

Phase
External Three Phase - Aux. 3 Disabled

Phase
50/51/67 - Phase Overcurrent
50 Disabled
Directional Control forward 0: non-directional, 3:

forward, 4: reverse
Pickup 50.00 A 0.50 to 150.00
51 Disabled

forward, 4: reverse
Pickup 7.50 A 0.25 to 25.00

TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.14 - -
B 0.0 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - -
Directional Angle Setting Disabled
Alpha 0.00 - -179.90 to 180.00
Beta 180.00 - 0.10 to 360.00
50 Pickup Current Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
50 Pickup Time Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
51 Pickup Current Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
51 Pickup Time Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
50N/51N/67 - Neutral Overcurrent (Calculated)
50N Disabled

forward, 4: reverse
Pickup 5.00 A 0.25 to 50.00
51N Disabled
Directional Control forward 0: non-directional,

4: forward,
5: reverse,
6: forward & in
scheme
Pickup 1.00 A 0.25 to 50.00
TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.14 - -
B 0.0 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - -
Alpha 0.00 - -179.90 to 180.00
Beta 180.00 - 0.10 to 360.00
50N Pickup Current Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
50N Pickup Time Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
51N Pickup Current Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
51N Pickup Time Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
50G/51G/67 - Neutral Overcurrent (Measured)

50G Disabled
Directional Control Forward 0: non-directional

3: forward
4: reverse
Pickup 5.00 A 0.25 to 50.00
51G Disabled
Directional Control Forward 0:non-directional

4:forward
5:reverse
6:forward & in
scheme
Pickup 1.00 A 0.25 to 50.00
TMS 1.00 = 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.14 = =
B 0.0 = =
p 0.02 = =
TR 13.50 = =
Alpha 0.00 = -179.90 to 180.00
Beta 180.00 = 0.10 to 360.00
50G Pickup Current Multiplier 1.00 time setting 0.10 to 2.00
50G Pickup Time Multiplier 1.00 time setting 0.10 to 2.00
51G Pickup Current Multiplier 1.00 time setting 0.10 to 2.00
51G Pickup Time Multiplier 1.00 time setting 0.10 to 2.00
46-50/46-51/67 - Negative Sequence Overcurrent
46-50 Disabled

forward, 4: reverse
Pickup 2.50 A 0.50 to 50.00
46-51 Disabled

forward, 4: reverse
Pickup 1.00 A 0.50 to 50.00
TMS 1.00 - 0.01 to 10.00
A 0.14 - -
B 0.0 - -
p 0.02 - -
TR 13.50 - -

Alpha 0.00 - -179.90 to 180.00
Beta 180.00 - 0.10 to 360.00
46-50 Pickup Current Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
46-50 Pickup Time Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
46-51 Pickup Current Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
46-51 Pickup Time Multiplier 1.00 times setting 0.10 to 2.00
46- Broken Conductor
46BC Disabled
Pickup 20.0 % 10.0 to 100.00
Under Current 0.5 A 0.20 to 2.50
Target Reset
External Target Reset <Unused = 0>
Z Circle Trigger
Swing Trigger Disabled
Positive Seq. Impedance 20.0 ohm 0.1 to 50.0
ProLogic 1 [ProLogic 1]
[ProLogic 1] Disabled
Dropout Delay 0.00 s 0.00 to 999.00
Operator 1
Input A <Unused = 0>
Operator 2
Input B <Unused = 0>
Operator 3
Input C <Unused = 0>
Operator 4
Input D <Unused = 0>
Operator 5
Input E <Unused = 0>
Operator 1
Operator 2

Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3

Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1

Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4

Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2

Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Group Logic 1 [Group Logic 1]
[Group Logic 1] Disabled
Setting Group to Activate none
Pickup Delay 0 s 0 to 999
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3

Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1

Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4

Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5
Operator 1
Operator 2

Operator 3
Operator 4
Operator 5

Appendix C Hardware Description
The relay is a complete line distance protection relay package designed and
manufactured with high quality features and recording components. The fol-
lowing information describes the main hardware components of the relay:
Central The CPU has System On Module and it contains high speed dual core proces-
Processing Unit sor which performs the entire relay operation. The CPU is interfaced to Analog
Input Board, Digital Input & Output Board, Digital Output Board, Front Fascia
Board and Mezzanine Board, powered by SMPS Board, which manages the
protection features of the relay. The dual core processor manages the user in-
terface and system control features of the relay.
The CPU provides the following functionality:
• DSP processor subsystem manages the protection features of the relay with
the floating point arithmetic to provide fast capture and manipulation of
data.
• ARM processor subsystem performs the post processing activity like dis-
turbance recording, logging fault & event, communication protocol sup-
port, LCD HMI and PC interface activity.
• NOR and NAND Flash memory supports field software upgrades.
• Settings and recordings stored in non-volatile memory.
• Runs a Real Time Operating System (RTOS).
• Provides Ethernet ports, RS-485 port and USB interface.
• Time synchronism co-processor with modulated and un-modulated IRIG-
B.
• High speed inbuilt link is provided between the DSP and ARM processor
subsystems.
• Sophisticated fault detection and “watchdog” recovery hardware.
• Provides the relay with one RS-485 port (Port 52) and IRIG-B time syn-
chronization input (Mod. Port 531 & Un-Mod. Port 541, male BNC).
Digital Input This board provides 8 digital input channels. Inputs are optically isolated, ex-
Board (DIB) ternally wetted and field configurable with the voltage level of 48 / 110 / 220
Vdc selection through on-board jumpers. This board is interfaced to the CPU
board.
Digital Output The board provides 8 normally open contact outputs for relaying, alarms and
Board (DOB) control. This board is interfaced to the CPU Board.
Digital Input & This board provides 8 digital input channels. Inputs are optically isolated, ex-
Output Board ternally wetted and field configurable with the voltage level of 48 / 110 / 220
(DIGIO) Vdc selection through on-board jumpers.
The DIGIO also provides 8 normally open contact outputs for relaying, alarms
and control. This board is interfaced to the CPU board.
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix C-1

Appendix C Hardware Description
AC Analog Each relay has 2 AIBs. The AIBs have 3 voltage transformer inputs and 5 cur-
Input Boards rent transformer inputs. These boards provide 10 current and 6 voltage (or 5
(AIB) currents, 1 voltage for Option B) ac analog measurement inputs, interfaced to
the CPU. The AIBs provide the analog to digital conversion of the ac analog
current inputs and the ac analog voltage inputs. The sampling rate is fixed at
128 samples/cycle. Each channel is simultaneously sampled using 16-bit ana-
log to digital converters. The digitized data is sent to the CPU for processing
of protection algorithm.
Front Fascia This board provides 128x64 monochrome graphics front panel display, the
Board (FFB) front panel USB, the front panel status LEDs and the keypad. The keypad is
used to navigate the menus on the display to control relay operation by a local
user. This board is interfaced to the CPU board.
Mezzanine It contains FPGA and Ethernet Phy’s. It is an add-on card to CPU Board. It pro-
Board (MB) vides the relay with two Ethernet ports (Port 51A and 51B, RJ-45 or 100BASE-
FX MM 1300nm ST, depending upon order specification).
SMPS Board It provides the power supply for the entire unit. The switching frequency is 132
(SMPSB) kHz and it reduces the transformer size with no noticeable impact on EMI, ac-
curate programmable current limit, fully integrated soft-start for minimum
start-up stress. The nominal operating range is 20-60 Vdc or 110 – 250 Vdc +/
- 20% or 100 – 240 Vac +5%/-20%, 50/60 Hz.
Appendix C-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

Appendix D Event Messages
The following is a list of event messages that are created in the relay for events
including trips, alarms, external input assertions, and internal events such as
setting changes. This list is referred to from multiple places in this manual.
L-PRO Event Messages
Event Log Message Notes
21P1 ABC 12.3km:Trip The possible phase information for 21P1–21P5 is:
21P2 ABC 12.3km:Trip • AB
21P3 ABC 12.3km:Trip • BC
21P4 ABC 12.3km:Trip • CA
21P5 ABC 12.3km:Trip • AB, BC
• AB, CA
• CA, BC
• ABC
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABGBC
• BCGCA
• CAGAB
• ABCG
21N1 AG 12.3km:Trip The possible phase information for 21N1–N5 is:

21N2 AG 12.3km:Trip • AG
21N3 AG 12.3km:Trip • BG
21N4 AG 12.3km:Trip • CG
21N5 AG 12.3km:Trip • ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
21P2 ABC 12.3km:Alarm The possible phase information for 21P2–21P5 is:
21P3 ABC 12.3km:Alarm • AB
21P4 ABC 12.3km:Alarm • BC
21P5 ABC 12.3km:Alarm • CA
• AB, BC
• AB, CA
• CA, BC
• ABC
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABGBC
• BCGCA
• CAGAB
• ABCG
21N2 AG 12.3km:Alarm The possible phase information for 21N2–N5, 50N/51N and 50G/
21N3 AG 12.3km:Alarm 51G is:
21N4 AG 12.3km:Alarm • AG
21N5 AG 12.3km:Alarm • BG
51N AG 12.3km:Trip • CG
50N AG 12.3km:Trip • ABG
51G AG 12.3km:Trip • BCG
50G AG 12.3km:Trip • CAG
• ABCG
46-51: Trip
46-50: Trip
51 ABC:Trip The possible phase information is:

•A
50 ABC:Trip •B
•C
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
51N: Alarm
51G: Alarm
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix D-1

46-51: Alarm
51 ABC: Alarm The possible phase information is:

•A
•B
•C
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
46BC Trip The possible phase information is:

•A
•B
•C
• AB
• BC
• CA
Impedance Circle Trigger
68 Power Swing: Trip Trip or Block based on 68 mode setting
PUTT ABCG 12.3 km: Trip The possible phase information is:
DCB ABCG 12.3 km: Trip • AG
POTT ABCG 12.3 km: Trip • BG
• CG
POTT (WI) ABCG 12.3 km: Trip
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• AB
• BC
• CA
• AB, BC
• AB, CA
• CA, BC
• ABC
• ABCG
• ABGBC
• BCGCA
• CAGAB
Weak Infeed (WI) is not available unless POTT is selected.
DEF: Trip
59NDef: Trip
59Ninv: Trip
PUTT: ABCG Send The possible phase information is

POTT: ABCG Send • AG
POTT: (WI) ABCG Send • BG
DCB: ABCG Send • CG
• ABG
• BCG
• CAG
• ABCG
Weak Infeed (WI) is not available unless POTT is selected.
DEF: Send
SOTF ABC The possible phase information for the Switch-On-To-Fault will
be:
•A
•B
•C
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
ProLogic Name: PLn ProLogic outputs names are user assigned
Extern Input Name: EIn: High External Input names are user assigned
Extern Input Name: EIn: Low External Input names are user assigned
Virtual Input Name: VIn: High Virtual Input names are user assigned
Virtual Input Name: VIn: Low Virtual Input names are user assigned
Output Contact Name: OCn: High Output Contact names are user assigned
Appendix D-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

Output Contact Name: OCn: Low Output Contacts names are user assigned
59N Def: Alarm
59N Inv: Alarm
60 LOP ABC: Alarm The possible phase information will be:

•A
•B
•C
• AB
• BC
• CA
• ABC
60 CTS Main: Alarm
60 CTS Aux: Alarm
Load Encroachment Block
Success Reclose Main
Success Reclose Aux
68 Inner Blinder: Alarm
68 Outer Blinder: Alarm
Com-Aided (Z2,Wi): Send Scheme types: WI, Z2, Z2 & WI, Z2 is Zone 2 POTT and WI is
Weak Infeed
27 Main ABC: Trip The possible phase information will be:

•A
27 Aux. ABC: Trip •B
•C
• AB
59-1 Main ABC: Trip • BC
• CA
59-2 Main ABC: Trip • ABC
59-1 Aux. ABC: Trip
59-2 Aux. ABC: Trip
50LS Main ABC: Trip
50LS Aux. ABC: Trip
252759 Sync Check:
50BF-1 Main ABC:Trip The possible phase information will be:

•A
•B
50BF-2 Main ABC:Trip •C
• AB
50BF-1 Aux ABC:Trip • BC
• CA
50BF-2 Aux ABC:Trip • ABC
81-1: Trip
81-2: Trip
81-3: Trip
81-4: Trip
79-3 Ph Initiated: High Recloser is initiated.
79-3 Lead Lockout Recloser shot count has expired and reclosing attempts are
blocked.
79-3 Follow Lockout Follow breaker has failed to reclose.
79-3 Main Reclose: shot n Recloser Main circuit breaker close attempt where n equals the
shot count.

79-3 Follow Reclose: shot n Recloser Aux. circuit breaker close attempt where n equals the
shot count.
79-3 Block: High Recloser is blocked by an external signal.
50BF Initiate: High
Self Check: DC Ch.n: Alarm Continuous dc level on Ch. n, where n = 1 to 18.
Self Check: DC Alarm Reset Continuous dc level, condition has reset.
Self Check: DC Ch.n: O/P Block Continuous dc level on Ch. n, where n = 1 to 18. Relay is blocked.
GOOSE Comm. Alarm: Active Indicates a loss of GOOSE Subscription with a reference to the
Multicast MAC Address of the Published GOOSE.(see “Subscrip-
tion Supervision in the Event Log” on page 8-8)
New Settings loaded, Active group n. Where n = 1-8
New Setting Loaded
Manual Settings Load request, activate SGn Manual or user-initiated settings change.
Manual Settings Load request completed Completion of user-initiated settings change.
Changed Active Group from x to y This happens when relay changes setting group. Automatic group
Logic n logic initiated setting group change
User changed Active Group from x to y This happens when the relay changes setting group. User initiated
setting group change
Unit Recalibrated
Unit restarted
User Login Attempt
SPC n: Command Active
SPC n: Command Inactive
Note: For either of the above cases the DSP controller functions con-
tinue with normal auxiliary relay outputs provided that DSP failure or
Self Check Fail: Block has not occurred.
Self Check Fail The DSP has an algorithm that detects continuous dc levels on the analog in-
due to DC puts and initiates alarms and relay output contact blocking when the measured
Offset Detector dc level exceeds the Alarm or Block level. The Alarm level is intended to pro-
vide an early indication of a problem. The Block level blocks the relay from
false-tripping by preventing any output contact from closing. The Relay Func-
tional LED turns off, but the protection functions will operate normally, with
the exception that the output contacts will not be allowed to close. The Relay
Inoperative contact will close for a Block condition. The following table de-
scribes all the Alarm/Block indication functions
Action Condition
Alarm Block
Relay Functional LED off X
Appendix D-4 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

Action Condition
Service Required LED on X X
Self Check Fail Signal high X X
Relay Inoperative Contact closed X
Output Contacts held open X
Event Log Message X X
Status available through SCADA X X
The Self Check Fail signal, which is available in the Output Matrix, TUI me-
tering and SCADA, can be used to signal an alarm. Note that if this signal is
mapped to an output contact, the contact which it is mapped to will only be
closed for an alarm condition. If the relay is in the Block condition, the Relay
Inoperative contact must be used to signal an alarm.
The status of the Self Check Fail is available through the SCADA services pro-
vided by the relay. The digital signal Self Check Fail will indicate that DSP has
detected a continuous dc level and the analog metering value Self Check Fail
Parameter is used to indicate which condition, Alarm or Block. The failure
types and which analog values they are associated with are described in the ta-
ble below. Both signals are available in DNP and Modbus.
Point Value Condition
0 Normal
1 Alarm
2 Block
3 Alarm has evolved to block
The Alarm condition is allowed to reset if the continuous dc level drops below
the pickup level. The Block condition has no reset level. If power is cycled to
the relay it will go into its normal state until the continuous dc level is detected
again.
Self Check Fail appears as “Aux. Failure Alarm” in the settings ver-
sions before V 10.

Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication
Protocol
All metering values available through the terminal user interface are also avail-
able via the Modbus protocol. Additionally, the Modbus protocol supports the
reading of unit time and time of the readings and provides access to trip and
alarm events, including fault location information. All metering readings can
be frozen into a snapshot via the “Hold Readings” function (see Force Single
Coil function, address 0).
Read Coil Status (Function Code 01)
Channel Address Value
Hold Readings 1 0: Readings not held 1: Readings held
Reserved 257 Reserved Reserved
Output Contact 2 514 0: Contact Open (inactive) 1: Contact Closed (active)
21P1 Trip 769 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix E-1

Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol
21N1 Trip 774 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
51 Trip 779 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50 Trip 780 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
51N Trip 781 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50N Trip 782 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
51G Trip 783 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50G Trip 784 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
46-51 Trip 785 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
DeadLine Pickup Trip (SOTF) 787 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Impedance Circle Trigger 788 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Distance Scheme Trip 789 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Distance Scheme Send 790 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
DEF Scheme Trip 791 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
DEF Scheme Send 792 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
21P2 Alarm 793 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
21N2 Alarm 797 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
51 Alarm 801 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
51N Alarm 802 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
51GAlarm 803 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
46-51 Alarm 804 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Self Check Fail 805 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
68 Power Swing Block/Trip 806 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
68 Outer Blinder Alarm 807 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
68 Inner Blinder Alarm 808 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
27 Main 809 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
27 Aux 810 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
59-1 Main 811 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
59-1 Aux 812 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
59-2 Main 813 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
59-2 Aux 814 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
59N DEF Trip 815 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
59N DEF Alarm 816 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
59N INV Trip 817 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
59N INV Alarm 818 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50LS Main 819 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50LS Aux 820 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
25/27/59 Sync Check 821 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50BF Initiate 822 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50BF Main-1 Trip 823 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50BF Main-2 Trip 824 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Appendix E-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

50BF Aux-1 Trip 825 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
50BF Aux-2 Trip 826 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-3Ph Initiate 827 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-3Ph Block 828 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-3Ph Main Reclose 829 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-3Ph Aux Reclose 830 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-3Ph Lead Lockout 831 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-3Ph Follow Lockout 832 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-1Ph Initiate 833 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-1Ph Block 834 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-1Ph Main A Reclose 835 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-1Ph Aux A Reclose 836 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-1Ph Main B Reclose 837 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-1Ph Aux B Reclose 838 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-1Ph Main C Reclose 839 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-1Ph Aux C Reclose 840 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-1Ph Lead Lockout 841 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79-1Ph Follow Lockout 842 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
1Ph Open Timeout 843 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
1Ph Fault Lockout 844 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
3Ph Fault Lockout 845 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
1/3Ph Fault Lockout 846 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Successful Reclose Main 847 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Successful Reclose Aux 848 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
79 Fault Lockout 849 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
60 CTS Main 854 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
60 CTS Aux 855 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
60 LOP 856 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Load Encroachment Block 857 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Time Sync Loss 858 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
IEC61850 Communication Alarm 859 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
ProLogic 1 860 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

Group Logic 1 884 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
46 Broken Conductor 900 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

Read Input Status (Function Code 02)
External Input 1 10001 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
External Input 1 Change of state latch 10257 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)
Virtual Input 1 10513 0: Off (inactive) 1: On (active)

Read Input Status (Function Code 02)

Read Holding Registers (Function Code 03)
Channel Address Units Scale
L-PRO Clock Time (UTC). Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data
Milliseconds Now 40001 0-999 1

* Millisecond information not
supported.
Seconds Now 40002 0-59 1
Minutes Now 40003 0-59 1
Hours Now 40004 0-23 1
Day of Year Now 40005 1-365 (up to 366 if leap year) 1
Years since 1900 40006 90-137 1
Sync’d to IRIG-B 40007 0: No 1: Yes 1
Time of Acquisition (UTC). Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data
Milliseconds Now 40008 0-999 1

* Millisecond information not
supported.
Seconds Now 40009 0-59 1
Minutes Now 40010 0-59 1

Hours Now 40011 0-23 1
Day of Year Now 40012 1-365 (up to 366 if leap year) 1
Years since 1900 40013 90-137 1
Sync’d to IRIG-B 40014 0: No 1: Yes 1
Offset of UTC to IED time. 40015 2’s complement half hours, 1

North America is negative
V1A Magnitude 40257 kV 10
V1A Angle 40258 Degrees 10
V1B Magnitude 40259 kV 10
V1B Angle 40260 Degrees 10
V1C Magnitude 40261 kV 10
V1C Angle 40262 Degrees 10
I1A Magnitude 40263 A 1
I1A Angle 40264 Degrees 10
I1B Magnitude 40265 A 1
I1B Angle 40266 Degrees 10
I1C Magnitude 40267 A 1
I1C Angle 40268 Degrees 10
I1G Magnitude 40269 A 1
I1G Angle 40270 Degrees 10
I01 Magnitude 40271 A 1
I01 Angle 40272 Degrees 10
V2A Magnitude 40273 kV 1
V2A Angle 40274 Degrees 10
V2B Magnitude 40275 kV 1
V2B Angle 40276 Degrees 10
V2C Magnitude 40277 kV 1
V2C Angle 40278 Degrees 10
I2A Magnitude 40279 A 1
I2A Angle 40280 Degrees 10
I2B Magnitude 40281 A 1
I2B Angle 40282 Degrees 10
I2C Magnitude 40283 A 1
I2C Angle 40284 Degrees 10
I2G Magnitude 40285 A 1
I2G Angle 40286 Degrees 10
I02 Magnitude 40287 A 1
I02 Angle 40288 Degrees 10
ILA Magnitude 40289 A 1
ILA Angle 40290 Degrees 10
ILB Magnitude 40291 A 1
ILB Angle 40292 Degrees 10
ILC Magnitude 40293 A 1

ILC Angle 40294 Degrees 10
ILG MAgnitude 40295 A 1
ILG Angle 40296 Degrees 10
V1 Pos. Seq. Frequency 40297 Hz 100
V1 Pos. Seq. 40298 kV 10
V1 Neg. Seq. 40299 kV 10
V1 Zero Seq. 40300 kV 10
IL Pos. Seq. 40301 A 1
IL Neg. Seq. 40302 A 1
IL Zero Seq. 40303 A 1
P 40304 MW 10
Q 40305 Mvar 10
S 40306 MVA 10
PF 40307 NA 100
Active Setting Group 40308 NA 1
Self Check Fail Parameter 40309 NA 1

(see Note 1)
PA 40310 MW 10
PB 40311 Mvar 10
PC 40312 Mvar 10
QA 40313 Mvar 10
QB 40314 Mvar 10
QC 40315 Mvar 10
SA 40316 MVA 10
SB 40317 MVA 10
SC 40318 MVA 10
PFA 40319 NA 100
PFB 40320 NA 100
PFC 40321 NA 100
V1AB Magnitude 40322 kV 10
V1AB Angle 40323 kV 10
V1BC Magnitude 40324 kV 10
V1BC Angle 40325 kV 10

V1CA Magnitude 40326 kV 10
V1CA Angle 40327 kV 10
V2AB Magnitude 40328 kV 10
V2AB Angle 40329 kV 10
V2BC Magnitude 40330 kV 10
V2BC Angle 40331 kV 10
V2CA Magnitude 40332 kV 10
V2CA Angle 40333 kV 10
Read Input Register (Function Code 04)
No input registers supported. Response from IED indicates “ILLEGAL FUNCTION.”

Force Single Coil (Function Code 05)
Only the “hold readings” coil can be forced. When active, this coil locks all coil, input and holding register readings simultaneously
at their present values. When inactive, coil, input and holding register values will read their most recently available state.
Channel Type Address Value
Hold Readings Read/Write 01 0000: Readings update normally (inactive)

FF00: Hold readings (active)
Preset Single Register (Function Code 06)
Channel Address Value Scaled Up By
Event Message Control (See below for details of use)
Refresh event list 40513 No data required N/A
Acknowledge the cur- 40514 No data required N/A

rent event and get the
next event
Get the next event 40515 No data required N/A

(without acknowl-
edge)
Event Buffer Size 100
Diagnostic Subfunctions (Function Code 08)
Return Query Data (Subfunction 00) This provides an echo of the submitted message.
Restart Comm. Option (Subfunction 01) This restarts the Modbus communications process.
Force Listen Only Mode (Subfunction 04) No response is returned. IED enters “Listen Only” mode. This
mode can only be exited by the “Restart Comm. Option” com-
mand.
Report Slave ID (Function Code 17/0x11)
A fixed response is returned by the IED, including system model, version and issue numbers.
Channel Type Bytes Value
Model Number Read Only 0 and 1 0x1194 = 4500 decimal
Version Number Read Only 2 and 3 Version number
Issue Number Read Only 4 and 5 Issue number

• The L-PRO IED model number is 4500.

• Version and issue will each be positive integers, say X and Y.
• The L-PRO is defined as “Model 4500, Version X Issue Y”
Accessing L-PRO Event Information
All L-PRO detector event messages displayed in the Event Log are available via Modbus. This includes fault location information.
The following controls are available.
Refresh Event List (Function Code 6, address 40513): Fetches the latest events from the relay's event log and
makes them available for Modbus access. The most recent event becomes the current
event available for reading.
Acknowledge Current Event and (Function Code 6, address 40514): Clears the current event from the read registers and
Get Next Event places the next event into them. An acknowledged event is no longer available for reading.
Get Next Event (Function Code 6, address 40515): Places the next event in the read registers without
acknowledging the current event. The current event will reappear in the list when Refresh
Event List is used.
Size of Current Event Message (Function Code 3, address 40516): Indicates the number of 16 bit registers used to contain
the current event. Event data is stored with 2 characters per register. A reading of zero indi-
cates that there are no unacknowledged events available in the current set. (NB. The
Refresh Event List function can be used to check for new events that have occurred since
the last Refresh Event List.)
Read Event Message (Function Code 3, addresses 40517 – 40569): Contains the current message. Two.
ASCII characters are packed into each 16 bit register. All unused registers in the set are set
to 0.
Fault Information – Type (Function Code 3, address 40571): If the current event is a fault location event, this register
contains the type of fault.
The following type bitmap:
0x0001 – Phase A
0x0002 – Phase B
0x0004 – Phase C
0x0008 – Ground
Any number of the flags may be set for a given fault. If the relay could not determine the
fault type, then the register will not have any flags set and will read 0x0000.
Fault Information – Fault Dis- (Function Code 3, address 40572): If the current event is a fault location event, this register
tance contains the distance to the fault. It is scaled up by a factor of 10. The units are the same as
the units set in the relay configuration.
Fault Information – Time of Fault (Function Code 3, addresses 40573 to 40576): If the current event is a fault location event,
these registers contain the time of the fault in seconds since 1970. Each of these 16-bit reg-
isters contains an 8-bit portion of a 32-bit time value. Register 40573 contains the upper
most 8 bits, and register 40576 contains the lowest 8 bits.

Modbus Event Message Example
“FL2000Sep21 20:16:16.966 21P1 AB 1.0 km: Trip”
Register Value Meaning
High Byte Low Byte
40516 0x00 0x1B Event text size = 27 (0x1B hex)
40517 0x46 0x4C ‘FL’ - Fault locator event
40518 0x32 0x30 ‘2’, ‘0’
40519 0x30 0x30 ‘0’, ‘0’
40520 0x53 0x65 ‘S’, ‘e’
40521 0x70 0x32 ‘p’, ‘2’
40522 0x31 0x20 ‘1’, ‘<sp>’
40523 0x32 0x30 ‘2’, ‘0’
40524 0x3A 0x31 ‘:’, ‘1’
40525 0x36 0x3A ‘6’, ‘:’
40526 0x31 0x36 ‘1’, ‘6’
40527 0x2E 0x39 ‘.’, ‘9’
40528 0x36 0x36 ‘6’, ‘6’
40529 0x20 0x32 ‘<sp>’, ‘2’
40530 0x31 0x50 ‘ 1’, ‘P’
40531 0x31 0x20 ‘1’, ‘<sp>‘
40532 0x41 0x42 ’A’, ’B’
40533 0x20 0x31 ’<sp>’, ’ 1’
40534 0x2E 0x30 ’.’, ’0’
40535 0x6B 0x6D ’K’, ’m’
40536 0x3A 0x20 ’:’, ’<sp>’
40537 0x54 0x72 ‘T’, ‘r’
40538 0x69 0x70 ‘i’, ‘p’
Fault Information
Register Value Meaning
40571 0x00 0x03 Bitmap = 0x0003 - AB Fault
40572 0x00 0x0A 0x000A = 10 in decimal -

1.0 km Fault Distance
40573 0x00 0x39 Upper 8 bits of timestamp *
40574 0x00 0XCA Next 8 bits of timestamp *

Modbus Event Message Example
40575 0x00 0x6C Next 8 bits of timestamp *
40576 0x00 0x90 Lowest 8 bits of timestamp *
* Seconds since 1970 = 39CA6C90

Converted to readable timestamp:
September 21, 2000 20:16:16

Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile
Device This document shows the device capabilities and the current value of each pa-
Properties rameter for the default unit configuration as defined in the default configura-
tion file.
If configurable,
1.1 Device Identification Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.1.1 Device Function: ○ Master ○ Master

● Outstation ● Outstation
1.1.2 Vendor Name: ERLPhase
Power Technol-
ogies
1.1.3 Device Name: L-PRO 4500
1.1.4 Device manufacturer's NA

hardware version string:
1.1.5 Device manufacturer's NA

software version string:
1.1.6 Device Profile V1.20, Feb 25,

Document Version 2020
Number:
1.1.7 DNP Levels Supported Outstations Only

for: Requests and Responses
None
 Level 1
 Level 2
Level 3
1.1.8 Supported Function  Self-Address Reservation

Blocks:  Object 0 - attribute objects
 Data Sets
 File Transfer
 Virtual Terminal
 Mapping to IEC 61850 Object Models defined in
a DNP3 XML file
1.1.9 Notable Additions: • Start-stop (qualifier codes 0x00 and 0x01), limited
quantity (qualifier codes 0x07 and 0x08) and indi-
ces (qualifier codes 0x17 and 0x28) for Binary In-
puts, Binary Outputs and Analog Inputs (object
groups 1, 10 and 30)
• 32-bit and 16-bit Analog Inputs with and without
flag (variations 1, 2, 3 and 4)
• Analog Input events with time (variations 3 and 4)
• Fault Location information as analog readings
• Event Log messages as Object groups 110 and
111
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix F-1

If configurable,
1.1 Device Identification Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.1.10 Methods to set  XML - Loaded via DNP3 File Transfer

Configurable  XML - Loaded via other transport mechanism
Parameters:  Terminal - ASCII Terminal Command Line
 Software - Vendor software named
L-PRO Offliner
 Proprietary file loaded via DNP3 file transfer
 Proprietary file loaded via other transport mech-
anism
 Direct - Keypad on device front panel
 Factory - Specified when device is ordered
 Protocol - Set via DNP3 (e.g. assign class)
 Other - explain _________________
1.1.11 DNP3 XML files RdWrFilename Description of Contents Not supported

available On-Line:
 dnpDP.xml Complete Device Profile
 dnpDPcap.xml Device Profile Capabilities
 dnpDPcfg.xml Device Profile config.
values
  _____*.xml ___________________
*The Complete Device Profile Document contains

the capabilities, Current Value, and configur-
able methods columns.
*The Device Profile Capabilities contains only the
capabilities and configurable methods columns.
*The Device Profile Config. Values contains only the
Current Value column.
1.1.12 External DNP3 XML RdWrFilename Description of Contents Not supported

files available Off-line:   dnpDP.xml Complete Device Profile
  dnpDPcap.xml Device Profile Capabilities
  dnpDPcfg.xml Device Profile config.
values
  _______*.xml ___________________
*The Complete Device Profile Document contains

the capabilities, Current Value, and configur-
able methods columns.
*The Device Profile Capabilities contains only the
capabilities and configurable methods columns.
*The Device Profile Config. Values contains only the
Current Value column.
1.1.13 Connections  Serial (complete section 1.2)

Supported:  IP Networking (complete section 1.3)
 Other, explain ______________________
Appendix F-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

If configurable,
1.2 Serial Connections Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.2.1 Port Name Port 122
1.2.2 Serial Connection  Asynchronous - 8 Data Bits, 1 Start Bit, 1 Stop Not configured L-PRO Offliner
Parameters: Bit, No Parity for DNP
 Other, explain - Asynchronous with selectable
parity
1.2.3 Baud Rate:  Fixed at _______ Not configured L-PRO Offliner

 Configurable, range _______ to _______ for DNP
 Configurable, selectable from 300, 1200, 2400,
9600, 19200, 38400 and 57600
 Configurable, other, describe_______________
1.2.4 Hardware Flow Control  None

(Handshaking): RS-232 / V.24 / V.28 Options:
Describe hardware sig- Before Tx, Asserts:  RTS
naling requirements of  DTR
the interface. Before Rx, Asserts:  RTS
Where a transmitter or  DTR
receiver is inhibited until Always Asserts:  RTS
a given control signal is  DTR
asserted, it is consid- Before Tx, Requires: Asserted Deasserted
ered to require that sig-  CTS
nal prior to sending or  DCD
receiving characters.  DSR
Where a signal is  RI
asserted prior to trans-  Rx Inactive
mitting, that signal will Before Rx, Requires: Asserted Deasserted
be maintained active  CTS
until after the end of  DCD
transmission.  DSR
Where a signal is  RI
asserted to enable Always Ignores:
reception, any data sent  CTS
to the device when the  DCD
signal is not active  DSR
could be discarded.  RI
Other, explain ____________
RS-422 / V.11 Options:
Requires Indication before Rx
Asserts Control before Tx
RS-485 Options:
Requires Rx inactive before Tx
1.2.5 Interval to Request Link  Not Supported

Status:  Fixed at_________ seconds
 Configurable, range _____ to ______ seconds
 Configurable, selectable from __,__,__ seconds
 Configurable, other, describe______________
1.2.6 Supports DNP3  No

Collision Avoidance:  Yes, explain ______________________

If configurable,
1.2 Serial Connections Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.2.7 Receiver Inter-  Not checked

character Timeout:  No gap permitted
 Fixed at _____ bit times
 Fixed at _____ ms
 Configurable, range ____ to ____ bit times
 Configurable, range ____ to ____ ms
 Configurable, Selectable from __,__,__bit times
 Configurable, Selectable from ___, ___, ___ ms
 Variable, explain ____
1.2.8 Inter-character gaps in  None (always transmits with no inter-character

transmission: gap)
 Maximum _____ bit times
 Maximum _____ ms

If configurable,
1.3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.3.1 Port Name Port 51A/B
1.3.2 Type of End Point:  TCP Initiating (Master Only) Not configured L-PRO Offliner
 TCP Listening (Outstation Only) for DNP
 TCP Dual (required for Masters)
 UDP Datagram (required)
1.3.3 IP Address of this 192.168.100.101 L-PRO Mainte-

Device: nance utilities
1.3.4 Subnet Mask: Not set L-PRO Mainte-

nance utilities
1.3.5 Gateway IP Address: Not set L-PRO Mainte-

nance utilities
1.3.6 Accepts TCP  Allows all (show as *.*.*.* in 1.3.7) Limits based on L-PRO Offliner
Connections or UDP  Limits based on an IP address an IP address
Datagrams from:  Limits based on list of IP addresses
 Limits based on a wildcard IP address
 Limits based on list of wildcard IP addresses
 Other validation, explain_________________
1.3.7 IP Address(es) from 192.168.1.1 L-PRO Offliner

which TCP Connections
or UDP Datagrams are
accepted:
1.3.8 TCP Listen Port  Not Applicable (Master w/o dual end point) 20,000 L-PRO Offliner
Number:  Fixed at 20,000
 Configurable, range 1025 to 32737
 Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
1.3.9 TCP Listen Port  Not Applicable (Outstation w/o dual end point) NA
Number of remote  Fixed at 20,000
device:  Configurable, range _______ to _______
1.3.10 TCP Keep-alive timer:  Fixed at ___________ms Disabled L-PRO Offliner

 Configurable, range 5 to 3,600 s
 Configurable, selectable from ___,___,___ms
1.3.11 Local UDP port:  Fixed at 20,000 20,000 L-PRO Offliner

 Let system choose (Master only)
1.3.12 Destination UDP port  None NA

for initial unsolicited null  Fixed at 20,000
responses (UDP only  Configurable, range _______ to _______
Outstations):  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____

If configurable,
1.3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.3.13 Destination UDP port  None 20,000 L-PRO Offliner

for responses:  Fixed at 20,000
 Use source port number
1.3.14 Multiple master  Supports multiple masters (Outstations only) Method 1 (based L-PRO Offliner
connections If supported, the following methods may be on IP address)
(Outstations Only): used:
 Method 1 (based on IP address) - required
 Method 2 (based on IP port number) -
recommended
 Method 3 (browsing for static data) - optional
1.3.15 Time synchronization  DNP3 LAN procedure (function code 24)

support:  DNP3 Write Time (not recommended over LAN)
 Other, explain _________________________
 Not Supported

If configurable,
1.4 Link Layer Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.4.1 Data Link Address:  Fixed at______ 1 L-PRO Offliner

1.4.2 DNP3 Source Address  Never

Validation:  Always, one address allowed (shown in 1.4.3)
 Always, any one of multiple addresses allowed
 (each selectable as shown in 1.4.3)
 Sometimes, explain________________
1.4.3 DNP3 Source  Configurable to any 16 bit DNP Data Link NA

Address(es) expected Address value
when Validation is  Configurable, range _______ to _______
Enabled:  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
1.4.4 Self Address Support  Yes (only allowed if configurable) NA

using address 0xFFFC:  No
1.4.5 Sends Confirmed User  Always L-PRO Offliner

Data Frames:  Sometimes, explain _____________________ (to disable, set
 Never Data Link Time-
 Configurable, either always or never out to 0)
1.4.6 Data Link Layer  None 500

Confirmation Timeout:  Fixed at __ ms
 Configurable, range 0 to 2,000 ms
 Configurable, selectable from____________ms
 Variable, explain _______________________
1.4.7 Maximum Data Link  Never Retries 3

Retries:  Fixed at 3
 Configurable, range ________ to _______
1.4.8 Maximum number of  Fixed at 292 292

octets Transmitted in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Data Link Frame:  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____

octets that can be  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Received in a Data Link  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Frame:  Configurable, other, describe______________

If configurable,
1.5 Application Layer Capabilities Current Value
list methods

octets Transmitted in an  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Application Layer  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Fragment other than  Configurable, other, describe______________
File Transfer:
1.5.2 Maximum number of  Fixed at ___________ NA

octets Transmitted in an  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Application Layer  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Fragment containing  Configurable, other, describe______________
File Transfer:

octets that can be  Configurable, range ________ to _______
Received in an  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
Application Layer  Configurable, other, describe______________
Fragment:
1.5.4 Timeout waiting for  None 2,000 ms

Complete Application  Fixed at 2,000 ms
Layer Fragment:  Configurable, range _______ to _______ms

objects allowed in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______
single control request  Configurable, selectable from ____,____,____
for CROB (group 12):  Configurable, other, describe______________
1.5.6 Maximum number of  Fixed at _ Analog Outputs

objects allowed in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______ not supported
for Analog Outputs  Configurable, other, describe______________
(group 41):  Variable, explain _______________________
1.5.7 Maximum number of  Fixed at __ Data Sets not

objects allowed in a  Configurable, range ________ to _______ supported
for Data Sets (groups  Configurable, other, describe______________
85,86,87):  Variable, explain _______________________
1.5.8 Supports mixing object  Not applicable - controls are not supported Analog Outputs
groups (AOBs, CROBs  Yes not supported
and Data Sets) in the  No
same control request:

1.6 Fill Out The Following

If configurable,
Items For Outstations Capabilities Current Value
list methods
Only
1.6.1 Timeout waiting for  None 5,000 ms

Application Confirm of  Fixed at 5,000 ms
solicited response  Configurable, range _______ to _______ms
message:  Configurable, selectable from ___,___,___ms
1.6.2 How often is time  Never needs time

synchronization  Within ______ seconds after IIN1.4 is set
required from the  Periodically every _______ seconds
master?
1.6.3 Device Trouble Bit  Never used

IIN1.6:  Reason for setting: Unable to access requested
data or execute CROB, assuming a valid
request has been received
1.6.4 File Handle Timeout:  Not applicable, files not supported

 Fixed at______ ms
 Configurable, range _______ to _______ms
1.6.5 Event Buffer Overflow  Discard the oldest event

Behaviour:  Discard the newest event
 Other, explain _________________________
1.6.6 Event Buffer • Single buffer for the Object Groups 2 and 32, size
Organization: 200.
• Separate buffer for the Object Group 111, size
100.
• Separate buffer for the Fault Locator events, size
100.
1.6.7 Sends Multi-Fragment  Yes

Responses:  No
1.6.8 DNP Command  Assign Class Not supported

Settings preserved  Analog Deadbands
through a device reset:  Data Set Prototypes
 Data Set Descriptors
1.7 Outstation Unsolicited If configurable,

Capabilities Current Value
Response Support list methods
1.7.1 Supports Unsolicited  Not Supported NA

Reporting:  Configurable, selectable from On and Off

If configurable,
1.8 Outstation Performance Capabilities Current Value
list methods
1.8.1 Maximum Time Base NA, not synchro-

Drift (milliseconds per nized by DNP
minute):
1.8.2 When does outstation  Never NA

set IIN1.4?  Asserted at startup until first Time Synchroniza-
tion request received
 Periodically, range ____to____ seconds
 Periodically, selectable from ____,____,___
seconds
 Range ____to____ seconds after last time sync
 Selectable from___,___,___seconds after last
time sync
 When time error may have drifted by range
____to____ ms
 When time error may have drifted by selectable
from ____,____,___
1.8.3 Maximum Internal Time NA

Reference Error when
set via DNP (ms):
1.8.4 Maximum Delay NA

Measurement error
(ms):
1.8.5 Maximum Response 100 ms (for the L-PRO Offliner

time (ms): case all sup-
ported points
mapped to the
DNP point lists)
1.8.6 Maximum time from NA

start-up to IIN 1.4
assertion (ms):
1.8.7 Maximum Event Time- • 0.1302 ms for

tag error for local Binary 60Hz sys-
and Double-bit I/O (ms): tems
• 0.1563 ms for
50 Hz sys-
tems
1.8.8 Maximum Event Time- • 0.1302 ms for

tag error for local I/O 60Hz sys-
other than Binary and tems
Double-bit data types • 0.1563 ms for
(ms): 50 Hz sys-
tems

Capabilities and The following tables identify the capabilities and current settings for each
Current DNP3 data type. Each data type also provides a table defining the data points
Settings for available in the device, default point lists configuration and a description of
Device how this information can be obtained in case of customized point configura-
Database tion.
2.1 Single-Bit Binary Inputs If configurable,

Static (Steady-State) Group Number: 1 Capabilities Current Value
Event Group Number: 2
list methods
2.1.1 Static Variation  Variation 1 - Single-bit Packed format

reported when variation  Variation 2 - Single-bit with flag
0 requested:  Based on point Index (add column to table
below)
2.1.2 Event Variation  Variation 1 - without time

reported when variation  Variation 2 - with absolute time
0 requested:  Variation 3 - with relative time
 Based on point Index (add column to table
below)
2.1.3 Event reporting mode:  Only most recent

 All events
2.1.4 Binary Inputs included  Always L-PRO Offliner

in Class 0 response:  Never
 Only if point is assigned to Class 1, 2, or 3
below)
2.1.5 Definition of Binary  Fixed, list shown in table below Complete list is L-PRO Offliner
Input Point List:  Configurable shown in the
 Other, explain_____________________ table below;
points excluded
from the default
configuration are
marked with ‘*’
1. Binary Inputs are scanned with 1 ms resolution.
2. Binary Input data points are user selectable; the data points avail-
Notes
able in the device for any given Binary Input point selection can be
obtained through the L-PRO Offliner software (see SCADA Setting
Summary).

Default Class Name for Name for

Point
Name Assigned to Events State when State when Description
Index
(1, 2, 3 or none) value is 0 value is 1
0 Self Check Fail 1 Inactive Active
1 Time Sync Loss 1 Inactive Active
2 External Input 1 1 Inactive Active
26 Virtual Input 1 1 Inactive Active

56 ProLogic 1
57 ProLogic 2 1 Inactive Active

80 Fault Information Available 1 Inactive Active
81 21P1 Trip 1 Inactive Active
86 21N1 Trip 1 Inactive Active
91 68 Power Swing 1 Inactive Active
92 Load Encroachment Block 1 Inactive Active
93 Distance Scheme Trip 1 Inactive Active
94 Distance Scheme Send 1 Inactive Active
95 DEF Scheme Trip 1 Inactive Active
96 DEF Scheme Send 1 Inactive Active
97 SOTF 1 Inactive Active
98 25/27/59 Sync Check 1 Inactive Active
99 59-1 Main Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 59-1 Main A, B

and C Trip
100 59-1 Aux Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 59-1 Aux A, B

and C Trip
101 59-2 Main Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 59-2 Main A, B

and C Trip

102 59-2 Aux Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 59-2 Aux A, B

and C Trip
103 59N Def Trip 1 Inactive Active
104 59N Inv Trip 1 Inactive Active
105 27 Main Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 27 Main A, B

and C Trip
106 27 Aux Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 27 Aux A, B and

C Trip
107 60 LOP 1 Inactive Active
108 60 CTS Main 1 Inactive Active
109 60 CTS Aux 1 Inactive Active
110 81-1 Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 81-1 OF, UF

and FRC Trip

and FRC Trip

and FRC Trip

and FRC Trip
114 50LS Main 1 Inactive Active OR of 50LS Main A, B

and C Trip
115 50LS Aux 1 Inactive Active OR of 50LS Aux A, B

and C Trip
116 50BF-1 Main 1 Inactive Active
117 50BF-1 Aux 1 Inactive Active
118 50BF-2 Main 1 Inactive Active
119 50BF-2 Aux 1 Inactive Active
120 51 Trip 1 Inactive Active
121 50 Trip 1 Inactive Active
122 51N Trip 1 Inactive Active
123 50N Trip 1 Inactive Active
124 51G Trip 1 Inactive Active
125 50G Trip 1 Inactive Active
126 46-51 Trip 1 Inactive Active
127 46-50 Trip 1 Inactive Active
128 Z Circle Trigger 1 Inactive Active
129 21P2 Alarm 1 Inactive Active

133 21N2 Alarm 1 Inactive Active
137 68 OutBlinder Alarm 1 Inactive Active
138 68 InBlinder Alarm 1 Inactive Active
139 59N Def Alarm 1 Inactive Active
140 59N Inv Alarm 1 Inactive Active
141 51 Alarm 1 Inactive Active
142 51 N Alarm 1 Inactive Active
143 51G Alarm 1 Inactive Active
144 46-51 Alarm 1 Inactive Active
145 50BF Initiate 1 Inactive Active
146 79 – 3 Phase Initiated 1 Inactive Active
147 79 – 3 Phase Blocked 1 Inactive Active
148 79 – 3 Phase Main Reclose 1 Inactive Active
149 79 – 3 Phase Aux Reclose 1 Inactive Active
150 79 – 3 Phase Lead Lockout 1 Inactive Active
151 79 – 3 Phase Follow Lockout 1 Inactive Active
152 79 – 1 Phase A Main Reclose 1 Inactive Active
153 79 – 1 Phase B Main Reclose 1 Inactive Active
154 79 – 1 Phase C Main Reclose 1 Inactive Active
155 79 – 1 Phase A Aux Reclose 1 Inactive Active
156 79 – 1 Phase B Aux Reclose 1 Inactive Active
157 79 – 1 Phase C Aux Reclose 1 Inactive Active
158 79 – 1 Phase Lead Lockout 1 Inactive Active
159 79 – 1 Phase Follow Lockout 1 Inactive Active
160 79 – 1 Phase Initiated 1 Inactive Active
161 79 – 1 Phase Blocked 1 Inactive Active
162 1 Phase Open Timeout 1 Inactive Active
163 1 Phase Fault Lockout 1 Inactive Active
164 3 Phase Fault Lockout 1 Inactive Active
165 1/3 Phase Fault Lockout 1 Inactive Active
166 79 Fault Lockout 1 Inactive Active
167 Successful Reclose Main 1 Inactive Active
168 Successful Reclose Aux 1 Inactive Active

169* 59-1 Main A Trip 1 Inactive Active
170* 59-1 Main B Trip 1 Inactive Active
171* 59-1 Main C Trip 1 Inactive Active
172* 59-1 Aux A Trip 1 Inactive Active
173* 59-1 Aux B Trip 1 Inactive Active
174* 59-1 Aux C Trip 1 Inactive Active
175* 59-2 Main A Trip 1 Inactive Active
176* 59-2 Main B Trip 1 Inactive Active
177* 59-2 Main C Trip 1 Inactive Active
178* 59-2 Aux A Trip 1 Inactive Active
179* 59-2 Aux B Trip 1 Inactive Active
180* 59-2 Aux C Trip 1 Inactive Active
181* 27 Main A Trip 1 Inactive Active
182* 27 Main B Trip 1 Inactive Active
183* 27 Main C Trip 1 Inactive Active
184* 27 Aux A Trip 1 Inactive Active
185* 27 Aux B Trip 1 Inactive Active
186* 27 Aux C Trip 1 Inactive Active
187* 81-1 OF Trip 1 Inactive Active
188* 81-1 UF Trip 1 Inactive Active
189* 81-1 FRC Trip 1 Inactive Active
199* 50LS Main A 1 Inactive Active
200* 50LS Main B 1 Inactive Active
201* 50LS Main C 1 Inactive Active
202* 50LS Aux A 1 Inactive Active
203* 50LS Aux B 1 Inactive Active
204* 50LS Aux C 1 Inactive Active

205* Output Contact 2 1 Open Closed
236* 46BC Trip 1 Inactive Active
237* 21P1 A Trip 1 Inactive Active
238* 21P1 B Trip 1 Inactive Active
239* 21P1 C Trip 1 Inactive Active
240* 21P1 G Trip 1 Inactive Active

257* 21N1 A Trip 1 Inactive Active
258* 21N1 B Trip 1 Inactive Active
259* 21N1 C Trip 1 Inactive Active
272* 50 A Trip 1 Inactive Active
273* 50 B Trip 1 Inactive Active
274* 50 C Trip 1 Inactive Active
275* 51 A Trip 1 Inactive Active
276* 51 B Trip 1 Inactive Active

277* 51 C Trip 1 Inactive Active
278* 50N A Trip 1 Inactive Active
279* 50N B Trip 1 Inactive Active
280* 50N C Trip 1 Inactive Active
281* 51N A Trip 1 Inactive Active
282* 51N B Trip 1 Inactive Active
283* 51N C Trip 1 Inactive Active

2.2 Binary Output Status

And Control Relay
Output Block If configurable,
Binary Output Status Group Number: 10 Capabilities Current Value
Binary Output Event Group Number: 11 list methods
CROB Group Number: 12
Binary Output Command Event Object
Num: 13
2.2.1 Minimum pulse time  Fixed at 0,000 ms (hardware may limit this
allowed with Trip, further)
Close, and Pulse On  Based on point Index (add column to table
commands: below)
2.2.2 Maximum pulse time  Fixed at 0,000 ms (hardware may limit this
allowed with Trip, further)
Close, and Pulse On  Based on point Index (add column to table
commands: below)
2.2.3 Binary Output Status  Always

included in Class 0  Never
response:  Only if point is assigned to Class 1, 2, or 3
below)
2.2.4 Reports Output  Never Not supported

Command Event  Only upon a successful Control
Objects:  Upon all control attempts
2.2.5 Event Variation  Variation 1 - without time Not supported L-PRO Offliner
reported when variation  Variation 2 - with absolute time (See Note 2
0 requested:  Based on point Index (add column to table below)
below)
2.2.6 Command Event  Variation 1 - without time Not supported L-PRO Offliner
Variation reported when  Variation 2 - with absolute time (See Note 2
variation 0 requested:  Based on point Index (add column to table below)
below)
2.2.7 Event reporting mode:  Only most recent Not supported L-PRO Offliner
 All events (See Note 2
below)
2.2.8 Command Event  Only most recent Not supported

reporting mode:  All events
2.2.9 Maximum Time  Not Applicable 10 s

between Select and  Fixed at 10 seconds
Operate:  Configurable, range ______ to ______ seconds
 Configurable, selectable from___,___,___sec-
onds
below)
2.2.10 Definition of Binary  Fixed, list shown in table below Complete list is L-PRO Offliner
Output Status/Control  Configurable shown in the
relay output block  Other, explain_____________________ table below;
(CROB) Point List: points excluded
from the default
configuration are
marked with ‘*’

1. Binary Outputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution.
2. Events are not supported for Binary Outputs (group 10), but most of Binary
Output points can be mapped to Binary Inputs (group 2) with full Event and Class
Data support. See L-PRO Offliner/DNP Configuration/Point Map screen for com-
plete point lists and configuration options.
NOTES
3. Virtual Inputs (default Binary Output points 0-29) can be used to control relay
output contacts. See L-PRO Offliner/Setting Group X/Output Matrix screen for
configuration options.
4. Binary Output data points are user selectable; the data points available in the
device for any given Binary Output point selection can be obtained through the
L-PRO Offliner software (see SCADA Setting Summary).
Default Class
Supported Control Operations Assigned to Events
(1, 2, 3 or none)
Cancel Currently Running Operation
Direct Operate - No Ack
Name for Name for

Name State when State when Change Command Description
value is 0 value is 1
Latch Off / NUL
Pulse On / NUL
Latch On / NUL
Select/Operate
Direct Operate
Point Index
Count > 1
Pulse Off
Close
Trip
0 Virtual Input 1 Y Y Y Y - Y Y - - - - Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

Default Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)

Name for Name for
Latch Off / NUL

Pulse On / NUL
Latch On / NUL
Select/Operate
Direct Operate
Point Index
Count > 1
Pulse Off
Close
Trip
at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s

at 1 s
29 Virtual Input 30 Y Y Y Y - Y - - - - - Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed

at 1 s
30 Get Next Fault Y Y Y Y - Y - - - - - Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed
Event at 1 s
31 Output Contact 2 - - - - - - - - - - - Open Closed None None

Default Class
(1, 2, 3 or none)

Name for Name for
Latch Off / NUL

Pulse On / NUL
Latch On / NUL
Select/Operate
Direct Operate
Point Index
Count > 1
Pulse Off
Close
Trip

2.3 Analog Input Points If configurable,

list methods
2.3.1 Static Variation  Variation 1 - 32-bit with flag

reported when variation  Variation 2 - 16-bit with flag
0 requested:  Variation 3 - 32-bit without flag
 Variation 4 - 16-bit without flag
 Variation 5 - single-precision floating point with
flag
 Variation 6 - double-precision floating point with
flag
below)
2.3.2 Event Variation  Variation 1 - 32-bit without time

reported when variation  Variation 2 - 16-bit without time
0 requested:  Variation 3 - 32-bit with time
 Variation 4 - 16-bit with time
 Variation 5 - single-precision floating point w/o
time
 Variation 6 - double-precision floating point w/o
time
 Variation 7 - single-precision floating point with
time
 Variation 8 - double-precision floating point with
time
below)
2.3.3 Event reporting mode:  Only most recent

 All events
2.3.4 Analog Inputs Included  Always

in Class 0 response:  Never
below)
2.3.5 How Deadbands are  A. Global Fixed L-PRO Offliner

set:  B. Configurable through DNP
 C. Configurable via other means
 D. Other, explain ________________________
 Based on point Index - column specifies which
of the options applies, B, C, or D
2.3.6 Analog Deadband  Simple

Algorithm:  Integrating
simple - just compares the difference from  Other, explain __________________________
the previous reported value
2.3.7 Definition of Analog  Fixed, list shown in table below Complete list is L-PRO Offliner
Input Point List:  Configurable shown in the
 Other, explain_____________________ table below;
points excluded
from the default
configuration are
marked with ‘*’

1. Analog Inputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution.
2. Nominal values in calculations for the following table are based on 69V sec-
ondary voltage * PT ratio for voltage channels, and either 1 A or 5A secondary
current * CT ratio for current channels dependent upon the format of CT config-
ured on the L-PRO.
3. Analog Input data points are user selectable; the data points available in the
device for any given Analog Input point selection can be obtained through the L-
PRO Offliner software (see SCADA Setting Summary).
4. When a fault location event is available, Binary Input Fault Information Avail-
able (default point index 80) is asserted while there are still fault location events
in the buffer (size 100). When a Pulse or Latch is received for the Binary Output
Get Next Fault Event (default point index 30, previous state is not important),
NOTES fault event information is put into the Analog Inputs. If there is no fault location
event available when the Binary Output is pulsed, the fault type is set to zero
Not all fault location events are reported trough DNP. In a burst of fault locations
from a fault, only the first processed event is available through DNP, all other
events within the following 100 ms interval are ignored. Outside 100 ms from the
processed fault location event, the system accepts another fault location event
and performs the same filtering. In addition, only fault location events generated
by trip elements are available.
The following bitmap id used for the fault information Type points:
0x0001 Phase A
0x0002 Phase B
0x0004 Phase C
0x0008 Ground

Transmitted Valuea Scalingb

Point Index
Default Class
Assigned to Multiplier Resolutiond
Name
Events
Minimum Maximumc (default/ (range))
Offset Units (default/ Description
(1, 2, 3 or none) maximal)
0 V1a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
1 V1a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
2 V1b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
3 V1b Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
4 V1c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
5 V1c Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
6 I1a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
7 I1a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
8 I1b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
9 l1b Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
10 I1c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
11 I1c Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
12 l1g Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
13 l1g Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
14 l01 Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
15 l01 Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
16 V2a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
17 V2a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
18 V2b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
19 V2b Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
20 V2c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
21 V2c Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
22 l2a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
23 I2a Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
24 I2b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
25 I2b Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
26 I2c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
27 l2c Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
28 l2g Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01
29 l2g Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
30 l02 Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 A 0.1 / 0.01
31 l02 Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
32 Line la Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 A 0.1 / 0.01 Summated value, depend-
ent on Ring Bus Configura-
tion.
33 Line la Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01 Summated value, depend-
tion.
34 Line lb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 A 0.1 / 0.01 Summated value, depend-
tion.
35 Line lb Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01 Summated value, depend-
tion.
36 Line lc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01 Summated value, depend-
tion.
37 Line lc Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01 Summated value, depend-
tion.
38 Line lg Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 A 0.1 / 0.01 Summated value, depend-
tion.

Point Index Transmitted Valuea Scalingb
Default Class
Name
Events
39 Line lg Angle -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01 Summated value, depend-
tion.
40 Line Za Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 Ohm 1.0 / 0.01 Dependent on Ring Bus
Configuration.
41 Line Za Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01 Dependent on Ring Bus
Configuration.
42 Line Zb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 Ohm 1.0 / 0.01 Dependent on Ring Bus
Configuration.
43 Line Zb Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01 Dependent on Ring Bus
Configuration.
44 Line Zc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 Ohm 1.0 / 0.01 Dependent on Ring Bus
Configuration.
45 Line Zc Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 degrees 0.1 / 0.01 Dependent on Ring Bus
Configuration.
46 Frequency 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.001 - 1.0) 0.0 Hz 0.01 / 0.001 Positive sequence frequency
47 Voltage (V1) 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.00001 - 1.0) 0.0 kV 0.01 / 0.00001 Positive sequence main volt-
age
48 Voltage (V2) 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.00001 - 1.0) 0.0 kV 0.01 / 0.00001 Negative sequence main
voltage
49 Voltage (V0) 2 0 Configurable 0.01 / (0.00001 - 1.0) 0.0 kV 0.01 / 0.00001 Zero sequence main voltage
50 Current (l1) 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01 Positive sequence line cur-
rent, dependent on the Ring
Bus Configuration.
51 Current (l2) 2 0 Confugrable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01 Negative sequence line cur-
rent, dependent on the Ring
Bus Configuration.
52 Current (i0) 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 A 1.0 / 0.01 Zero sequence line current,
dependent on the Ring Bus
Configuration.
53 P 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 MW 0.01 / 0.0001
54 Q 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 MVAr 0.01 / 0.0001
55 S 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 MVA 0.01 / 0.0001
56 Power factor 2 -1000 1000 0.01 / (0.001 - 0.1) 0.0 NA 0.01 / 0.001
57 Fault Information - none 0 65,535 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0 See note #4 on how to
DNP Time (High 16 access Fault Information.
bits)
58 Fault Information - none 0 65,535 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0

DNP Time (Middle
16 bits)
59 Fault Information - none 0 65,535 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0

DNP Time (Low 16
bits)
60 Fault Information - none 0 Configurable 0.1 0.0 Configur- 0.1

Fault Distance able (km or
miles)
61 Fault Information - none 0 15 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0

Type
62 Active Setting 2 1 8 1.0 0.0 A 1.0

Group Number
63 Self check Fail 2 0 65,535 1.0 0.0 NA 1.0
64 Pa 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 MW 0.1 / 0.00001
65 Pb 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 MW 0.1 / 0.00001
66 Pc 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 MW 0.1 / 0.00001
67 Qa 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 Mvar 0.1 / 0.00001
68 Qb 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 Mvar 0.1 / 0.00001
69 Qc 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 Mvar 0.1 / 0.00001
70 Sa 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 MVA 0.1 / 0.00001
71 Sb 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 MVA 0.1 / 0.00001
72 Sc 2 0 Configurable 0.1 / (0.00001- 1.0) 0.0 MVA 0.1 / 0.00001

Point Index Transmitted Valuea Scalingb
Default Class
Name
Events
73 Power Factor a 2 -1000 1000 0.01 / (0.001- 0.1) 0.0 NA 0.01 / 0.001
74 Power Factor b 2 -1000 1000 0.01 / (0.001- 0.1) 0.0 NA 0.01 / 0.001
75 Power Factor c 2 -1000 1000 0.01 / (0.001- 0.1) 0.0 NA 0.01 / 0.001
76 V1ab Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
77 V1ab Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
78 V1bc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
79 V1bc Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
80 V1ca Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
81 V1ca Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
82 V2ab Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
83 V2ab Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
84 V2bc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
85 V2bc Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
86 V2ca Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 1.0 / (0.01 - 1000) 0.0 kV 0.1 / 0.00001
87 V2ca Angle 2 -18,000 18,000 0.1 / (0.01 - 1.0) 0.0 Degrees 0.1 / 0.01
a. The minimum and maximum transmitted values are the lowest and highest values that the outstation will report in DNP analog input
objects. These values are integers if the outstation transmits only integers. If the outstation is capable of transmitting both integers
and floating-point, then integer and floating-point values are required for the minimums and maximums.
For example, a pressure sensor is able to measure 0 to 500 kPa. The outstation provides a linear conversion of the sensor's output
signal to integers in the range of 0 to 25000 or floating-point values of 0 to 500.000. The sensor and outstation are used in an appli-
cation where the maximum possible pressure is 380 kPa. For this input, the minimum transmitted value would be stated as 0 / 0.0
and the maximum transmitted value would be stated as 19000 / 380.000.
b. The scaling information for each point specifies how data transmitted in integer variations (16 bit and 32 bit) is converted to engi-
neering units when received by the Master (i.e. scaled according to the equation: scaled value = multiplier * raw + offset). Scaling
is not applied to Floating point variations since they are already transmitted in engineering units.
c. Maximal values are calculated as (2 * Configured Nominal / Multiplier) for voltage channels and as (40 * Configured Nominal /
Multiplier) for current channels (see Note 2 above for the nominal definitions).
d. Resolution is the smallest change that may be detected in the value due to quantization errors and is given in the units shown in the
previous column. This parameter does not represent the accuracy of the measurement.

2.4 Octet String Points If configurable,

list methods
2.4.1 Event reporting mode *:  Only most recent

 All events
2.4.2 Octet Strings Included  Always

in Class 0 response:  Never
below)
2.4.3 Definition of Octet  Fixed, list shown in table below

String Point List:  Configurable (current list may be shown in table
below)
 Other, explain Used for Event Log access as
described below
* Object 110 and 111 are Octet String Object used to provide access to the
Event Log text of the relay. Object 110 always contains the most recent event
in the relay. Object 111 is the corresponding change event object.
As stated in the DNP specifications, the variation of the response object rep-
resents the length of the string. The string represents the ASCII values of the
event text. The first two characters in the string can be used to quickly identify
fault location events. Fault locator events begin with the characters "FL"
(0x46, 0x4C hex). The following example shows a fault distance event re-
turned through either of the octet string objects:
Event Message:
FL2000Sep21 20:16:16.966: 21P1 AB 1.0km: Trip
DNP Octet string object components:
0x46 0x4C 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x30
0x53 0x65 0x70 0x32 0x31 0x20
0x32 0x30 0x3A 0x31 0x36 0x3A
0x31 0x36 0x2E 0x39 0x36 0x36
0x20 0x32 0x31 0x50 0x31 0x20
0x41 0x42 0x20 0x31 0x2E 0x30
0x6B 0x6D 0x3A 0x20 0x54 0x72
0x69 0x70

Implementation The following implementation table identifies which object groups and varia-
Table tions, function codes and qualifiers the device supports in both requests and re-
sponses. The Request columns identify all requests that may be sent by a
Master, or all requests that must be parsed by an Outstation. The Response col-
umns identify all responses that must be parsed by a Master, or all responses
that may be sent by an Outstation.
The implementation table must list all functionality required by the device wheth-
er Master or Outstation as defined within the DNP3 IED Conformance Test Pro-
cedures. Any functionality beyond the highest subset level supported is
NOTE
indicated by highlighted rows. Any Object Groups not provided by an outstation
or not processed by a Master are indicated by strikethrough (note these Object
Groups will still be parsed).
Request Response
DNP Object Group & Variation
Outstation parses Outstation can issue
Group Var Function Codes Function Codes

Description Qualifier Codes (hex) Qualifier Codes (hex)
Num Num (dec) (dec)
1 0 Binary Input - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
1 1 Binary Input - Packed format 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
1 2 Binary Input - With flags 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 0 Binary Input Event - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 1 Binary Input Event - Without time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp)
2 2 Binary Input Event - With absolute 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
time 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp)
2 3 Binary Input Event - With relative 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
10 0 Binary Output - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
10 2 Binary Output - Output Status with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
flag 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Binary Command - Control relay 3 (select) 17, 28 (index) 129 (response) Echo of request
output block (CROB) 4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, no ack)

Request Response

Num Num (dec) (dec)
20 0 Counter - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)

7 (freeze)
8 ( freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
20 1 Counter - 32-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
20 2 Counter - 16-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
20 5 Counter - 32-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
20 6 Counter - 16-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 0 Frozen Counter - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
21 1 Frozen Counter - 32-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 2 Frozen Counter - 16-bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 9 Frozen Counter - 32-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
21 10 Frozen Counter - 16-bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 0 Counter Event - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)

22 1 Counter Event - 32-bit with flag 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

130 (unsol. resp)
22 2 Counter Event - 16-bit with flag 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

130 (unsol. resp)
30 0 Analog Input - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 1 Analog Input - 32-bit with flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 2 Analog Input - 16-bit with flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 3 Analog Input - 32-bit without flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
30 4 Analog Input - 16-bit without flag 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
32 0 Analog Input Event - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 1 Analog Input Event - 32-bit without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 2 Analog Input Event - 16-bit without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 3 Analog Input Event - 32-bit with time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
32 4 Analog Input Event - 16-bit with time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
40 0 Analog Output Status - Any Varia- 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
tion

Request Response

Num Num (dec) (dec)
40 2 Analog Output Status - 16-bit with 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

flag
41 2 Analog Output - 16-bit 3 (select) 17, 28 (index) 129 (response) Echo of request
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, no ack)
50 1 Time and Date - Absolute time 2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1) 129 (response)
51 1 Time and Date CTO - Absolute time, 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
synchronized 130 (unsol. resp) (qty = 1)
51 2 Time and Date CTO - Absolute time, 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
unsynchronized 130 (unsol. resp) (qty = 1)
52 1 Time Delay - Coarse 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)

(qty = 1)
52 2 Time delay - Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)

(qty = 1)
60 1 Class Objects - Class 0 data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
60 2 Class Objects - Class 1 data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
80 1 Internal Indications - Packet format 2 (write) 00 (start-stop) 129 (response)

(index = 7)
110 0 Octet string 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
111 0 Octet string event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart) 129 (response)
No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart) 129 (response)
No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.) 129 (response)

Appendix G Mechanical Drawings
All Dimensions are in mm

283
262 162
200
340
177
Figure G.1: Mechanical Drawing
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix G-1

1 2 3 4 5
D04234R02.20
available on the rear panel.
Figure H.1: L-PRO Rear Panel View
L-PRO 4500 User Manual

6 7 8 9 10 Slot 6 and Slot 7 use M4 Thread Ø4 terminals
1. SLOT 1 to 3 / CON 3: Progammable External Inputs

2. SLOT 1 to 4 / CON 1: Progammable Outputs
3. SLOT 5 / CON 1 (A & B): 100BASE-T or 100BASE-FX
Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings
hardware configurations have a reduced number of analogs and digitals

6. SLOT 1 / CON 4: Power Supply
7. SLOT 1 to 4 / CON 2 (1-6): Programmable External Inputs
SLOT 1 to 4 / CON 2 (8-A): Programmable Outputs
The rear view shown is for the 10CT, 6PT with 24DI, 32 DO configuration. Other
8. SLOT 5 / CON 2: RS485
9. SLOT 5 / CON 4: External Clock, IRIG-B Un-Modulated Input
10. SLOT 5 / CON 3: External Clock, IRIG-B Modulated Input
Appendix H-1
Appendix I Connection Diagram
Figure I.1: L-PRO 4500 Connection Diagram for 10CT, 6PT with 24DI, 32DO hardware configuration
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix I-1

VAUX
Figure I.2: L-PRO 4500 Connection Diagram for 5CT, 4PT with 24DI, 32DO hardware configuration
Appendix I-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

I.1 Terminal Numbering and Hardware Configurations

The L-PRO 4500 uses a concatenation of Slot, Connector and Terminal for
identifying terminals. For example, Slot 1, Connector 1, Terminal 1 is referred
to as “111”. The terminal numbering is shown in Table I.1 and Table 1.2. Table
I.1 and Table 1.2 also show the availability of the slots for each hardware con-
figuration (an “X” denotes that this slot is included in the hardware configura-
tion).
Table I.1: Terminal Numbering and DIDO Hardware Configuration
Hardware Configuration
Availability
Slot Terminal
Terminal Numbering
Number Type(s)
8DI, 16DI, 16DI, 24DI,
8D0 16DO 24DO 32DO
0 (Front USB Port 010

X X X X
Panel)
1 8 Digital Inputs 111-11A

and 8 Digital 121-12A
X X X X
Outputs, 131-13A
Power Supply 141-143 (Power Supply)

and 8 Digital 221-22A X X X
Outputs 231-23A

and 8 Digital 321-32A X
Outputs 331-33A
4 8 Digital Outputs 411-41A

X X
421-42A
5 Communication 51A, 51B (Ethernet)

Ports 52 (Serial) X X X X
531, 541 (IRIG)
Table I.2: Terminal Numbering and Analog Hardware Configuration
Hardware Configuration
Slot Availability
Terminal Type(s) Terminal Numbering
Number
5CT, 4PT 10CT, 6PT
6 Analogs 601-628 X
7 Analogs 701-729 X X
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix I-3

Appendix J AC Schematic Drawings
Figure J.1: L-PRO 4500 AC Schematic
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix J-1

Appendix K DC Schematic Drawings
Figure K.1: L-PRO 4500 DC Schematic
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix K-1

Appendix L Recloser Operation Example
Introduction The L-PRO 4500 provides a Recloser function which has up to four shots of
reclosure in 3 phase mode and one shot of reclosure in 1 phase and 1/3 phase
modes. The function is highly flexible and requires careful setting consider-
ation. The following section provides examples of the operation of the 79 func-
tion based on real-world cases via the use of a real-time power system
simulator. The intention of this appendix is to provide a clear picture of how
different fault types are handled by the 79 Recloser function and to provide a
better understanding of how the timer settings and recloser modes relate to
real-world faults.
Relay Settings For all of the following examples, the following system was simulated using a
and System real-time power system simulator:
Parameters
Figure L.1: Single Line Diagram of Simulated System
The following relay settings are used for all of the operation examples in this
appendix:
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix L-1

Figure L.2: 21P Settings
Figure L.3: 21N Settings
Figure L.4: Breaker Status Inputs
• Output Contact Drop-out Timers = 100ms

• Circuit Breaker Operating Time = 60ms
Appendix L-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

3 Phase Trip Recloser Timer Settings

Scheme • T1: 0.5 s
• T2: 1 s
• T3: 1.5 s
• T4: 2 s
• Tp: 0.2 s
• TD: 10 s
• TF: 1 s
Output Matrix Settings
Figure L.5: Output Matrix Settings for 3 Phase examples
The Protection Scheme is set to 3 Phase for these cases
Summary of 3 Phase Fault Cases
No of
Fault Type Duration Recloser Mode Expected Behaviour
shots
1 All types Temporary (cleared Main (Lead) 4 3 phase trip, successful lead-reclose
(L-G, L-L, L-L-G, before the first then Aux (Fol- at the first shot, followed by a suc-
L-L-L) reclose shot, T1) lower) cessful follower-reclose after the pre-
defined time (TF or TD).
2 All types Temporary (cleared Main then Aux 4 3 phase trip, lead recloses and trips
(L-G, L-L, L-L-G, between the second at the first two shots, successful lead-
L-L-L) and the third reclose reclose at the third shot followed by
shots, T2<t<T3) successful follower reclose.
3 All types Permanent Main then Aux 4 3 phase trip, lead recloses and trips
(L-G, L-L, L-L-G, at all 4 shots, no follower reclosing,
L-L-L) both enter a lockout.
4 All types Permanent (lead cir- Main then Aux 4 3 phase trip, lead fails to reclose, fol-
(L-G, L-L, L-L-G, cuit breaker fails to lower replaces the lead after TC has
L-L-L) reclose) timed out, and recloses. After the 4
unsuccessful shots, enters a lockout.

Case 1
No of
shots
All types Temporary (cleared Main (Lead) 4 3 phase trip, successful lead-
(L-G, L-L, L-L-G, L-L-L) before the first then Aux (Fol- reclose at the first shot, followed
reclose shot, T1) lower) by a successful follower-reclose
after the pre-defined time (TF or
TD).
Figure L.6: Result of Case 1

Case 2
No of
shots
3 phase trip, lead recloses and

Temporary (cleared
trips at the first two shots,
All types between the second
Main then Aux 4 successful lead-reclose at the
(L-G, L-L, L-L-G, L-L-L) and the third reclose
third shot followed by successful
shots, T2<t<T3)
follower reclose.

Case 3
No of
shots
All types Permanent Main then Aux 4 3 phase trip, lead recloses and
(L-G, L-L, L-L-G, L-L-L) trips at all 4 shots, no follower
reclosing, both enter a lockout.

Case 4
No of
shots
All types Permanent (lead cir- Main then Aux 4 3 phase trip, lead fails to reclose,
(L-G, L-L, L-L-G, L-L-L) cuit breaker fails to follower replaces the lead after Tp
reclose) has timed out, and recloses. After
the 4 unsuccessful shots, enters
a lockout.

1 Phase Trip Timer Settings

• Tp: 0.2 s
• TD: 10 s
• TF: 1 s
• Use: Zone 2 Starter
Figure L.10: Output Matrix Settings for the 1 Phase cases
The Protection Scheme is set to 1 Phase for these cases
Summary of 1 Phase Fault Cases
No of
shots
5 L-G (A-G) Temporary (cleared Main then Aux 1 Phase A trips, phases B and C
before the first continue to be in service. Success-
reclose shot, T1) ful lead-reclose at the first shot
(phase A), followed by a success-
ful follower-reclose.
6 Multi-phase faults any Main then Aux 1 Only a 3 phase trip.

(L-L, L-L-G, L-L-L)
7 L-G (A-G) Permanent (lead cir- Main then Aux 1 Phase A trips, lead fails to reclose,
cuit breaker fails to follower replaces the lead and
reclose) recloses, then 3 phase trips and
locks-out.

Case 5
No of
shots
L-G (A-G) Temporary (cleared Main then Aux 1 Phase A trips, phases B and C
before the first continue to be in service. Suc-
reclose shot, T1) cessful lead-reclose at the first
shot (phase A), followed by a suc-
cessful follower-reclose.

Case 6
No of
shots
Multi-phase faults Any Main then Aux 1 Only a 3 phase trip.

(L-L, L-L-G, L-L-L)

Case 7
No of
shots
L-G (A-G) Permanent (lead cir- Main then Aux 1 Phase A trips, lead fails to
cuit breaker fails to reclose, follower replaces the
reclose) lead and recloses, then 3 phase
trips and locks-out.

1/3 - Phase Trip Timer Settings

• Tp: 0.2 s
• TD: 10 s
• TF: 1 s
• Use: Zone 2 Starter
Figure L.14: Output matrix settings for the 1/3 Phase Cases
The Protection Scheme is set to 1/3 Phase for these cases
Summary of 1/3 Phase Fault Cases
Recloser Mode
Expected
Fault Type Duration No of shots
Behaviour
3 Ph 1 Ph
8 L-G (A-G) Temporary (cleared Main Main 1 Phase A trips,

before the first then Aux then Aux phases B and C
reclose shot, T1) continue to be in
service. Successful
lead-reclose at the
first shot (phase A),
followed by a
successful
follower-reclose.
9 Multi-phase faults Temporary (cleared Aux then Aux then 1 3 phase trip, suc-
(L-L, L-L-G, L-L-L) before the first Main Main cessful lead-reclose
reclose shot, T1) at the first shot, fol-
lowed by a success-
ful follower-reclose.
10 L-G (A-G) Permanent Main Main 1 Phase A trips, lead

Only Only recloses and
3 phase trips, and
then enter a lockout.
No follower
reclosing,

Case 8
Recloser Mode
Fault Type Duration No of shots Expected Behaviour
3 Ph 1 Ph
Phase A trips, phases

B and C continue to
be in service.
Temporary (cleared
Main then Main then Successful lead-
L-G (A-G) before the first reclose 1
Aux Aux reclose at the first shot
shot, T1)
(phase A), followed by
a successful follower-
reclose.

Case 9
Recloser Mode
3 Ph 1 Ph
3 phase trip,
successful lead-
Temporary (cleared
Multi-phase faults Aux then Aux then reclose at the first
before the first reclose 1
(L-L, L-L-G, L-L-L) Main Main shot, followed by a
shot, T1)
successful follower-
reclose.

Case 10
Recloser Mode
3 Ph 1 Ph
L-G (A-G) Permanent Main Only Main Only 1 Phase A trips, lead
recloses and 3 phase
trips, and then enter a
lockout. No follower
reclosing,

Appendix M Failure Modes
M.1 Actions
A - DSP System Failure
The Unit Functional LED changes from green to off.The RL1 contact on the
rear panel closes to activate a remote alarm. All other contacts are forced inac-
tive.
The watch-dog repeatedly attempts to re-start the DSP for diagnostic purposes.
The Unit Functional LED stays off, RL1 remains closed and the other contacts
remain de-energized, even for a successful re-start. Only a power-down/pow-
er-up cycle will reset the Unit Functional LED to green, open RL1,and re-en-
ergize the other contacts.
B – DSP Self-Check Fail

The Self Check Fail output can be assigned and used in ProLogic statements
and the Output Matrix.
There are two possibilities for DSP Self Check Fail, either Alarm or Block.
Both are related to the dc offset on a channel which should not occur with prop-
er calibration. Alarm just drives the optional output contact but Block causes
the Relay Functional LED to go out and the relay to be unable to drive any out-
put contact (as in the first and last paragraphs of section A - DSP System Fail-
ure above).
C – DSP- Host Comm Failure
D - Host Self-Check Fail

The Service Required LED changes from off to red.
E – Host System Fail

The Test Mode LED changes from off to red until the Host has rebooted. The
watchdog will continue to attempt to re-start the Host several times. If the Host
reboots but cannot return to normal operation, the Service Required LED
changes from off to red.
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix M-1

Appendix N IEC 61850 Conformance
Statements and Data
Mapping Specification
N.1 Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
(PICS)
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

for the IEC 61850 interface in L-PRO 4500
Document Version1: D04412R01.10

Date: 2021-09-14
Based upon UCAIUG PICS Template version 2.3
UCA International Users Group

Testing Sub Committee
1. The version shown in the user manual differs slightly in formatting to the official released version.
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual Appendix N-1

Appendix N IEC 61850 Conformance Statements and Data Mapping Specification
General The following ACSI conformance statements are used to provide an overview
and details about L-PRO 4500, with firmware v2.2:
• ACSI basic conformance statement
• ACSI models conformance statement
• ACSI service conformance statement
The statements specify the communication features mapped to IEC 61850-8-1
and IEC 61850-9-2.
ACSI basic The basic conformance statement is defined in Table N.1, “Basic conformance
conformance statement”.
statement
Table N.1: Basic conformance statement
Client/ Server/ Value/

Subscriber Publisher Comments
Client-Server roles
B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICA- - YES

TION-ASSOCIATION)
B12 Client side of (TWO-PARTY-APPLICA- -

TION-ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used YES
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used Deprecated

Ed2
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used
B24 SCSM: other NO
Generic substation event model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side - YES
B32 Subscriber side YES -
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side
B42 Subscriber side
– = not applicable
YES = supported
NO or empty = not supported
Appendix N-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

ACSI Models The ACSI models conformance statement is defined in Table N.2, “ACSI
Conformance models conformance statement”.
Statement
Table N.2: ACSI models conformance statement

If Server side (B11) and/or Client side

(B12) supported
M1 Logical device YES c1
M2 Logical node YES c1
M3 Data YES c1
M4 Data set YES c2
M5 Substitution NO
M6 Setting group control NO
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control YES
M7-1 sequence-number YES
M7-2 report-time-stamp YES
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion YES
M7-4 data-set-name YES
M7-5 data-reference YES
M7-6 buffer-overflow YES
M7-7 entryID YES
M7-8 BufTm YES
M7-9 IntgPd YES
M7-10 GI YES
M7-11 conf-revision YES
M8 Unbuffered report control YES
M8-1 sequence-number YES
M8-2 report-time-stamp YES
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion YES
M8-4 data-set-name YES
M8-5 data-reference YES
M8-6 BufTm YES
M8-7 IntgPd YES
M8-8 GI YES
M8-9 conf-revision YES

Table N.2: ACSI models conformance statement

Logging NO
M9 Log control NO
M9-1 IntgPd NO
M10 Log NO
M11 Control YES
M17 File Transfer YES
M18 Application association YES c1
M19 GOOSE Control Block YES
M20 Sampled Value Control Block NO
c1 Server must be Y if B11=Yes; Client must be Y if B12=Y

c2 Server must be Y if M7-Y or M8=Y or M9=Y or M19=Y or M20=Y
If GSE (B31/32) is supported
M12 GOOSE YES YES
M13 GSSE Deprecated

Ed2
If SVC (B41/42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC NO
M15 Unicast SVC NO
For all IEDs
M16 Time YES
YES = service is supported

NO or empty = service is not supported

ACSI Service The ACSI service conformance statement is defined in ACSI service
Conformance Conformance statement (depending on the statements in Table N.1,
Statement “Basic conformance statement” and Table N.2, “ACSI models
conformance statement”).
Table N.3: ACSI service Conformance statement
AA: Client Server

Ed. Services Comments
TP/MC (C) (S)
Server: if B11=Y or B12=Y
S1 1,2 GetServerDirectory TP YES

(LOGICAL-DEVICE)
Application association: if B11=Y or B12=Y
S2 1,2 Associate YES
S3 1,2 Abort YES
S4 1,2 Release YES
Logical device: if M1=Y
S5 1,2 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory TP YES
Logical node: if M2=Y
S6 1,2 GetLogicalNodeDirectory TP YES
S7 1,2 GetAllDataValues TP YES
Data: if M3=Y
S8 1,2 GetDataValues TP YES
S9 1,2 SetDataValues TP NO
S10 1,2 GetDataDirectory TP YES
S11 1,2 GetDataDefinition TP YES
Data set: if M4=Y
S12 1,2 GetDataSetValues TP YES
S13 1,2 SetDataSetValues TP NO Deprecated in Ed2
S14 1,2 CreateDataSet TP NO
S15 1,2 DeleteDataSet TP NO
S16 1,2 GetDataSetDirectory TP YES

AA: Client Server

TP/MC (C) (S)
Substitution: if M5=Y
S17 1,2 SetDataValues TP NO
Setting group control: if M6=Y
S18 1,2 SelectActiveSG TP NO
S19 1,2 SelectEditSG TP NO
S20 1,2 SetEditSGValues TP NO
S21 1,2 ConfirmEditSGValues TP NO
S22 1,2 GetEditSGValues TP NO
S23 1,2 GetSGCBValues TP NO
Reporting: If M7=Y or M8=Y
Buffered report control block (BRCB); If M7=Y
S24 1,2 Report TP YES
S24- 1,2 data-change (dchg) YES
S24- 1,2 quality-change (qchg) YES
S24- 1,2 data-update (dupd) NO
S25 1,2 GetBRCBValues TP YES
S26 1,2 SetBRCBValues TP YES
Unbuffered report control block (URCB) If M8=Y
S27 1,2 Report TP YES
S27- 1,2 data-change (dchg) YES
S27- 1,2 quality-change (qchg) YES
S27- 1,2 data-update (dupd) NO
S28 1,2 GetURCBValues TP YES
S29 1,2 SetURCBValues TP YES
Logging: If M9=Y or M10=Y
Log control block; If M9=Y
S30 1,2 GetLCBValues TP NO
S31 1,2 SetLCBValues TP NO
Log; If M10=Y
S32 1,2 QueryLogByTime TP NO

AA: Client Server

TP/MC (C) (S)
S33 1,2 QueryLogAfter TP NO
S34 1,2 GetLogStatusValues TP NO
Generic substation event model (GSE): If M19=Y
GOOSE
S35 1,2 SendGOOSEMessage MC YES
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S36 1,2 GetGoReference TP NO
S37 1,2 GetGOOSEElementNum- TP NO

ber
S38 1,2 GetGoCBValues TP YES
S39 1,2 SetGoCBValues TP NO
GSSE
S40 1 SendGSSEMessage MC Deprecated in Edition 2
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S41 1 GetReference TP Deprecated in Edition 2
S42 1 GetGSSEElementNumber TP Deprecated in Edition 2
S43 1 GetGsCBValues TP Deprecated in Edition 2
S44 1 SetGsCBValues TP Deprecated in Edition 2
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC): If M20=Y
Multicast SV
S45 1,2 SendMSVMessage MC NO
Multicast Sampled Value Control Block
S46 1,2 GetMSVCBValues TP NO
S47 1,2 SetMSVCBValues TP NO
Unicast SV
S48 1,2 SendUSVMessage TP NO
Unicast Sampled Value Control Block
S49 1,2 GetUSVCBValues TP NO
S50 1,2 SetUSVCBValues TP NO

AA: Client Server

TP/MC (C) (S)
Control: If M11=Y
S51 1,2 Select NO
S52 1,2 SelectWithValue TP NO
S53 1,2 Cancel TP NO
S54 1,2 Operate TP YES
S55 1,2 CommandTermination TP NO
S56 1,2 TimeActivatedOperate TP NO
File transfer: If M17=Y
S57 1,2 GetFile TP YES
S58 1,2 SetFile TP NO
S59 1,2 DeleteFile TP YES
S60 1,2 GetFileAttributeValues TP YES
S61 1,2 GetServerDirectory TP YES

(FILE-SYSTEM)
Time
T1 1,2 Time resolution of internal 10 Nearest negative power of

clock (1ms) 2-n in seconds (number 0..24)
T2 1,2 Time accuracy of internal T3 TL (ms)(low accuracy),

clock T3 <7 (c1)
T0 (ms)(<=10ms),
7 <= T3 < 10 (c1)
T1 (μs)(<=1ms),
10<= T3 < 13
T2 (μs)(<=100μs),
13 <= T3 < 15
T3 (μs)(<=25μs),
15 <= T3 < 18
T4 (μs)(<=4μs),
18 <= T3 < 20
T5 (μs)(<=1μs),
20 <= T3 < 25
T3 1,2 Supported TimeStamp - 16 Nearest value of 2-n in

resolution (25 μs) seconds (number 0...24)
c1 TL may only be specified for Ed2. If Ed1 has accuracy which is better than 1 second but is not T1 then declare
T0.

N.2 Model Implementation Conformance Statement

(MICS)
Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS)

for the IEC 61850 Edition 2 server interface in L-PRO 4500

Date: 2021-09-14
Based upon
UCA International Users Group
Testing Sub Committee
MICS template for Server Test Procedures First edition and Edition 2 servers
Template version 1.2
1. The formatting of the official version of this document differs slightly from the version shown here in the
user manual, but the content is the same.

Introduction This model implementation conformance statement is applicable for L-PRO

4500, with firmware v2.2:
This MICS document specifies the modeling extensions compared to IEC
61850 Edition 2. For the exact details on the standardized model please com-
pare the ICD substation configuration file: “ERLPhaseLPRO4500v3.icd”, ver-
sion 4 revision 2.
Table N.4, “Logical Nodes List” contains the list of implemented logical
nodes.
Logical Nodes The following table contains the list of logical nodes implemented in the de-
List vice:
Table N.4: Logical Nodes List
L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD (Physical device information)
LLN0 (Logical node zero)
LGOS (GOOSE Subscription)
P: Logical Nodes for protection functions
PDIS (Distance)
PSCH (Protection Scheme)
PTOF (Overfrequency)
PTUF (Underfrequency)
PFRC (Rate of change of frequency)
PTOC (Time overcurrent)
PIOC (Instantaneous overcurrent)
PTUV (Undervoltage)
PTOV (Overvoltage)
PSOF (Switch on to fault)
R: Logical nodes for protection related functions
RPSB (Power swing detection/blocking)
RSYN (Synchronism-check)
RBRF (Breaker failure)
RREC (Autoreclosing)
RFLO (Fault locator)
RDRE (Disturbance record function)
G: Logical Nodes for generic references
GGIO (Generic process I/O)
M: Logical Nodes for metering and measurement
MSQI (Sequence and Imbalance)
MMXU (Measurement)

N.3 TISSUES Implementation Conformance Statement

(TICS)
Introduction This document provides a template for the Tissues conformance statement. Ac-
cording to the UCA IUG QAP the Tissue conformance statement is required to
perform a conformance test and is referenced on the certificate.
This document is applicable for L-PRO 4500 with firmware v2.2.
Date: 2021-09-14
Mandatory Below tables give an overview of the applicable mandatory Tissues. Items in
Edition 2 italic are brief interpretations provided by the UCA International Users Group
Tissues to aid in interpretation and is not normative. The original TISSUE should con-
sulted for details of changes.
Table N.5: Mandatory Edition 2 Tissues
Implemented
Tissue Description
Y/na
Part 6
658 Tracking related features na

EntryID and CST missing, these are checked by schema
663 FCDA element cannot be a “functionally constrained logical Y

node”
doName now mandatory in FCDA element,
SCT: refuse to make empty doName? ICT: Refuse SCD
668 Autotransformer modeling na

Autotransformer model in substation section has changed
687 SGCB ResvTms na

SettingControl has added attribute resvTms
see also TISSUE 845
719 ConfDataSet - maxAttributes definition is confusing Y

maxAttributes now means max count of FCDA in dataset
721 Log element name na

LN0/Log now has optional attribute “name”
768 bType VisString65 is missing na

VisString65 added as SCL BasicType
779 object references na

“@” as first character in object references now allowed
788 SICS S56 from optional to mandatory na

SICS S56=”Interpret IED capabilities and prohibit unsupported
usage”

Implemented
Tissue Description
Y/na
789 ConfLdName as services applies to both server and client na

Many changes made to Services section
804 valKind and IED versus System configuration na

valImport missing/false DAI means ICT shall ignore value in
SCD and SCT shall not change from ICD/IID value.
Instance section inherits from DA/BDA element.
806 Max length of log name inconsistent between -6 and -7-2 na

LogControl.logName and Log.name restricted to 32 chars
807 Need a way to indicate if “Owner” present in RCB Y

Services/ReportSettings@owner added
823 ValKind for structured data attributes Y

valKind is prohibited on structured attributes
824 Short addresses on structured data attributes na

sAddr is now allowed for structured attributes
825 Floating point value na

Server shall support <Val> with exponential notation
845 SGCB ResvTms na

Services/SettingGroups/SGEdit added attribute resvTms
Services/SettingGroups/ConfSG added attribute resvTms
See also TISSUE 687
853 SBO and ProtNs na

DA[@name=SBO] element shall have ProtNS element
855 Recursive SubFunction na

Substation section extension must be tolerated
856 VoltageLevel frequency and phases na

857 Function/SubFunction for ConductingEquipment na

886 Missing 8-1 P-types na

“tP_IP_UDP_PORT” and “tP_IP_TCP_PORT” added
901 tServices as AP or as IED element Y

Rules for contents of AP/Server/Services are now defined
936 SupSubscription parameter usage is difficult Y

SupSubscription “max” replaced by “maxGo” and “maxSv”
1147 tServices - FileHandling not consistent with -7-2 Y

Services/FileHandling now means only support for GetFile and
GetFileAttributeValues and NOT SetFile/DeleteFile
1185 Valkind value Conf for EX FC data na

valKind=Conf is allowed for dataNs
1284 SCSM mapping may require a communication section in an ICD Y

file
Server IEDs supporting client/server associations to 61850-8-1
shall include a <Communication> section

Implemented
Tissue Description
Y/na
1328 Limitation on the size of data type templates identifiers Y

Identifer now limited to 255 characters
1395 Client LN attributes na

ReportControl/RptEnabled/ClientLN@ldInst shall be “LD0” for
pure clients (without any Logical Devices)
1402 ExtRef during engineering na

an ExtRef.intAddr attribute value unequal to empty string (pre-
scribed or filled by the IED tool) is the flag indicating that the
ExtRef shall not be deleted by the system tool. The system tool
can however remove the link to the source IED
<<applicable for SCL tool test>>
1415 SICS-S110 IID import mandatory for Edition2 na

only the import of data model modifications and CF value
changes is mandatory for system tool
1419 Support of ldName on other IEDs na

SICS I212 is now mandatory
1444 Need to support fixed and SCT controlled Datasets na

Services/xxxSetttings@datSet=fix now means “data set pointed
by Control Block cannot be altered from ICD/IID value <<appli-
cable for SCL tool test>>
1445 ConfReportControl and a fixed ReportSettings na

Control block capabilities must be consistent
1450 originalSclXxx computation rules Y

Ed2 ICD/IID files specifying SCL@version=2007 SHALL include
originalSCLVersion=2007 and originalSCLRevision as attributes
of the <IED>element
1485 Need to supercede Tissue 1398 to clarify SCT behavior na

Same as TISSUE 1450 <<applicable for SCL tool test>>
Part 7-1
828 Data model namespace revision IEC 61850-7-4:2007[A] Y

Both 2007 and 2007A are allowed for namespace name
948 Enumeration (string) values format Y

Enums are limited to 127 characters from Basic-Latin and Latin-
1 character sets
1151 simulated GOOSE disappears after 1st appearance when Y

LPHD.Sim = TRUE
New LGOS state machine defined, but TISSUE is not IntOp2,
therefore TISSUE is optional if LGOS is used
1396 The use and configuration flow of LGOS and LSVS is unclear Y
If Services/SupSubscription@maxGo > 1 then at least 1 LGOS
must exist. Same for maxSv/LSVS.
If maxGo > count(LGOS) then SCT can create additional
LGOS. Same for maxSv/LSVS

Implemented
Tissue Description
Y/na
1447 Restriction on ENUMtypes in SCL na

If a ENUM DA limits write or configuration to a subset, then that
subset must be declared
1457 Multiple DOI nodes with the same name Y

LN can have no more than one DOI with same name
1468 Re-use DO from other LN na

allow standard or private dataNs
1491 CmdBlk blocks itself? na

The data CmdBlk shall have no effect on the controllable data
Mod or CmdBlk
1495 GetVariableAccessAttributes error code Y

Return MMS error access/object-non-existent if the object does
not exist
Part 7-2
728 BRCB: could PurgeBuf be set when RptEna=TRUE? Y

PurgeBuf while RptEna=true is prohibited
778 AddCause values – add value not-supported na

Align 7-2 with 8-1 (nothing new to 8-1)
780 What are unsupported trigger option at a control block? Y
All control blocks must support all trigger options
783 TimOper Resp- ; add Authorization check na

Clarifies Time-Operated Controls
786 AddCause values 26 and 27 are switched na

Annex B.2 has wrong AddCause values
820 Mandatory ACSI services (use for PICS template) Y

Model entries M18 (Application Association), M19 (GCB), M20
(SVCB) are new. Services S17 (Substitution) and S61 (Get-
ServerDirectory) are new. Services S1, S3, S4, S5, S6, S8,
S16, S18, S23, S36, S37, S41, S42 are changed.
858 typo in enumeration ServiceType na

Tracking serviceType now has GetLogicalNodeDirectory
861 dchg of ConfRev attribute na

Clarifies (tracking) BTS.confRev is AFTER BRCB change
1050 GTS Phycomaddr definition in SCL na

(Tracking) GTS needs a special structure for SCL
1071 Length of DO name Y

Private DO name length shall be <=12 including instance
1127 Missing owner attribute in BTS and UTS na

NSD files for 61850-7-3 show owner in (tracking) BTS/UTS
1202 GI not optional Y

GI support is mandatory for both URCB and BRCB
1232 EntryID needs clarification Y

Segments of a report shall have same identifiers

Implemented
Tissue Description
Y/na
1242 NTS definition na

NTS.resv have been added
1307 Segmented report with Buffer overflow Y

Segments of a report shall have identical buf-overflow value
1428 MTS and NTS should use svOptFlds na

MTS.optFlds and NTS.optFlds now have bType=SvOptFlds
1630 Attributes in CDC=LTS do not match 8-1 definition na

Order of attributes in LTS changed to:
logEna, logRef, datSet, oldEntrTm, newEntrTm, oldEnt,
newEnt, trgOps, intgPd
Part 7-3
697 persistent command / PulseConfig na

PulseConfig adds enum “persistent-feedback”
DPC.cmdQual==”persistent” is conditionally allowed
698 Wrong case is BAC.dB attribute na

attribute renamed from “dB” to “db”
711 blkEna freeze data update while setting its quality to operater- na
Blocked
Mode=Blocked shall not cause q.operatorBlocked
722 Units for 'h' and 'min' not in UnitKind enumeration. na

New unit enums 84=hours, 85=minutes
919 Presence Condition for sVC na

svC may be valKind=Conf in ICD file
925 Presence of i or f attribute - Problem with writing na

New constructed attribute class "AnalogueValueCtl"
926 Presence Conditions within RangeConfig Y

All or none of hhLim+hLim+lLim+llLim shall be present
954 Data attributes with FC=CF should have trgOp=dchg Y

Some INS and HST and CSG attributes missing dchg
1078 CMV.t update if rangeAng changed na

Add rangeAng to“reasons-to-update-timestamp-of-CMV”
1565 db = 0 behaviour na
db=0 not longer suppresses reporting
1578 dataAttribute NameSpace content Y

Attributes with FC=EX must be initialized in ICD/IID file
Part 7-4
671 mistake in definition of Mod & Beh Y

Beh=on, q=test should be “Processed as valid”
674 CDC of ZRRC.LocSta is wrong na

ZRRC LocSta should be CDC=SPC
676 Same data object name used with different CDC na

LCCH.Fer renamed to FerCh, LCCH.RedFer to RedFerCh

Implemented
Tissue Description
Y/na
677 MotStr is used with different CDC in PMMS and SOPM LN na

classes
Rename SOPM.MotStr to MotStrNum
679 Remove CycTrMod Enum na

Enum is no longer used, use TrMod instead
680 SI unit for MHYD.Cndct na

Change unit from S/cm2 to S/m
681 Enum PIDAlg na

Typographical error, invalid XML syntax
682 ANCR.ParColMod na
ParColMod enum values text have changed
683 Enum QVVR.IntrDetMth na

IntrDetMth enum values text have changed
685 Enum ParTraMod na

ParTraMod enum values text have changed
686 New annex H - enums types in XML Y

Many changes have been made to enumeration names
694 Data object CmdBlk na

CmdBlk semantics have changed
696 LSVS.St (Status of subscription) Y

LSVS.St is now mandatory
712 interpretation of quality operatorBlocked na

Mode and Behavior semantics have changed
713 DO Naming of time constants in FFIL na

Many DO names in FFIL have changed
714 Enums for ShOpCap and SwOpCap na

Type for YPSH.ShOpCap and XSWI.SwOpCap have changed
715 RBDR.ChNum1 na
RBDR.ChNum1 changes from optional to conditional
716 TAXD text for condition na

TAXD.SmRte condition for inclusion has changed
724 ANCR.Auto na
ANCR.Auto changes from mandatory to optional
725 Loc in LN A-group na

Loc changes to optional, LocKey/LocSta conditions change
734 LLN0.OpTmh vs. LPHD.OpTmh na

LLN0.OpTmh deleted, LPHD.OpTmH added as conditional
736 PFSign na
MMXU.PFSign enum is extended with 3=Excitation
742 GAPC.Str, GAPC.Op and GAPC.StrVal na

Objects have instance indicator removed (ex, Str1 to Str)

Implemented
Tissue Description
Y/na
743 CCGR.PmpCtl and CCGR.FanCtl na

Object have instance indicator added (ex:PmpCtl to PmpCtl1)
744 LN STMP, EEHealth and EEName na

Removed STMP.EEHealth and STMP.EEName
772 LPHD.PwrUp/PwrDn should be transient na

These objects are now transient
773 Loc, LocKey and LocSta YPSH and YLTC na

Add Loc, LocKey and LocSta in YLTC and YPSH (optional)
774 ITCI.LocKey na
Add ITCI.LocKey as optional
776 LPHD.OutOv/InOv and LCCH.OutOv/InOv na

Clarified: stays true until buffer space again available
800 Misspelling in CSYN na

CSYN.VInvTmms renamed to CSYN.VIntvTmms
802 CCGR and Harmonized control authority na

Add Loc, LocKSta to every controllable LN (e.g. FSPT)
808 Presence condition of ZMoT.DExt and new DOs na

Change ZMOT.DExt to optional; add TotThmSt and MotSt
831 Setting of ConfRevNum in LGOS Y

Add RxConfRevNum to LGOS and LSVS
838 Testing in Beh=Blocked na

Change sematic of Beh=Blocked to allow controls to be
acknowledged even when LN is blocked.
844 MFLK.PhPiMax, MFLK.PhPiLoFil, MFLK.PhPiRoot DEL->WYE na

Change these NFLK objects from cdc=DEL to cdc=WYE
877 QVUB -settings should be optional na

Change QVUB.UnbDetMth and QVUB.StrVal to optional
908 ARIS.StrSeq – transient na

Change ARIS.StrSeq to transient
909 Remove ANCR.ColOpR and ColOpL na

Replace ANCR.ColOpR and ANCR.ColOpL with ANCR.Col-
Chg. Add YEFN.ColChg
912 Clarification of PwrRtg/VARtg na

Change many DOs in YPTR, and ZGEN, see name space
2007A2.nsd for final result
920 Resetable Counter is NOT resetable na

Change GGIO.CntRs to CntVal; Same for FCNT
932 Rename AVCO.SptVol to AVCO.VolSpt na
933 Presence of LCCH.RedFerCh and RedRxCnt na

Change the presence condition of LCCH.RedChLiv
939 Change CDC for ANCR.FixCol na

Change ANCR.FixCol from APC to ASG

Implemented
Tissue Description
Y/na
991 LGOS: GoCBRef (as well as LSVS.SvCBRanre ef) should be Y

mandatory
LGOS.GoCBRef and LSVS.SvCBRef are now both mandatory
1007 PTRC as fault indicator - Update of description required na

PTRC.Tr and Op and Str conditional (at least 1 of group)
1044 TapChg in AVCO na

AVCO.TapChg is now optional
1077 Rename DOnames within LTIM na

LTIM.TmChgDayTm, changed to TmChgDay;
LTIM.TmChgStdTm changed to TmChgStd
1256 New DO for LTIM to set time “manually” na

Add LTIM.TmSet
1331 Mod, Beh and Health with q=TEST, client can't receive their Y
states
Mod while in Blocked will always be processed
1426 Add two DO for leap seconds in LTIM na

LTIM.Leap added,
1456 Annex A and Mod/Beh/Health Y

Mod.stVal writes always ignore test bits in controls
1568 ISAF.AlmReset ->transient na

Change ISAF.AmlReset to transient
Part 8-1
770 GoID type mitmatch 18.1.1 and 18.1.2.5.2 Y

GoID string length is now 129
784 Tracking of control (CTS) na

Tracking CTS has been added
817 Fixed-length GOOSE float encoding na

GOOSE float is encoded Tag-0x87, length=5, first octet=8
827 Mandatory ACSI services (Part of 7-2 TISSUE resolution) Y

Change Table 111 (ServicesSupported): Add initiate, abort, and
release. Change conditions for defineNamedVariables.
834 File dir name length 64 Y

Filename length changed from 32 to 64
951 Encoding of Owner attribute na

xRCB.owner is encoded as 4 octets(IPv4) or 16 octets(IPv6)
1040 More associate error codes Y

3 additional associate error codes added
1178 Select Response+ is non-null value na

Response to SBO read should be <CO_CtrlObjectRef>
1324 The response- for DeleteNamedVariableList is not defined na

numDeleted=0; error=service/object-constraint-conflict
1345 Fixed-length GOOSE ASN.1 length encoding na

GOOSE publisher shall always encode minimum size legth field

Implemented
Tissue Description
Y/na
1441 Optonal fields in buffered reports Y

Writing BRCB.optFld shall not cause a purgeBuf operation
1442 Journal variableTag for ReasonCode na

Example in the standard is incorrect
1453 Purge buffer on write to BRCB Y

PurgeBuf only occurs if different value is written
1454 Reports can be transmitted before write (RptEna=true) is con- na

firmed
1500 the response for DeleteNamedVariableList with a non-existent na

LN is not specified
CreateDataSet/DefineNamedVariableList specifying a non-
existing LD/LN shall fail with access/object-non-existent

N.4 Protocol Implementation eXtra Information for

Testing (PIXIT)
Protocol Implementation eXtra Information for Testing (PIXIT) for the IEC 61850
Edition 2 server interface in
L-PRO 4500

Date: 2021-09-14
Based Upon UCAIug Server PIXIT

Template version 18

PIXIT for Server Introduction

This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for
testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850 interface in L-PRO 4500 with firmware ver-
sion v2.2.
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a confor-
mance test according to IEC 61850-10. The PIXIT entries contain information
which is not available in the PICS, MICS, TICS documents or SCL file.
Each table specifies the PIXIT for applicable ACSI service model as structured
in IEC 61850-10. The “Ed” column indicates if the entry is applicable for IEC
61850 Edition 1 and/or Edition 2. A hyphen (“-”) in the Ed column indicates
the PIXIT entry is not applicable for any version.
PIXIT for DOCUMENTATION
ID Ed Description Value / Clarification
Do1 2 How to expose required firmware versions Firmware version and ICD
not present in the datamodel file compatibility listed in the
firmware release notes.

PIXIT for ASSOCIATION MODEL
As1 1 Maximum number of clients that can set-up an 4

association simultaneously
As2 1,2 TCP_KEEPALIVE value. The recommended 5 seconds

range is 1...20s
As3 1,2 Lost connection detection time 15 seconds
As4 - Authentication is not supported yet
As5 1,2 What association parameters are necessary Transport selector Y

for successful association: Session selector Y
Called value: Presentation selector Y
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
other
Calling values: Transport selector Y

Session selector Y
Presentation selector Y
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
other
As6 1,2 If association parameters are necessary for Transport selector 0001
association, describe the correct Called val- Session selector 0001
ues: e.g. Presentation
selector 00000001
other
Calling parameters: e.g.
Transport selector 0001
Session selector 0001
Presentation
selector 00000001
other
As7 1,2 What is the maximum and minimum MMS Max MMS PDU size
PDU size 32,000
Min MMS PDU size

32,000
As8 1,2 What is the maximum start up time after a 180 seconds
power supply interrupt
As9 1,2 Does this device function only as test equip- N

ment?
(test equipment need not have a non-volatile
configuration; but it cannot be part of the sub-
station automation system)

PIXIT for SERVER MODEL
Value /
ID Ed Description
Clarification
Sr1 1,2 Which analogue value (MX) quality bits are supported Validity:
(can be set by server) Y Good,
N Invalid,
N Reserved,
N Questionable
Detail Quality:
N Overflow
N OutofRange
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
N Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Miscellaneous:
Y Source
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
Sr2 1,2 Which status value (ST) quality bits are supported (can Validity:
be set by server) Y Good,
N Invalid,
N Reserved,
N Questionable
Detail Quality:
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
N Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Miscellaneous:
Y Source
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
Sr3 - What is the maximum number of data object refer- Deprecated

ences in one GetDataValues request
Sr4 - What is the maximum number of data object refer- Deprecated

ences in one SetDataValues request
Sr5 1 Which Mode values are supported a On Y

[On-Blocked] N
Test Y
Test/Blocked Y
Off N
a. IEC 61850-6:2009 clause 9.5.6 states that if only a subrange of the enumeration value
set is supported, this shall be indicated within an ICD file by an enumeration type, where the
unsupported values are missing

PIXIT for DATA SET MODEL
Ds1 1 What is the maximum number of data elements in 128

one data set (compare ICD setting)
Ds2 1 How many persistent data sets can be created by one CreateDataSet not
or more clients supported.
(this number includes predefined datasets)
Ds3 1 How many non-persistent data sets can be created CreateDataSet not
by one or more clients supported.
PIXIT for SUBSTITUTION MODEL
Sb1 1 Are substituted values stored in volatile memory Not Supported
PIXIT for SETTING GROUP CONTROL MODEL
Sg1 1 What is the number of supported setting Not Supported

groups for each logical device
Sg2 1,2 What is the effect of when and how the non- Not Supported
volatile storage is updated
(compare IEC 61850-8-1 §16.2.4)
Sg3 1 Can multiple clients edit the same setting Not Supported
group
Sg4 1 What happens if the association is lost while Not Supported

editing a setting group
Sg5 1 Is EditSG value 0 allowed Not Supported
Sg6 2 When ResvTms is not present how long is an Not Supported

edit setting group locked

PIXIT for REPORTING MODEL
Rp1 1 The supported trigger conditions are integrity Y

(compare PICS) data change Y
quality change Y
data update N
general interrogation Y
Rp2 1 The supported optional fields are sequence-number Y

report-time-stamp Y
reason-for-inclusion Y
data-set-name Y
data-reference Y
buffer-overflow Y
entryID Y
conf-rev Y
segmentation Y
Rp3 1,2 Can the server send segmented Y

reports
(when not supported the device shall
refuse an association request with a
smaller than minimum PDU size)
Rp4 1,2 Mechanism on second internal data Send report immediately

change notification of the same ana-
logue data value within buffer period
(Compare IEC 61850-7-2 §14.2.2.9)
Rp5 1 Multi client URCB approach Each URCB is visible to all clients
(compare IEC 61850-7-2:2003
§14.2.1)
Rp6 - What is the format of EntryID Deprecated
Rp7 1,2 What is the buffer size for each Buffer size is 50,000 bytes for each
BRCB or how many reports can be BRCB
buffered
Rp8 - Pre-configured RCB attributes that Deprecated

are dynamic, compare SCL report
settings
Rp9 1 May the reported data set contain:

- structured data objects Y
- data attributes Y
Rp10 1,2 What is the scan cycle for binary 3 ms

events. Is this fixed, configurable? Fixed
Rp11 1 Does the device support to pre- N

assign a RCB to a specific client in
the SCL
Rp12 2 After restart of the server is the value Restored from original configuration
of ConfRev restored from the original
configuration or retained prior to
restart

Rp13 1,2 Does the server accept any client to N

configure / enable a BRCB with
ResvTms=-1?
What fields are used to do the identi-
fication?
Rp14 1,2 When BRCB.ResvTms is exposed, N/A

what is the default value for
BRCB.ResvTms if client does not
write (must be > 0)
When BRCB.ResvTms is not 0 seconds

exposed, what is the internal
reservation time (must be >= 0)
PIXIT for LOGGING MODEL
Lg1 1,2 What is the default value of LogEna Not Supported

(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 §17.3.3.2.1, the
default value should be FALSE)
Lg2 - What is the format of EntryID Deprecated
Lg3 1,2 Are there multiple Log Control Blocks that spec- Not Supported
ify the Journaling of the same MMS NamedVari-
able and TrgOps and the Event Condition
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 §17.3.3.3.2)
Lg4 - Pre-configured LCB attributes that cannot be Deprecated, the informa-

changed online tion is already available in
SCL
Lg5 1 Which TrgOps are supported for logging Not Supported
(note Ed2 and up requires support for

all TrgOps)

PIXIT for GOOSE PUBLISH MODEL
Gp1 1,2 Can the test (Ed1) / simulation (Ed2) flag in the N
published GOOSE be set
Gp2 1 What is the behaviour when the GOOSE publish NdsCom=T

configuration is incorrect DUT keeps GoEna=F
Gp3 1,2 Published FCD supported common data classes SPS, ENS, ACD, LPL,
are DPL, ACT, INS, ORG, SPC
Arrays are not supported
Gp4 1,2 What is the maximum value of TAL (maxTime) Configurable

Is it fixed or configurable MaxTime 120,000ms
Gp5 1,2 What is the fastest retransmission time 2 ms
Gp6 - Can the GOOSE publish be turned on / off by Deprecated

using SetGoCBValues(GoEna) See PICS -
SetGoCBValues
Gp7 1,2 What is the initial GOOSE sqNum after restart sqNum = 0
Gp8 1 May the GOOSE data set contain:

- structured data objects (FCD) Y
- timestamp data attributes Y
Gp9 1,2 Does Server or ICT refuse GOOSE payload Y – ICT refuses
dataset length greater than SCSM supports?

PIXIT for GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL
Gs1 1,2 What elements of a subscribed GOOSE Y destination MAC address

message are checked to decide the mes- Y APPID
sage is valid and the allData values are Y gocbRef
accepted? If yes, describe the conditions. N timeAllowedtoLive
Notes: Y datSet
• the VLAN tag may be removed by an Y goID
Ethernet switch and shall not be NT
checked Y stNum
N sqNum
• the simulation flag shall always be Y simulation / test
checked (Ed2) N confRev
Y ndsCom
Y numDatSetEntries
Yout-of-order dataset
members
Gs2 1,2 When is a subscribed GOOSE marked as message does not arrive by 2x
lost TAL
(TAL = time allowed to live value from the
last received GOOSE message)
Gs3 1,2 What is the behaviour when one or more Server subscribes the GOOSE
subscribed GOOSE messages is not message. LGOS.St status is
received or syntactically incorrect (missing updated according to TAL
GOOSE)
Gs4 1,2 What is the behaviour when a subscribed If the GOOSE message has
GOOSE message is out-of-order out-of-order dataset members
Server subscribes the GOOSE
message. The GOOSE mes-
sage will be rejected. LGOS.St
will be updated according to
TAL of last received valid
GOOSE packet.
Gs5 1,2 What is the behaviour when a subscribed First message will process and
GOOSE message is duplicated second message will discard.
Gs6 1 Does the device subscribe to GOOSE Y, with the VLAN tag
messages with/without the VLAN tag Y, without the VLAN tag
Gs7 1 May the GOOSE data set contain:

- structured data objects (FCD) Y
- timestamp data attributes Y
Gs8 1,2 Subscribed FCD supported common data SPS, ACD, ACT, SPC
classes are Arrays are not supported
Gs9 1,2 Are subscribed GOOSE with test=T (Ed1) Y

/ simulation=T (Ed2) accepted in test/simu-
lation mode
Gs10 1,2 Max number of dataset members Fixed at 60
Gs11 1 Is Fixed-length encoded GOOSE sup- Y

ported

PIXIT for GOOSE PERFORMANCE
Gf1 1,2 Performance class P2/P3
Gf2 1,2 GOOSE ping-pong processing method Scan cycle based
Gf3 1,2 Application logic scan cycle (ms) Max. 4ms (GOOSE PUB)
100us (GOOSE SUBS)
Min. 100us (GOOSE PUB)

100us (GOOSE PUB)
Gf4 1 Maximum number of data attributes in Such that dataset does not
GOOSE dataset (value and quality has exceed GOOSE: 1000 Bytes
to be counted as separate attributes)
PIXIT for CONTROL MODEL
Ct1 1 What control models are supported Dons: Y

(compare ICD file enums for Ed2) SBOns: N
DOes: N
SBOes: N
Ct2 1,2 Is the control model fixed, configurable Fixed

and/or dynamic
Ct3 - Is TimeActivatedOperate supported (com- Deprecated

pare PICS or SCL)
Ct4 - Is “operate-many” supported (compare Deprecated, see sboClass in

sboClass) datamodel (ICD)
Ct5 1 Will the DUT activate the control output N

when the test attribute is set in the
SelectWithValue and/or Operate request
(when N test procedure Ctl2 is applicable)
Ct6 - What are the conditions for the time (T) Deprecated
attribute in the SelectWithValue and/or
Operate request
Ct7 - Is pulse configuration supported (com- Deprecated

pare pulseConfig)
Ct8 1 What is the behaviour of the DUT when Check conditions are
the check conditions are set not checked.
Is this behaviour fixed, configurable, online

changeable

Ct9 1,2 Which additional cause diagnosis are N Unknown

supported N Not-supported
N Blocked-by-switching-
hierarchy
N Select-failed
N Invalid-position
N Position-reached
N Step-limit
N Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-process
N Blocked-by-interlocking
N Blocked-by-synchrocheck
N Command-already-in-
execution
N Blocked-by-health
N 1-of-n-control
N Abortion-by-cancel
N Time-limit-over
N Abortion-by-trip
N Object-not-selected
Edition 1 specific values:

N Parameter-change-in-
execution (Ed1 semantics)
Edition 2 specific values:
N Object-already-selected
N No-access-authority
N Ended-with-overshoot
N Abortion-due-to-deviation
N Abortion-by-communication-
loss
N Blocked-by-command
N None
N Locked-by-other-client
N Parameter-change-in-execu-
tion (Ed2 semantics)
Ct10 1,2 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Not Supported

SelectWithValue request
Ct11 1,2 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Not Supported

Select request
Ct12 1,2 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Not supported

Operate request
Ct13 1,2 Which origin categories are supported / Y bay-control

accepted Y station-control
Y remote-control
Y automatic-bay
Y automatic-station
Y automatic-remote
Y maintenance
Y process
Ct14 1,2 What happens if the orCat value is not DOns:

supported or invalid Operate response-

Ct15 1,2 Does the IED accept a SelectWithValue / DOns: N

Operate with the same control value as Configurable: N
the current status value
Is this behaviour configurable
Ct16 1 Does the IED accept a select/operate on DOns: N

the same control object from 2 different cli-
ents at the same time
Ct17 1 Does the IED accept a Select/SelectWith- Not Suported

Value from the same client when the con-
trol object is already selected (Tissue
#334)
Ct18 1 Deprecated
Ct19 - Can a control operation be blocked by Deprecated

Mod=Off or [On-] Blocked (Compare
PIXIT-Sr5)
Ct20 1,2 Does the IED support local / remote oper- N

ation
Ct21 1,2 Does the IED send an InformationReport DOns: N

with LastApplError as part of the Operate
response- for control with normal security
Ct22 2 How to force a “parameter-change-in-exe- Not Supported

cution”
Ct23 1,2 How many SBOns/SBOes control objects Not Supported

can be selected at the same time?
Ct24 1,2 Can a controllable object be forced to N

keep its old state e.g. Internal Controllable
Objects may not be accessible to force
this, whereas a switch like Circuit Breaker
outside the DUT can?
Ct25 1,2 When CDC=DPC is supported, is it possi- N/A

ble to have DPC (Controllable Double
Point) go to the intermediate state? (00)
Ct26 1,2 Name an enhanced security point (if any) Ld/Ln.DataObject, xxx or
with a finite operate timeout No DOes points have timeout
DOes: No
specify the timeout (in milliseconds) SBOes: No
Ct27 2 Does the IED support control objects with DOns: N

external signals? SBOns: N
DOes: N
SBOes: N
Ct28 Deprecated, kept as placeholder

PIXIT for TIME SYNCHRONIZATION MODEL
Tm1 1 What time quality bits are supported Y LeapSecondsKnown

(may be set by the IED) Y ClockFailure
Y ClockNotSynchronized
Tm2 1,2 Describe the behaviour when all time IRIG – next second
server(s) cease to respond
What is the time server lost detection SNTP – depends on polling interval
time configuration
Tm3 1,2 How long does it take to take over the 1 seconds
new time from time server
Tm4 1,2 When is the time quality bit “Clock- “ClockFailure” is always set to TRUE
Failure” set when valid IRIG is not present
Tm5 1 When is the time quality bit “Clock not “Clock not Synchronized” is
Synchronized” set set TRUE when valid IRIG is not
present
Tm6 - Is the timestamp of a binary event Deprecated

adjusted to the configured scan cycle
Tm7 1 Does the device support time zone Y

and daylight saving
Tm8 1,2 Which attributes of the SNTP N Leap indicator not equal to 3
response packet are validated Y Mode is equal to SERVER
Y OriginateTimestamp is equal to
value sent by the SNTP client as
Transmit Timestamp
Y RX/TX timestamp fields are
checked for reasonableness
Y SNTP version 3 and/or 4
N other (describe)
Tm9 1,2 Do the COMTRADE files have local Local

time or UTC time and is this configur- N Configurable
able

PIXIT for FILE TRANSFER MODEL
Ft1 1 What is the structure of files and Flat file system with pseudo folders
directories (Ed2)
Where are the COMTRADE files COMTRADE files are not stored on
stored the IED
Are COMTRADE files zipped and

what files are included in each zip file
Ft2 1,2 Directory names are separated from “/”

the file name by
Ft3 1 The maximum file name size including 64 chars

path (recommended 64 chars)
Ft4 1,2 Are directory/file name case sensitive Case sensitive
Ft5 1,2 Maximum file size for SetFile SetFile Not Supported
Ft6 1 Is the requested file path included in Y

the MMS fileDirectory respond file But client is not allowed to use any
name path names that contain anything
other than “/” In that case Server will
return response with zero files.
(Ed2: always complete path)
Ft7 1 Is the wild card supported in the MMS Yes, wild card = *
fileDirectory request
Ft8 1,2 Is it allowed that 2 clients get a file at Y same file

the same time Y different files
Ft9 1,2 Which files can be deleted No restriction for deleting files
PIXIT for SERVICE TRACKING MODEL
Tr1 2 Which ACSI services are tracked by Not Supported

LTRK.GenTrk

N.5 Data Mapping Specifications

L-PRO Logical The L-PRO 4500 has the following IEC 61850 logical devices defined in its
Device ICD file:
• Measurements
• FaultData
• Protection
• System
• Subscription
• Records
• SYS
• Control
L-PRO Logical Table N.6: L-PRO Logical Nodes defines the list of logical nodes (LN) for the
Node Summary L-PRO logical devices.
Note: System logical nodes (group L) are not shown here
Table N.6: L-PRO Logical Nodes
LN Instance Protection
LD Name LN Description Comments
Name Function
Measurements MainMMXU1 Measurement Main channel metering data:

• Total Active Power
• Total Reactive Power
• Total Apparent Power
• Average Power Factor
• Frequency
• Phase voltages
• Phase to phase voltages
• Phase currents
• Phase active power
• Phase reactive power
• Phase apparent power
• Phase power factor
• Phase impedances
Measurements AuxMMXU2 Measurement Auxiliary channel metering data:

Phase voltages
Phase to phase voltages
Phase currents
Measurements MainGMMXU3 Measurement Main ground current

Name Function
Measurements AuxGMMXU4 Measurement Auxiliary ground current
Measurements Main3I0MMXU5 Measurement Main 3I0 current
Measurements AUX3I0MMXU6 Measurement Auxiliary 3I0 current
Measurements MainMSQI1 Measurement Main channel sequence voltage and cur-

rent
FaultData D21P1MMXU1 Measurement 21P1 Zone 1 21P fault frequency, voltages and
currents
currents
currents
currents
currents
FaultData D21N1MMXU6 Measurement 21N1 Zone 1 21N fault frequency, voltages and
currents
currents
currents
currents
currents
FaultData DiSchMMXU11 Measurement Distance Scheme Distance scheme fault frequency, voltages
and currents
FaultData DEFSchMMXU12 Measurement DEF Scheme DEF scheme fault frequency, voltages and
currents
FaultData D59M1MMXU13 Measurement 59-1 59-1 Main fault voltages
FaultData D59A1MMXU14 Measurement 59-1 59-1 Auxiliary fault voltages
FaultData D59M2MMXU15 Measurement 59-2 59-2 Main fault voltages
FaultData D59A2MMXU16 Measurement 59-2 59-2 Auxiliary fault voltages
FaultData D27MMMXU17 Measurement 27 27 Main fault voltages
FaultData D27AMMXU18 Measurement 27 27 Auxiliary fault voltages

Name Function
FaultData D59NDMMXU19 Measurement 59N 59N fault voltage
FaultData D59NIMMXU20 Measurement 59N 59N fault voltage
FaultData D5167MMXU21 Measurement 51/67 51/67 fault currents
FaultData D5067MMXU22 Measurement 50/67 50/67 fault currents
FaultData D50LSMMMXU23 Measurement 50LS 50LS Main fault currents
FaultData D50LSAMMXU24 Measurement 50LS 50LS Auxiliary fault currents
FaultData SOFTMMXU25 Measurement Switch-on-to-fault Switch –On-To-Fault voltage and current
FaultData D50GMMXU26 Measurement 50G 50G Main neutral over Current
FaultData D51GMMXU27 Measurement 51G 51G Main neutral over Current
FaultData D21N1MSQI1 Measurement 21N1 Zone 1 21N fault Zero Sequence voltage
and current
and current
and current
and current
and current
FaultData DiSchMSQI6 Measurement Distance Scheme Distance scheme Zero Sequence current
FaultData D59NDMSQI7 Measurement 59N 59N Zero Sequence voltage
FaultData D59NIMSQI8 Measurement 59N 59N Zero Sequence voltage
FaultData D4650MSQI9 Measurement 46/50 46/50 Negative Sequence overcurrent
FaultData D4651MSQI10 Measurement 46/51 46/51 Negative Sequence overcurrent
FaultData D50NMSQI11 Measurement 50N 50N Zero Sequence current
FaultData D51NMSQI12 Measurement 51N 51N Zero Sequence current
FaultData SOFTMSQI13 Measurement Switch-on-to-fault Switch-On-To-Fault Sequence current
FaultData D21P1RFLO1 Fault Locator 21P1 Zone 1 21P fault locator
FaultData D21N1RFLO6 Fault Locator 21N1 Zone 1 21N fault locator

Name Function
FaultData DiSchRFLO11 Fault Locator Distance Scheme Distance scheme fault locator
FaultData DEFSchRFLO12 Fault Locator DEF Scheme Distance scheme fault locator
FaultData D50NRFLO13 Fault Locator 50N 50N fault locator
FaultData D51NRFLO14 Fault Locator 50N 50N fault locator
FaultData D50GRFLO15 Fault Locator 50G 50G fault locator
FaultData D51GRFLO16 Fault Locator 51G 51G fault locator
Protection D21P1PDIS1 Distance 21P1 Zone 1 phase
Protection D21N1PDIS6 Distance 21N1 Zone 1 ground
Protection LodEncPDIS11 Distance Load Load Encroachment Block

Encroachment
Protection D25SYCRSYN1 Synchronism-check 25/27/59 Sync Check

or synchronizing
Protection D27MPTUV1 Undervoltage 27 27 Main Trip
Protection D27APTUV2 Undervoltage 27 27 Auxiliary Trip
Protection D50BFMRBRF1 Breaker failure 50BF Main 1 Trip
Protection D50BFMRBRF2 Breaker failure 50BF Main 2 Trip
Protection D50BFARBRF3 Breaker failure 50BF Auxiliary 1 Trip
Protection D50BFARBRF4 Breaker failure 50BF Auxiliary 2 Trip
Protection BFIRBRF5 Breaker failure BFI Breaker Failure Initiation
Protection D50LS1PIOC1 Instantaneous 50LS 50LS Main Trip

Overcurrent
Protection D50LS2PIOC2 Instantaneous 50LS 50LS Auxiliary Trip

Overcurrent

Name Function
Protection D50PIOC3 Instantaneous 50 50 Trip

Overcurrent
Protection D50NPIOC4 Instantaneous 50N 50N Trip

Overcurrent
Protection D4650PIOC5 Instantaneous 46/50 46/50 Trip and Alarm

Overcurrent
Protection D50GPIOC6 Instantaneous 50G 50G Trip

Overcurrent
Protection D51PTOC1 Time Overcurrent 51 51 Trip and Alarm
Protection D51NPTOC2 Time Overcurrent 51N 51N Trip and Alarm
Protection D4651PTOC3 Time Overcurrent 46/51 46/51 Trip and Alarm
Protection D51GPTOC4 Time Overcurrent 50G 51G Trip and Alarm
Protection 46BCPTOC5 Overcurrent 46 Broken Conductor
Protection D60CTSMPTOC6 Overcurrent 60CTS 60CT Supervision Main
Protection D60CTSAPTOC7 Overcurrent 60CTS 60CT Supervision Aux
Protection D59M1PTOV1 Overvoltage 59 59-1 Main Trip
Protection D59M2PTOV2 Overvoltage 59 59-2 Main Trip
Protection D59A1PTOV3 Overvoltage 59 59-1 Auxiliary Trip
Protection D59A2PTOV4 Overvoltage 59 59-2 Auxiliary Trip
Protection D59NIPTOV5 Overvoltage 59N Inverse 59N Inverse Trip and Alarm
Protection D59NDPTOV6 Overvoltage 59N Inverse 59N DEF Trip and Alarm
Protection D60LOPPTOV7 Overvoltage 60LOP 60LOP Alarm
Protection D68B1RPSB1 Power swing detec- 68-1 Zone 1 68 Power swing Trip/Block
tion/blocking
tion/blocking
tion/blocking
Protection D68B4RPSB4 Power swing detec- 68-4 Zone 4 68 Power swing Trip
tion/blocking
Protection D68B5RPSB5 Power swing detec- 68-5 Zone 5 68 Power swing Trip
tion/blocking
Protection D68TrRPSB6 Power swing detec- 68 68 Power swing Trip

tion/blocking
Protection D79MRREC1 Auto reclosing 79 Main Auto reclose
Protection D79ARREC2 Auto reclosing 79 Auxiliary Auto reclose

Name Function
Protection D81_1PFRC1 Rate of change of 81-1 81-1 rate of change of frequency Trip
frequency
frequency
frequency
frequency
Protection D81_1PTOF1 Overfrequency 81-1 81-1 overfrequency Trip
Protection D81_1PTUF1 Underfrequency 81-1 81-1 underfrequency Trip
Protection DisSchPSCH1 Protection scheme Distance Scheme Distance Scheme Send/Trip
Protection DEFSchPSCH2 Protection scheme DEF Scheme DEF Scheme Send/Trip
Protection SOTFPSOF1 Switch-on-to-fault SOTF SOTF Trip
System PLGGIO1 Generic process I/O ProLogic functions from 1 through 24
System SGGGIO2 Generic process I/O Active setting group
System EIGGIO3 Generic process I/O External Inputs from 1 through 24
System OCGGIO4 Generic process I/O Output Contacts from 1 through 32
System LEDGGIO5 Generic process I/O Front Panel LED state Target from 1
through 17; ALARM; SERVICE REQUIRED
System VIGGIO6 Generic process I/O Virtual Inputs from 1 through 30
System TSAlmGGIO7 Generic process I/O Time Synchronization Alarm
System SChAlmGGIO8 Generic process I/O SelfCheck Fail Alarm
System ComAlmGGIO9 Generic process I/O 61850 Communication Alarm
Subscription SUBSCRGGIO1 Generic process I/O External GOOSE Virtual Inputs from 1
through 30
Records RDRE1 Disturbance Fault Recorder information

Recording
SYS LGOS1- Subscription Super- GOOSE Subscription Supervision

LGOS15 vision

Name Function
Control SPCSOPULG- Control Commands Control Commands

GIO1
Control SPCSOLATG- Control Commands Control Commands

GIO2

Logical Node The following sections provide detailed spec information on the L-PRO logical
Specifications device and logical nodes as defined in the Table N.19 “L-PRO Logical Nodes”.
Note: System logical nodes (group L) are not shown here.
Measurement Logical Device

MainMMXU1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node MainMMXU1.
Data Name Description
MainMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsAB$cVal$mag$f Line phase to phase voltage AB magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsAB$cVal$ang$f Line phase to phase voltage AB angle
MainMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsBC$cVal$mag$f Line phase to phase voltage BC magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsBC$cVal$ang$f Line phase to phase voltage BC angle
MainMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsCA$cVal$mag$f Line phase to phase voltage CA magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsCA$cVal$ang$f Line phase to phase voltage CA angle
MainMMXU1$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f Line voltage phase A magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f Line voltage phase A angle
MainMMXU1$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f Line voltage phase B magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f Line voltage phase B angle
MainMMXU1$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f Line voltage phase C magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f Line voltage phase C angle
MainMMXU1$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f Line current phase A magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f Line current phase A angle
MainMMXU1$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f Line current phase B magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f Line current phase B angle
MainMMXU1$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f Line current phase C magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f Line current phase C angle
MainMMXU1$MX$W$phsA$cVal$mag$f Phase A active power
MainMMXU1$MX$W$phsB$cVal$mag$f Phase B active power
MainMMXU1$MX$W$phsC$cVal$mag$f Phase C active power
MainMMXU1$MX$VAr$phsA$cVal$mag$f Phase A reactive power
MainMMXU1$MX$VAr$phsB$cVal$mag$f Phase B reactive power
MainMMXU1$MX$VAr$phsC$cVal$mag$f Phase C reactive power
MainMMXU1$MX$VA$phsA$cVal$mag$f Phase A apparent power
MainMMXU1$MX$VA$phsB$cVal$mag$f Phase B apparent power
MainMMXU1$MX$VA$phsC$cVal$mag$f Phase C apparent power
MainMMXU1$MX$PF$phsA$cVal$mag$f Phase A power factor

MainMMXU1$MX$PF$phsB$cVal$mag$f Phase B power factor
MainMMXU1$MX$PF$phsC$cVal$mag$f Phase C power factor
MainMMXU1$MX$Z$phsA$cVal$mag$f Impedance phase A magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$Z$phsA$cVal$ang$f Impedance phase A angle
MainMMXU1$MX$Z$phsB$cVal$mag$f Impedance phase B magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$Z$phsB$cVal$ang$f Impedance phase B angle
MainMMXU1$MX$Z$phsC$cVal$mag$f Impedance phase C magnitude
MainMMXU1$MX$Z$phsC$cVal$ang$f Impedance phase C angle
MainMMXU1$MX$TotW$mag$f Total Active Power
MainMMXU1$MX$TotVAr$mag$f Total Reactive Power
MainMMXU1$MX$TotVA$mag$f Total Apparent Power
MainMMXU1$MX$TotPF$mag$f Average Power Factor
MainMMXU1$MX$Hz$mag$f Frequency

AuxMMXU2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node AuxMMXU2.
AuxMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsAB$cVal$mag$f Bus phase to phase voltage AB magnitude
AuxMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsAB$cVal$ang$f Bus phase to phase voltage AB angle
AuxMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsBC$cVal$mag$f Bus phase to phase voltage BC magnitude
AuxMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsBC$cVal$ang$f Bus phase to phase voltage BC angle
AuxMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsCA$cVal$mag$f Bus phase to phase voltage CA magnitude
AuxMMXU1$MX$PPV$phsCA$cVal$ang$f Bus phase to phase voltage CA angle
AuxMMXU2$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f Bus voltage phase A magnitude
AuxMMXU2$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f Bus voltage phase A angle
AuxMMXU2$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f Bus voltage phase B magnitude
AuxMMXU2$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f Bus voltage phase B angle
AuxMMXU2$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f Bus voltage phase C magnitude
AuxMMXU2$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f Bus voltage phase C angle
AuxMMXU2$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f Current 2 phase A magnitude
AuxMMXU2$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f Current 2 phase A angle
AuxMMXU2$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f Current 2 phase B magnitude
AuxMMXU2$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f Current 2 phase B angle
AuxMMXU2$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f Current 2 phase C magnitude
AuxMMXU2$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f Current 2 phase C angle
MainGMMXU3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node MainGMMXU3.
MainGMMXU3$MX$A$neut$cVal$mag$f Main Neutral current magnitude
MainGMMXU3$MX$A$neut$cVal$ang$f Main Neutral current angle
AuxGMMXU4
This section defines logical node data for the logical node MainGMMXU3.
AuxGMMXU4$MX$A$neut$cVal$mag$f Auxiliary Neutral current magnitude
AuxGMMXU4$MX$A$neut$cVal$ang$f Auxiliary Neutral current angle

Main3I0MMXU5
This section defines logical node data for the logical node Main3I0MMXU5.
Main3I0MMXU5$MX$A$net$cVal$mag$f Main 3I0 Current Magnitude
Main3I0MMXU5$MX$A$net$cVal$ang$f Main 3I0 Current Angle
AUX3I0MMXU6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node AUX3I0MMXU6.
AUX3I0MMXU6$MX$A$net$cVal$mag$f Aux 3I0 Current Magnitude
AUX3I0MMXU6$MX$A$net$cVal$ang$f Aux 3I0 Current Angle
MainMSQI1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node MainMSQI1.
MainMSQI1$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$mag$f Positive sequence current (I1)
MainMSQI1$MX$SeqA$c2$cVal$mag$f Negative sequence current (I2)
MainMSQI1$MX$SeqA$c3$cVal$mag$f Zero Sequence current (I0)
MainMSQI1$MX$SeqA$seqT Set to “pos-neg-zero”
MainMSQI1$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$mag$f Positive sequence voltage (V1)
MainMSQI1$MX$SeqV$c2$cVal$mag$f Negative sequence voltage (V2)
MainMSQI1$MX$SeqV$c3$cVal$mag$f Zero Sequence voltage (V0)
MainMSQI1$MX$SeqA$seqT Set to “pos-neg-zero”

FaultData Logical Device

D21P1MMXU1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P1MMXU1.
D21P1MMXU1$MX$Hz$mag$f 21P1 fault frequency
D21P1MMXU1$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 21P1 phase A fault voltage magnitude
D21P1MMXU1$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 21P1 phase A voltage angle
D21P1MMXU1$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 21P1 phase B fault voltage magnitude
D21P1MMXU1$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 21P1 phase B fault voltage angle
D21P1MMXU1$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 21P1 phase C fault voltage magnitude
D21P1MMXU1$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 21P1 phase C fault voltage angle
D21P1MMXU1$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 21P1 phase A fault current magnitude
D21P1MMXU1$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 21P1 phase A fault current angle
D21P1MMXU1$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 21P1 phase B fault current magnitude
D21P1MMXU1$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 21P1 phase B fault current angle
D21P1MMXU1$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 21P1 phase C fault current magnitude
D21P1MMXU1$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 21P1 phase C fault current angle
D21P2MMXU2

D21P3MMXU3
D21P4MMXU4

D21P5MMXU5
D21N1MMXU6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N1MMXU6.
D21N1MMXU6$MX$Hz$mag$f 21N1 fault frequency
D21N1MMXU6$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 21N1 Main phase A fault voltage magnitude
D21N1MMXU6$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 21N1 Main phase A voltage angle
D21N1MMXU6$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 21N1 Main phase B fault voltage magnitude
D21N1MMXU6$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 21N1 Main phase B fault voltage angle
D21N1MMXU6$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 21N1 Main phase C fault voltage magnitude
D21N1MMXU6$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 21N1 Main phase C fault voltage angle
D21N1MMXU6$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 21N1 Line phase A fault current magnitude
D21N1MMXU6$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 21N1 Line phase A fault current angle
D21N1MMXU6$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 21N1 Line phase B fault current magnitude
D21N1MMXU6$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 21N1 Line phase B fault current angle
D21N1MMXU6$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 21N1 Line phase C fault current magnitude
D21N1MMXU6$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 21N1 Line phase C fault current angle

D21N2MMXU7
D21N2MMXU7$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 21N2 Main phase A fault voltage magnitude
D21N2MMXU7$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 21N2 Main phase A voltage angle
D21N2MMXU7$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 21N2 Main phase B fault voltage magnitude
D21N2MMXU7$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 21N2 Main phase B fault voltage angle
D21N2MMXU7$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 21N2 Main phase C fault voltage magnitude
D21N2MMXU7$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 21N2 Main phase C fault voltage angle
D21N2MMXU7$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 21N2 Line phase A fault current magnitude
D21N2MMXU7$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 21N2 Line phase A fault current angle
D21N2MMXU7$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 21N2 Line phase B fault current magnitude
D21N2MMXU7$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 21N2 Line phase B fault current angle
D21N2MMXU7$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 21N2 Line phase C fault current magnitude
D21N2MMXU7$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 21N2 Line phase C fault current angle
D21N3MMXU8
D21N3MMXU8$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 21N3 phase A fault voltage magnitude
D21N3MMXU8$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 21N3 phase A voltage angle
D21N3MMXU8$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 21N3 phase B fault voltage magnitude
D50LSMMMXU8$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 21N3 phase B fault voltage angle
D21N3MMXU8$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 21N3 phase C fault voltage magnitude
D21N3MMXU8$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 21N3 phase C fault voltage angle
D21N3MMXU8$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 21N3 phase A fault current magnitude
D21N3MMXU8$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 21N3 phase A fault current angle
D21N3MMXU8$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 21N3 phase B fault current magnitude
D21N3MMXU8$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 21N3 phase B fault current angle
D21N3MMXU8$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 21N3 phase C fault current magnitude
D21N3MMXU8$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 21N3 phase C fault current angle

D21N4MMXU9
D21N4MMXU9$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 21N4 phase B fault voltage angle
D21N5MMXU10
D21N5MMXU10$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 21N5 phase B fault voltage angle
D21N5MMXU10$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 21N5 phase C fault current magnitude
D21N5MMXU10$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 21N5 phase C fault current angle

DiSchMMXU11
This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSCHMMXU11.
DSCHMMXU11$MX$Hz$mag$f Distance Scheme fault frequency
DSCHMMXU11$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f Distance Scheme phase A fault voltage magnitude
DSCHMMXU11$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f Distance Scheme phase A voltage angle
DSCHMMXU11$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f Distance Scheme phase B fault voltage magnitude
DSCHMMXU11$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f Distance Scheme phase B fault voltage angle
DSCHMMXU11$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f Distance Scheme phase C fault voltage magnitude
DSCHMMXU11$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f Distance Scheme phase C fault voltage angle
DSCHMMXU11$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f Distance Scheme phase A fault current magnitude
DSCHMMXU11$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f Distance Scheme phase A fault current angle
DSCHMMXU11$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f Distance Scheme phase B fault current magnitude
DSCHMMXU11$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f Distance Scheme phase B fault current angle
DSCHMMXU11$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f Distance Scheme phase C fault current magnitude
DSCHMMXU11$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f Distance Scheme phase C fault current angle
DESchMMXU12
This section defines logical node data for the logical node DESchMMXU12.
DESchMMXU12$MX$Hz$mag$f DEF Scheme fault frequency
DESchMMXU12$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f DEF Scheme phase A fault voltage magnitude
DESchMMXU12$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f DEF Scheme phase A voltage angle
DESchMMXU12$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f DEF Scheme phase B fault voltage magnitude
DESchMMXU12$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f DEF Scheme phase B fault voltage angle
DESchMMXU12$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f DEF Scheme phase C fault voltage magnitude
DESchMMXU12$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f DEF Scheme phase C fault voltage angle
DESchMMXU12$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f DEF Scheme phase A fault current magnitude
DESchMMXU12$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f DEF Scheme phase A fault current angle
DESchMMXU12$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f DEF Scheme phase B fault current magnitude
DESchMMXU12$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f DEF Scheme phase B fault current angle
DESchMMXU12$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f DEF Scheme phase C fault current magnitude
DESchMMXU12$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f DEF Scheme phase C fault current angle

D59M1MMXU13
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59M1MMXU13.
D59M1MMXU13$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 59-1 Main phase A fault voltage magnitude
D59M1MMXU13$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 59-1 Main phase A voltage angle
D59M1MMXU13$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 59-1 Main phase B fault voltage magnitude
D59M1MMXU13$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 59-1 Main phase B fault voltage angle
D59M1MMXU13$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 59-1 Main phase C fault voltage magnitude
D59M1MMXU13$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 59-1 Main phase C fault voltage angle
D59A1MMXU14
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59A1MMXU14.
D59A1MMXU14$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 59-1 Auxiliary phase A fault voltage magnitude
D59A1MMXU14$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 59-1 Auxiliary phase A voltage angle
D59A1MMXU14$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 59-1 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage magnitude
D59A1MMXU14$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 59-1 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage angle
D59A1MMXU14$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 59-1 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage magnitude
D59A1MMXU14$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 59-1 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage angle
D59M2MMXU15
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59M2MMXU15.
D59M2MMXU15$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 59-2 Main phase A fault voltage magnitude
D59M2MMXU15$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 59-2 Main phase A voltage angle
D59M2MMXU15$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 59-2 Main phase B fault voltage magnitude
D59M2MMXU15$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 59-2 Main phase B fault voltage angle
D59M2MMXU15$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 59-2 Main phase C fault voltage magnitude
D59M2MMXU15$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 59-2 Main phase C fault voltage angle

D59A2MMXU16
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59A2MMXU16.
D59A2MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 59-2 Auxiliary phase A fault voltage magnitude
D59A2MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 59-2 Auxiliary phase A voltage angle
D59A2MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 59-2 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage magnitude
D59A2MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 59-2 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage angle
D59A2MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 59-2 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage magnitude
D59A2MMXU16$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 59-2 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage angle
D27MMXU17
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27MMXU17.
D27MMMXU17$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 27 Main phase A fault voltage magnitude
D27MMMXU17$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 27 Main phase A voltage angle
D27MMMXU17$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 27 Main phase B fault voltage magnitude
D27MMMXU17$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 27 Main phase B fault voltage angle
D27MMMXU17$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 27 Main phase C fault voltage magnitude
D27MMMXU17$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 27 Main phase C fault voltage angle
D27AMMXU18
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27AMMXU18.
D27AMMXU18$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 27 Auxiliary phase A fault voltage magnitude
D27AMMXU18$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 27 Auxiliary phase A voltage angle
D27AMMXU18$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 27 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage magnitude
D27AMMXU18$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 27 Auxiliary phase B fault voltage angle
D27AMMXU18$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 27 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage magnitude
D27AMMXU18$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 27 Auxiliary phase C fault voltage angle

D59NDMMXU19
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59NDMMXU19.
D59NDMMXU19$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 59N Main phase A fault voltage magnitude
D59NDMMXU19$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 59N Main phase A voltage angle
D59NDMMXU19$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 59N Main phase B fault voltage magnitude
D59NDMMXU19$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 59N Main phase B fault voltage angle
D59NDMMXU19$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 59N Main phase C fault voltage magnitude
D59NDMMXU19$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 59N Main phase C fault voltage angle
D59NIMMXU20
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59NIMMXU20.
D59NIMMXU20$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 59N Main phase A fault voltage magnitude
D59NIMMXU20$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f 59N Main phase A voltage angle
D59NIMMXU20$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 59N Main phase B fault voltage magnitude
D59NIMMXU20$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f 59N Main phase B fault voltage angle
D59NIMMXU20$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 59N Main phase C fault voltage magnitude
D59NIMMXU20$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f 59N Main phase C fault voltage angle
D5167MMXU21
D5167MMXU21$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 51/67 phase A fault current magnitude
D5167MMXU21$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 51/67 phase A fault current angle
D5167MMXU21$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 51/67 phase B fault current magnitude
D5167MMXU21$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 51/67 phase B fault current angle
D5167MMXU21$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 51/67 phase C fault current magnitude
D5167MMXU21$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 51/67 phase C fault current angle

D5067MMXU22
D5067MMXU22$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 50/67 phase A fault current magnitude
D5067MMXU22$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 50/67 phase A fault current angle
D5067MMXU22$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 50/67 phase B fault current magnitude
D5067MMXU22$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 50/67 phase B fault current angle
D5067MMXU22$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 50/67 phase C fault current magnitude
D5067MMXU22$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 50/67 phase C fault current angle
D50LSMMMXU23
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50LSMMMXU23.
D50LSMMMXU23$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 50LS Main phase A fault current magnitude
D50LSMMMXU23$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 50LS Main phase A fault current angle
D50LSMMMXU23$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 50LS Main phase B fault current magnitude
D50LSMMMXU23$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 50LS Main phase B fault current angle
D50LSMMMXU23$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 50LS Main phase C fault current magnitude
D50LSMMMXU23$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 50LS Main phase C fault current angle
D50LSAMMXU24
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50LSAMMXU24.
D50LSAMMXU24$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 50LS Main phase A fault current magnitude
D50LSAMMXU24$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f 50LS Main phase A fault current angle
D50LSAMMXU24$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 50LS Main phase B fault current magnitude
D50LSAMMXU24$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f 50LS Main phase B fault current angle
D50LSAMMXU24$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 50LS Main phase C fault current magnitude
D50LSAMMXU24$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f 50LS Main phase C fault current angle

SOTFMMXU25
This section defines logical node data for the logical node SOTFMMXU25.
SOTFMMXU25$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase A fault voltage magnitude
SOTFMMXU25$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$ang$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase A voltage angle
SOTFMMXU25$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase B fault voltage magnitude
SOTFMMXU25$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$ang$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase B fault voltage angle
SOTFMMXU25$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase C fault voltage magnitude
SOTFMMXU25$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$ang$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase C fault voltage angle
SOTFMMXU25$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase A fault current magnitude
SOTFMMXU25$MX$A$phsA$cVal$ang$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase A fault current angle
SOTFMMXU25$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase B fault current magnitude
SOTFMMXU25$MX$A$phsB$cVal$ang$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase B fault current angle
SOTFMMXU25$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase C fault current magnitude
SOTFMMXU25$MX$A$phsC$cVal$ang$f Switch-On-To-Fault phase C fault current angle
D50GMMXU26
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50GMMXU26.
D50GMMXU26$MX$A$neut$cVal$mag$f 50G Neutral current magnitude
D50GMMXU26$MX$A$neut$cVal$ang$f 50G Neutral current angle
D51GMMXU27
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51GMMXU27.
D51GMMXU27$MX$A$neut$cVal$mag$f 51G Neutral current magnitude
D51GMMXU27$MX$A$neut$cVal$ang$f 51G Neutral current angle

D21N1MSQI1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N1MSQI1.
D21N1MSQI1$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
D21N1MSQI1$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
D21N1MSQI1$MX$SeqA$c3$cVal$mag$f 21N1 Line Zero Sequence current magnitude
D21N1MSQI1$MX$SeqA$c3$cVal$ang$f 21N1 Line Zero Sequence current angle
D21N1MSQI1$MX$SeqA$seqT Not mapped
D21N1MSQI1$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
D21N1MSQI1$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
D21N1MSQI1$MX$SeqV$c3$cVal$mag$f 21N1 Main Zero Sequence voltage magnitude
D21N1MSQI1$MX$SeqV$c3$cVal$ang$f 21N1 Main Zero Sequence voltage angle
D21N1MSQI1$MX$SeqV$seqT Not mapped
D21N2MSQI2

D21N3MSQI3
D21N4MSQI4

D21N5MSQI5

DiSchMSQI6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node DiSchMSQI6.
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqA$c2$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqA$c2$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqA$c3$cVal$mag$f Distance Scheme Line Zero Sequence current

magnitude
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqA$c3$cVal$ang$f Distance Scheme Line Zero Sequence current

angle
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqA$seqT Not mapped
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqV$c2$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqV$c2$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqV$c3$cVal$mag$f Distance Scheme Main Zero Sequence voltage

magnitude
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqV$c3$cVal$ang$f Distance Scheme Main Zero Sequence voltage

angle
DiSchMSQI6$MX$SeqV$seqT Not mapped

D59NDMSQI7
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59NDMSQI7.
D59NDMSQI7$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
D59NDMSQI7$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
D59NDMSQI$MX$SeqV$c2$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
D59NDMSQI7$MX$SeqV$c2$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
D59NDMSQI7$MX$SeqV$c3$cVal$mag$f D59N Definite time Zero Sequence voltage

magnitude
D59NDMSQI7$MX$SeqV$c3$cVal$ang$f D59N Definite time Zero Sequence voltage

angle
D59NDMSQI7MX$SeqV$seqT Not mapped
D59NIMSQI8
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59NIMSQI8.
D59NIMSQI8$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
D59NIMSQI8$MX$SeqV$c1$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
D59NIMSQI8$MX$SeqV$c2$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
D59NIMSQI8$MX$SeqV$c2$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
D59NIMSQI8$MX$SeqV$c3$cVal$mag$f D59N Definite time Zero Sequence voltage

magnitude
D59NIMSQI8$MX$SeqV$c3$cVal$ang$f D59N Definite time Zero Sequence voltage

angle
D59NIMSQI8MX$SeqV$seqT Not mapped

D4650MSQI9
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D4650MSQI9.
D4650MSQI9$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
D4650MSQI9$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
D4650MSQI9$MX$SeqA$c2$cVal$mag$f 46/50 Line Negative Sequence current

magnitude
D4650MSQI9$MX$SeqA$c2$cVal$ang$f 46/50 Line Negative Sequence current angle
D4650MSQI9$MX$SeqA$seqT Not mapped
D4651MSQI10
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D4651MSQI10.
D4651MSQI10$MX$SeqA$c2$cVal$mag$f 46/51 Line Negative Sequence current

magnitude
D4651MSQI10$MX$SeqA$c2$cVal$ang$f 46/51 Line Negative Sequence current angle
D4651MSQI10$MX$SeqA$seqT Not mapped

D50NMSQI11
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50NMSQI11.
D50NMSQI11$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
D50NMSQI11$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
D50NMSQI11$MX$SeqA$c3$cVal$mag$f 50N Line Zero Sequence current magnitude
D50NMSQI11$MX$SeqA$c3$cVal$ang$f 50N Line Zero Sequence current angle
D50NMSQI11$MX$SeqA$seqT Not mapped
D51NMSQI12
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51NMSQI12.
D51NMSQI12$MX$SeqA$c3$cVal$mag$f 51N Line Zero Sequence current magnitude
D51NMSQI12$MX$SeqA$c3$cVal$ang$f 51N Line Zero Sequence current angle
D51NMSQI12$MX$SeqA$seqT Not mapped
SOTFMSQI13
This section defines logical node data for the logical node SOTFMSQI13.
SOTFMSQI13$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$mag$f Not mapped
SOTFMSQI13$MX$SeqA$c1$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
SOTFMSQI13$MX$SeqA$c2$cVal$ang$f Not mapped
SOTFMSQI13$MX$SeqA$c3$cVal$ang$f Switch-On-to-Fault Zero Sequence current

magnitude
SOTFMSQI13$MX$SeqA$seqT Switch-On-to-Fault Zero Sequence current

angle

D21P1RFLO1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P1RFLO1.
D21P1RFLO1$MX$FltZ$cVal$mag$f 21P1 fault impedance magnitude
D21P1RFLO1$MX$FltZ$cVal$ang$f 21P1 fault impedance angle
D21P1RFLO1$MX$FltDiskm$mag$f 21P1 fault distance
D21P2RFLO2
D21P3RFLO3
D21P4RFLO4

D21P5RFLO5
D21N1RFLO6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N1RFLO6.
D21N1RFLO6$MX$FltZ$cVal$mag$f 21N1 fault impedance magnitude
D21N1RFLO6$MX$FltZ$cVal$ang$f 21N1 fault impedance angle
D21N1RFLO6$MX$FltDiskm$mag$f 21N1 fault distance
21N2RFLO7
D21N3RFLO8

D21N4RFLO9
D21N5RFLO10
DiSchRFLO11
This section defines logical node data for the logical node DiSchRFLO11.
DiSchRFLO11$MX$FltZ$cVal$mag$f Distance Scheme fault impedance magnitude
DiSchRFLO11$MX$FltZ$cVal$ang$f Distance Scheme fault impedance angle
DiSchRFLO11$MX$FltDiskm$mag$f Distance Scheme fault distance
DESchRFLO12
This section defines logical node data for the logical node DESchRFLO12.
DESchRFLO11$MX$FltZ$cVal$mag$f Distance Scheme fault impedance magnitude
DESchRFLO11$MX$FltZ$cVal$ang$f Distance Scheme fault impedance angle
DESchRFLO11$MX$FltDiskm$mag$f Distance Scheme fault distance

D50NRFLO13
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50NRFLO13.
D50NRFLO13$MX$FltZ$cVal$mag$f 50N fault impedance magnitude
D50NRFLO13$MX$FltZ$cVal$ang$f 50N fault impedance angle
D50NRFLO13$MX$FltDiskm$mag$f 50N fault distance
D51NRFLO14
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51NRFLO14.
D51NRFLO14$MX$FltZ$cVal$mag$f 51N fault impedance magnitude
D51NRFLO14$MX$FltZ$cVal$ang$f 51N fault impedance angle
D51NRFLO14$MX$FltDiskm$mag$f 51N fault distance
D50GRFLO15
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50GRFLO15.
D50GRFLO15$MX$FltZ$cVal$mag$f 50G fault impedance magnitude
D50GRFLO15$MX$FltZ$cVal$ang$f 50G fault impedance angle
D50GRFLO15$MX$FltDiskm$mag$f 50G fault distance
D51GRFLO16
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51GRFLO16.
D51GRFLO16$MX$FltZ$cVal$mag$f 51G fault impedance magnitude
D51GRFLO16$MX$FltZ$cVal$ang$f 51G fault impedance angle
D51GRFLO16$MX$FltDiskm$mag$f 51G fault distance

Protection Logical Device

D21P1PDIS1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21P1PDIS1.
D21P1PDIS1$ST$Str$general 21P1 Trip
D21P1PDIS1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 21P1 Direction (set to “unknown”)
D21P1PDIS1$ST$Op$general 21P1 Trip
D21P1PDIS1$ST$Op$phsA 21P1 Trip phase A
D21P1PDIS1$ST$Op$phsB 21P1 Trip phase B
D21P1PDIS1$ST$Op$phsC 21P1 Trip phase C
D21P1PDIS1$ST$Op$neut 21P1 Trip neutral
D21P2PDIS2

D21P3PDIS3
D21P4PDIS4
D21P5PDIS5

D21N1PDIS6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D21N1PDIS6.
D21N1PDIS6$ST$Str$general 21N1 Trip
D21N1PDIS6$ST$Str$dirGeneral 2NP1 Direction (set to “unknown”)
D21N1PDIS6$ST$Op$general 21N1 Trip
D21N1PDIS6$ST$Op$phsA 21N1 Trip phase A
D21N1PDIS6$ST$Op$phsB 21N1 Trip phase B
D21N1PDIS6$ST$Op$phsC 21N1 Trip phase C
D21N2PDIS7
D21N2PDIS7$ST$Op$phsC 21N2Trip phase C
D21N3PDIS8

D21N4PDIS9
D21N5PDIS10
LodEncPDIS11
This section defines logical node data for the logical node LodEncPDIS11.
LodEncPDIS11$ST$Str$general Load Encroachment Block
LodEncPDIS11$ST$Str$dirGeneral Load Encroachment Block Direction (set to “unknown”)
LodEncPDIS11$ST$Op$general Load Encroachment Block

D25SYCRSYN1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D25SYCRSYN1.
D25SYCRSYN1$ST$Rel$stVal 25/27/59 Sync Check
D27MPTUV1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27MPTUV1.
D27MPTUV1$ST$Str$general 27 Main Trip
D27MPTUV1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 27 Main Direction (set to “unknown”)
D27MPTUV1$ST$Op$general 27 Main Trip
D27MPTUV1$ST$Str$phsA 27 Main phase A Trip
D27MPTUV1$ST$Str$dirPhsA 27 Main phase A Direction (set to “unknown”)
D27MPTUV1$ST$Str$phsB 27 Main phase B Trip
D27MPTUV1$ST$Str$dirPhsB 27 Main phase B Direction (set to “unknown”)
D27MPTUV1$ST$Str$phsC 27 Main phase C Trip
D27MPTUV1$ST$Str$dirPhsC 27 Main phase C Direction (set to “unknown”)
D27APTUV2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27APTUV2.
D27APTUV2$ST$Str$general 27 Auxiliary Trip
D27APTUV2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 27 Auxiliary Direction (set to “unknown”)
D27APTUV2$ST$Op$general 27 Auxiliary Trip
D27APTUV2$ST$Str$phsA 27 Auxiliary phase A Trip
D27APTUV2$ST$Str$dirPhsA 27 Auxiliary phase A Direction (set to “unknown”)
D27APTUV2$ST$Str$phsB 27 Auxiliary phase B Trip
D27APTUV2$ST$Str$dirPhsB 27 Auxiliary phase B Direction (set to “unknown”)
D27APTUV2$ST$Str$phsC 27 Auxiliary phase C Trip
D27APTUV2$ST$Str$dirPhsC 27 Auxiliary phase C Direction (set to “unknown”)

D50BFMRBRF1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50BFMRBRF1.
D50BFMRBRF2$ST$Str$general 50BF Main 1 Trip
D50BFMRBRF2$ST$Str$dirGeneral Not mapped (set to “unknown”)
D50BFMRBRF2$ST$OpEx$general 50BF Main 1 Trip
D50BFMRBRF2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50BFMRBRF2.
D50BFMRBRF2$ST$Str$general 50BF Main 2 Trip
D50BFMRBRF2$ST$Str$dirGeneral Not mapped (set to “unknown”)
D50BFMRBRF2$ST$OpEx$general 50BF Main 2 Trip
D50BFARBRF3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50BFARBRF3.
D50BFARBRF3$ST$Str$general 50BF Auxiliary 1 Trip
D50BFARBRF3$ST$Str$dirGeneral Not mapped (set to “unknown”)
D50BFARBRF3$ST$OpEx$general 50BF Auxiliary 1 Trip
D50BFARBRF4
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50BFARBRF4.
D50BFARBRF4$ST$Str$general 50BF Auxiliary 2 Trip
D50BFARBRF4$ST$Str$dirGeneral Not mapped (set to “unknown”)
D50BFARBRF4$ST$OpEx$general 50BF Auxiliary 2 Trip

BFIRBRF5
This section defines logical node data for the logical node BFIRBRF5.
BFIRBRF5$ST$Str$general 50BF Initiation
BFIRBRF5$ST$Str$dirGeneral Not mapped (set to “unknown”)
BFIRBRF5$ST$OpEx$general 50BF Initiation
D50LS1PIOC1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50LS1PIOC1.
D50LS1PIOC1$ST$Op$general 50LS Main Trip
D50LS1PIOC1$ST$Op$phsA 50LS Main phase A Trip
D50LS1PIOC1$ST$Op$phsB 50LS Main phase B Trip
D50LS1PIOC1$ST$Op$phsC 50LS Main phase C Trip
D50LS2PIOC2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50LS2PIOC2.
D50LS2PIOC2$ST$Op$general 50LS Auxiliary Trip
D50LS2PIOC2$ST$Op$phsA 50LS Auxiliary phase A Trip
D50LS2PIOC2$ST$Op$phsB 50LS Auxiliary phase B Trip
D50LS2PIOC2$ST$Op$phsC 50LS Auxiliary phase C Trip

D50PIOC3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50PIOC3.
D50PIOC3$ST$Str$general 50 Trip
D50PIOC3$ST$Str$dirGeneral 50 Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D50PIOC3$ST$Op$general 50 Trip
D50PIOC3$ST$Op$phsA 50 Trip phase A Trip
D50PIOC3$ST$Op$phsB 50 Trip phase B Trip
D50PIOC3$ST$Op$phsC 50 Trip phase C Trip
D50NPIOC4
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50NPIOC4.
D50NPIOC4$ST$Str$general 50N Trip
D50NPIOC4$ST$Str$dirGeneral 50N Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D50NPIOC4$ST$Op$general 50N Trip
D4650PIOC5
D4650PIOC5$ST$Str$general 46/50 Trip
D4650PIOC5$ST$Str$dirGeneral 46/50 Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D4650PIOC5$ST$Op$general 46/50 Trip
D50GPIOC6
D50GPIOC6$ST$Str$general 50G Trip
D50GPIOC6$ST$Str$dirGeneral 50G Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D50GPIOC6$ST$Op$general 50G Trip

D51PTOC1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51PTOC1.
D51PTOC1$ST$Str$general 51 Alarm
D51PTOC1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 51 Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D51PTOC1$ST$Op$general 51 Trip
D51PTOC1$ST$Op$phsA 51 Trip phase A
D51PTOC1$ST$Op$phsB 51 Trip phase B
D51PTOC1$ST$Op$phsC 51 Trip phase C
D51NPTOC2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51NPTOC2.
D51NPTOC2$ST$Str$general 51N Alarm
D51NPTOC2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 51N Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D51NPTOC2$ST$Op$general 51N Trip
D4651PTOC3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D4651PTOC3.
D4651PTOC3$ST$Str$general 46/51 Alarm
D4651PIOC3$ST$Str$dirGeneral 46/51 Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D4651PTOC3$ST$Op$general 46/51 Trip
D51GPTOC4
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51GPTOC4.
D51GPTOC3$ST$Str$general 51G Alarm
D51GPIOC3$ST$Str$dirGeneral 51G Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D51GPTOC3$ST$Op$general 51G Trip

D46BCPTOC5
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D46BCTPOC5.
D46BCPTOC5$ST$Str$general 46BC Trip
D46BCPTOC5$ST$Str$dirGeneral 46BC Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D46BCPTOC5$ST$Op$general 46BC Trip
D60CTSMPTOC6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D60CTSMPTOC6.
D60CTSMPTOC6$ST$Ind1$stVal 60 CTS Main
D60CTSAPTOC7
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D60CTSAPTOC7.
D60CTSAPTOC7$ST$Ind1$stVal 60 CTS Auxiliary
D59M1PTOV1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59M1PTOV1.
D59M1PTOV1$ST$Str$general 59-1 Main Trip
D59M1PTOV1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 59-1 Main Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59M1PTOV1$ST$Str$phsA 59-1 Main phase A Trip
D59M1PTOV1$ST$Str$dirPhsA 59-1 Main phase A Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59M1PTOV1$ST$Str$phsB 59-1 Main phase B Trip
D59M1PTOV1$ST$Str$dirPhsB 59-1 Main phase B Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59M1PTOV1$ST$Str$phsC 59-1 Main phase C Trip
D59M1PTOV1$ST$Str$dirPhsC 59-1 Main phase C Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)

D59M2PTOV2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59MPTOV2.
D59M2PTOV2$ST$Str$general 59-2 Main Trip
D59M2PTOV2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 59-2 Main Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59M2PTOV2$ST$Str$phsA 59-2 Main phase A Trip
D59M2PTOV2$ST$Str$dirPhsA 59-2 Main phase A Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59M2PTOV2$ST$Str$phsB 59-2 Main phase B Trip
D59M2PTOV2$ST$Str$dirPhsB 59-2 Main phase B Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59M2PTOV2$ST$Str$phsC 59-2 Main phase C Trip
D59M2PTOV2$ST$Str$dirPhsC 59-22 Main phase C Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59A1PTOV3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59A1PTOV3.
D59A1PTOV3$ST$Str$general 59-1 Auxiliary Trip
D59A1PTOV3$ST$Str$dirGeneral 59-1 Auxiliary Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59A1PTOV3$ST$Str$phsA 59-1 Auxiliary phase A Trip
D59A1PTOV3$ST$Str$dirPhsA 59-1 Auxiliary phase A Trip Direction (set to

“unknown”)
D59A1PTOV3$ST$Str$phsB 59-1 Auxiliary phase B Trip
D59A1PTOV3$ST$Str$dirPhsB 59-1 Auxiliary phase B Trip Direction (set to

“unknown”)
D59A1PTOV3$ST$Str$phsC 59-1 Auxiliary phase C Trip
D59A1PTOV3$ST$Str$dirPhsC 59-1 Auxiliary phase C Trip Direction (set to

“unknown”)

D59A2PTOV4
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59A2PTOV4.
D59A2PTOV4$ST$Str$general 59-2 Auxiliary Trip
D59A2PTOV4$ST$Str$dirGeneral 59-2 Auxiliary Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59A2PTOV4$ST$Str$phsA 59-2 Auxiliary phase A Trip
D59A2PTOV4$ST$Str$dirPhsA 59-2 Auxiliary phase A Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59A2PTOV4$ST$Str$phsB 59-2 Auxiliary phase B Trip
D59A2PTOV4$ST$Str$dirPhsB 59-2 Auxiliary phase B Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59A2PTOV4$ST$Str$phsC 59-2 Auxiliary phase C Trip
D59A2PTOV4$ST$Str$dirPhsC 59-2 Auxiliary phase C Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59NIPTOV5
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59NIPTOV5.
D59NIPTOV5$ST$Str$general 59N Inverse Alarm
D59NIPTOV5$ST$Str$dirGeneral 59N Inverse Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59NIPTOV5$ST$Op$general 59N Inverse Trip
D59NDPTOV6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59NDPTOV6.
D59NDTOV6$ST$Str$general 59N DEF Alarm
D59NDTOV6$ST$Str$dirGeneral 59N DEF Trip Direction (set to “unknown”)
D59NDTOV6$ST$Op$general 59N DEF Trip
D60LOPPTOV7
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D60LOPPTOV7.
D60LOPPTOV7$ST$Str$general 60 Alarm
D60LOPPTOV7$ST$Op$general 60 Alarm

D68BIRPSB1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D68BIRPSB1.
D68BIRPSB1$ST$Op$general 68 Power Swing Trip
D68B1RPSB1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 68 Power Swing Direction (set to

“unknown”)
D68B1RPSB1$ST$BlkZn$stVal 68 Zone 1 block
D68B2RPSB2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D68B2RPSB2.
D68B2RPSB2$ST$Str$general 68 Power Swing Block
D68B2RPSB2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 68 Power Swing Direction (set to “unknown”)
D68B3RPSB3
D68B3RPSB3$ST$Str$general 68 Power Swing Trip
D68B4RPSB4

D68B5RPSB5
D68TrRPSB6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D68TrRPSB6.
D68TrRPSB6$ST$Str$general 68 Power Swing Trip
D79MRREC1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D79MRREC1.
D79MRREC1$ST$Auto$stVal 79 Main Reclose
D79MRREC1$ST$Op$general 79 Main Reclose
D79MRREC1$ST$AutoRecSt$stVal 79 Main Reclose status change
D79ARREC2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D79ARREC2.
D79ARREC2$ST$Auto$stVal 79 Auxiliary Reclose
D79ARREC2$ST$Op$general 79 Auxiliary Reclose
D79ARREC2$ST$AutoRecSt$stVal 79 Auxiliary Reclose status change

D81_1PFRC1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_1PFRC1.
D81_1PFRC1$ST$Str$general 81-1 rate of change of frequency Trip
D81_1PFRC1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 81-1 rate of change of frequency Direction

(set to “unknown”)
D81_1PFRC1$ST$Op$general 81-1 rate of change of frequency Trip
D81_2PFRC2
D81_2PFRC2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 81-2 rate of change of frequency Direction (set to

“unknown”)
D81_3PFRC3

“unknown”)
D81_4PFRC4

“unknown”)

D81_1PTOF1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_1PTOF1.
D81_1PTOF1$ST$Str$general 81-1 Overfrequency Trip
D81_1PTOF1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 81-1 Overfrequency Direction (set to “unknown”)
D81_1PTOF1$ST$Op$general 81-1 Overfrequency Trip
D81_2PTOF2
D81_3PTOF3
D81_4PTOF4

D81_1PTUF1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81_1PTUF1.
D81_1PTUF1$ST$Str$general 81-1 Underfrequency Trip
D81_1PTUF1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 81-1 Underfrequency Direction (set to “unknown”)
D81_1PTUF1$ST$Op$general 81-1 Underfrequency Trip
D81_2PTUF2
D81_3PTUF3
D81_4PTUF4

DisSchPSCH1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node DisSchPSCH1.
DisSchPSCH1$ST$ProTx$stVal Set to “FALSE”
DisSchPSCH1$ST$ProRx$stVal Distance Scheme Received
DisSchPSCH1$ST$Str$general Distance Scheme Send
DisSchPSCH1$ST$Str$dirGeneral Distance Scheme Send Direction (set to “unknown”)
DisSchPSCH1$ST$Op$general Distance Scheme Trip
DisSchPSCH1$ST$WeiOp$general Distance Scheme Weak Infeed Trip
DEFSchPSCH2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node DEFSchPSCH2.
DEFSchPSCH2$ST$ProTx$stVal Set to “FALSE”
DEFSchPSCH2$ST$ProRx$stVal DEF Scheme Received
DEFSchPSCH2$ST$Str$general DEF Scheme Send
DEFSchPSCH2$ST$Str$dirGeneral DEF Scheme Send Direction (set to “unknown”)
DEFSchPSCH2$ST$Op$general DEF Scheme Trip
SOTFPSOF1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node SOTFPSOF1.
SOTFPSOF1$ST$Ind$stVal SOTF Trip

System Logical Device

PLGGIO1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node PLGGIO1.
PLGGIO1$ST$Ind1$stVal ProLogic 1

SGGGIO2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node SGGGIO2.
SGGGIO2$ST$IntIn$stVal Active Settings Group
EIGGIO3
This section defines logical node data for the logical node EIGGIO3.
EIGGIO3$ST$Ind1$stVal External Input 1

OCGGIO4
This section defines logical node data for the logical node OCGGIO4.
OCGGIO4$ST$Ind1$stVal Relay inoperative Output Contact 1
OCGGIO4$ST$Ind2$stVal Output Contact 2

LEDGGIO5
This section defines logical node data for the logical node LEDGGIO5.
LEDGGIO5$ST$Ind1$stVal Target LED 1 State
LEDGGIO5$ST$Ind11$stVal Target LED 11 state
LEDGGIO5$ST$Ind18$stVal Alarm LED state
LEDGGIO5$ST$Ind19$stVal Service Required LED state

VIGGIO6
This section defines logical node data for the logical node VIGGIO6.
VIGGIO6$ST$Ind1$stVal Virtual Input 1

TSAlmGGIO7
This section defines logical node data for the logical node TSAlmGGIO7.
TSAlmGGIO7$ST$Ind$stVal Time Synchronization Alarm
SChAlmGGIO8
This section defines logical node data for the logical node SChAlmGGIO8.
SChAlmGGIO8$ST$Ind$stVal Self Check Fail Alarm
ComAlmGGIO9
This section defines logical node data for the logical node ComAlmGGIO9.
ComAlmGGIO9$ST$Ind$stVal 61850 Communication Alarm

Subscription Logical Device

SUBSCRGGIO1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node SUBSCRGGIO1.
SUBSCRGGIO1$ST$Ind1$stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 1
SUBSCRGGIO1$ST$Ind26$stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input26

Records Logical Device

RDRE1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node RDRE1.
RDRE1$ST$RcdMade$stVal Indicates records are stored on IED
RDRE1$ST$FltNum$stVal Number of fault recordings stored on IED
RDRE1$ST$RcdStr$stVal Indicates recording is in progress
RDRE1$ST$MemUsed$stVal % of recording memory used

SYS Logical Device
LGOS1-LGOS15
This section defines logical node data for the logical nodes LGOS1 to
LGOS15. There are potentially 15 LGOS LNs created, depending on the map-
ping present in the CID file. There is one LGOS LN created per GOOSE Con-
trol Block mapped to the SUBSCRGGIO1 LN (maximum of 15). The table
below shows only LGOS1, but the table applies to all LGOS LNs (only index
number changes).
LGOS1$ST$NdsCom$stVal Needs commission
LGOS1$ST$St$stVal Subscription state
LGOS1$ST$SimSt$stVal Simulation State
LGOS1$ST$LastStNum$stVal Last state number received
LGOS1$ST$GoCBRef$stVal GOOSE Control Block Reference

Control Logical Device

SPCSOPULGGIO1
This section defines logical node data for the logical node SPCSOPULGGIO1.
SPCSOPULGGIO1$ST$SPCSO1$stVal SPC Control Input 1 (Pulse)
SPCSOLATGGIO2
This section defines logical node data for the logical node SPCSOLATGGIO2.
SPCSOLATGGIO2$ST$SPCSO7$stVal SPC Control Input 7 (Latch)

Index
Index
Numerics group logic 5-50, 5-51, 7-30
21P phase distance 5-1
H
25/27/59 sync check 5-39
HyperTerminal 3-7
46/50/51/67 negative sequence
overcurrent 5-46 I
46BC - Broken Conductor 5-48 identification 7-8
50/51/67 phase overcurrent 5-42 IEC 61850 N-1
50BF breaker failure 5-39 inputs
50LS low set overcurrent 5-42 external 1-5
50N/51N/67 neutral overcurrent 5-44, IRIG-B time 3-3
7-30 IRIG-B time input 3-3
59 overvoltage 5-32
L
60 loss of potential 5-49, 7-30
LED lights 4-3
68 out of step 5-49
line parameters 7-23
79 recloser 5-25
81 frequency 5-37 M
81 over/under frequency 7-30 mho
characteristic shapes 5-3, 9-6
A phase and ground 5-2
ac and dc wiring 2-2
Alarm 4-3 O
analog input 7-9 Offliner settings 7-1
output contact 7-11
B Output Matrix 5-64, 7-31
Base MVA 7-18 output matrix 7-31
C P
calibrate 9-2 parameters
calibration 9-2 line 7-23
communication system 7-17
direct serial link 3-7 physical mounting 2-1
network link 3-7 power supply 3-2
relay 3-4
ProLogic 7-30
communication-aided scheme 5-53 protection functions 5-1, 7-29
CT turns ratio 7-18 graphing 7-29
D PT turns ratio 7-18
DCB logic 5-55 PUTT logic 5-56
dead line pickup 5-20 PUTT scheme 7-26
display 4-5 R
E record
ERL 61850 IED Configurator 7-34 duration and extension 5-60, 5-61
initiation 5-60
external input 7-10
length 7-21
F storage, retrieval and analysis 5-61
fault locator 5-49 RecordGraph software 7-33
Front display 4-1 recording 5-59
front display 4-2, 4-5 swing 5-60
Front view 4-1 Relay functional 4-1, 4-3
G S
Grounding 2-2 SCADA
D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual I

Index
accessing 3-12
communication parameters 3-12
diagnostics 3-12
protocol selection 3-12
scheme selector 7-25
Service 4-3
setting groups 7-15, 7-22
start-up 4-1
Switch On To Fault (SOTF) 5-20
system parameters 7-16, 7-17
system requirements 4-vi
hardware 4-vi
operating system 4-vi
T
Test mode 4-1, 4-3
testing
21N2 ground distance 9-22
21P1 phase distance 9-14
21P2 phase distanc 9-16
25/27/59 sync check 9-51
46-50/46-51 negative sequence
overcurrent 9-39
50/51 phase overcurrent 9-33
50BF breaker fail 9-46
50LS low set overcurrent 9-46
50N/51N neutral overcurrent 9-31
79 recloser 9-53
81 overfrequency 9-48
81 underfrequency 9-48
directional element 9-40
external inputs 9-3
output relay contacts 9-3
tool bar 7-3
V
version descriptions 3-xi
view settings 7-32
virtual inputs 7-13
W
weak infeed 5-23
II L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

L-PRO 4500: Transmission Line Protection Relay

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

L-PRO 4500: Transmission Line Protection Relay

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Digitally signed by Norbert Wegner

DN: cn=Norbert Wegner, o=ERLPhase Power Technologies

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual i

The manual uses a number of conventions to denote special information:

Start>Settings>Control Panel Choose the Control Panel submenu in the Set-

Right-click Click the right mouse button.

Recordings Menu items and tabs are shown in italics.

Service User input or keystrokes are shown in bold.

.. Indicates more screens.

Indicates further drop-down menu, click to dis-

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual iii

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual v

5 Protection Functions and Specifications ............ 5-1

vi L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

Appendix I Connection Diagram ................................... I-1

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual vii

CCVT - Capacitance Coupled Voltage Transformer

DCB - Directional Comparison Blocking

GPS - Global Positioning System

HMI - Human Machine Interface

ICD - file extension (.ICD) for IED Capability Description

LE- Load Encroachment

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual ix

PLC - Programmable Logic Controller

RHS - Right Hand Side

SCADA - Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition

x L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

This manual is compatible with higher versions of firmware or software

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual xi

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual vi

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual 1-1

Figure 1.1: L-PRO 4500 Relay Function Line Diagram

1-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

1.2 Front View

Figure 1.2: L-PRO 4500 Relay Front View

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual 1-3

1.3 Rear View

1. SLOT 1 to 3 / CON 3: Progammable External Inputs

Figure 1.3: L-PRO 4500 Relay Rear View

1-4 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual 1-5

1.4 Model Options/Ordering

1-6 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

2.1 Physical Mounting

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual 2-1

2.2 Case Grounding

The terminal used must be made of a material that is galvanically compatible

2-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

2.3 Power Supply

Ground the relay to station ground using the case-grounding terminal

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual 2-3

2.4 AC and DC Wiring

CT circuits shall be short-circuited before working on the current in-

2-4 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

2.5 Communication Wiring

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual 2-5

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual 3-1

3.2 Power Supply

3-2 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20

3.3 Time Sources

D04234R02.20 L-PRO 4500 User Manual 3-3

3.4 Communicating with the Relay Intelligent

3-4 L-PRO 4500 User Manual D04234R02.20